JP6545067B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

  A game machine such as a pachinko machine is made capable of receiving a game medium in a game area, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in the game area, and a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in the game area. Have a receiving port (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large winning opening, role winning opening), V winning opening, etc.), and gaming media can be accepted at the receiving opening. In addition, the player can be entertained by giving a bonus (playing of game media, occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous such as opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening, etc.), and the like. In addition, the gaming machine is provided with effect display means such as a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying an effect image at the center of the front view in the game area, and effects are displayed by displaying effect images according to the progress of the game. Even with the image, the player is entertained to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  In this type of gaming machine, an upper tray for storing gaming media for hitting into the gaming area below the gaming area in front view, and a lower tray for positioning gaming media below the upper tray and storing the gaming media And have. (For example, Patent Document 1)

  However, in a gaming machine provided with a tray for storing such game media, a more preferable one is required to realize the function as a tray.

JP, 2013-106751, A

  The present invention proposes a lower tray configuration more suitable for gaming machines.

The present invention
  A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed;
  A main unit frame on which the game board is mounted;
  A door frame which can be opened and closed on the body frame;
  An upper plate on which game media for playing a game in the game area are stored;
  A lower tray main body capable of storing game media in a storage area formed by a bottom wall portion of a predetermined shape and an upright wall portion of a predetermined height, and a lower tray to which game media can flow from a predetermined supply port
  A bulging portion provided in the door frame and bulging forward in the lower side of the game area in a front view and having a predetermined internal space in which gaming media do not flow from the lower plate;
  Equipped with
  The lower tray main body includes a first lower tray portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed, and a second lower tray portion integrally provided with the first lower tray portion and in communication with the supply port. Have
  The internal space includes a space present at a position higher than the standing wall portion of the lower tray main body at least
  A cover upright wall located in front of the supply port;
  The upright wall portion and the cover upright wall portion of the lower tray main body located in front of the supply port have a diagonal wall portion for rolling game media supplied from the supply port toward the first lower tray portion. And
  The cover upright wall has a boundary wall which is a boundary between a space above the storage area and the internal space.
  It is characterized by
  Also, the present invention is
  A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed;
  A main unit frame on which the game board is mounted;
  A door frame which can be opened and closed on the body frame;
  An upper plate on which game media for playing a game in the game area are stored;
  A lower tray main body capable of storing game media in a storage area formed by a bottom wall portion of a predetermined shape and an upright wall portion of a predetermined height, and a lower tray to which game media can flow from a predetermined supply port
  A bulging portion provided in the door frame and bulging forward in the lower side of the game area in a front view and having a predetermined internal space in which gaming media do not flow from the lower plate;
  Equipped with
  The lower tray main body includes a first lower tray portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed, and a second lower tray portion integrally provided with the first lower tray portion and in communication with the supply port. Have
  The internal space includes a space present at a position higher than the standing wall portion of the lower tray main body at least
  A cover ceiling that covers the upper side of the second lower plate;
  The standing wall portion of the lower tray main body located in front of the supply port has a diagonal wall portion for rolling game media supplied from the supply port toward the first lower tray portion.
  The cover ceiling has a boundary wall that is a boundary between the storage area and the internal space.
  It is characterized by

  According to the present invention, a more suitable lower dish can be provided.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side without the left frame member, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case of the ball feeding unit and the tamperproof member and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member and looked at the front from the front, and (b) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member and looked at the back from the lid member. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame from the front right, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the left front. (A) is a perspective view of the pan unit as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the pan unit from the lower left rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a lower tray in the state which removed the lower tray cover in sectional drawing of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a) (C) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example provided with a different ball guiding portion. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing the lower tray made divisible, and (b) is a schematic illustration showing a state where the storage area of the lower tray is expanded according to the size of the space behind the rendering operation unit It is a figure and (c) is an explanatory view showing the lower tray of (b) with a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in a door frame, (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.48 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of a production operation unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the rendering operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the rendering operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. A portion of the operation button is cut out and a portion that is about to be hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown by the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of a rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of a rendering operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending . (A) is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line | wire in Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the HH line | wire in FIG.64 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd rendering operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd rendering operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button is extended, with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub screen of the screen unit It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned to the front. FIG. 74 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line J-J in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 74 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in FIG. 74 (b). In (a), when the main screen is directed forward and the second effect operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, it is intended to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button (B) is an explanatory view showing a portion where the second effect operation unit in the state of (a) shows a portion that is about to be concealed by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, etc. It is. In (a), the second effect operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub screen directed forward, in an attempt to hide it by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button (B) is an explanatory view showing a portion where the second effect operation unit in the state of (a) shows a portion that is about to be concealed by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, etc. It is. (A) is a front view of a third effect operation unit different from that of the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77, and (b) is a right side view of the third effect operation unit is there. It is a rear view of the third effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd rendering operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 3rd rendering operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 78 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line in FIG. 78 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 3rd rendering operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 3rd rendering operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd base unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the decoration rotary body unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the decoration rotation body unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the back. (A) is a front view of the third rendering operation unit shown with the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating unit facing forward, (b) is a direction in which the central axis of the operating button extends in (a) It is explanatory drawing seen from. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 1st decoration surface part in the state which orient | assigned the 1st decoration surface part ahead in the 3rd production operation unit, (b) is the 2nd decoration surface part front in a 3rd production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 2nd decoration surface part in the state which turned to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the movable presentation which rotates a decoration rotation body unit in a 3rd production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable presentation which rotates a decoration rotation body unit in the state which made the 1st decoration surface part and the 2nd decoration surface part rotate in a 3rd production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the air by rotation of a 2nd decoration surface part in a 3rd rendering operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. FIG. 93 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line N-N in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the back FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line in FIG. 97 (a). FIG. 97 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 97 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 97 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 102 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 102 taken along the line R-R. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout device and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout device and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a payout device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line S-S in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction path | pass by the ball extraction movable piece in a delivery apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which open | released the ball extraction path by the ball extraction movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full tank path unit in the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball channel unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full tank path unit, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full ball channel unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit in the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball channel unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full-scale ball path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the guideway opening-closing door has closed in the lower full tank path unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the guideway opening-closing door is opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full-tan ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the payout unit. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel opaque. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 129 from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 129 from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is the front view which cut the front unit in a game board in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game field. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel transparent. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front component and game panel in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit and side unit in the front unit of a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit in the front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball in an attacker unit in a cross section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center character in the front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit by main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back box in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back box in the back unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back front decoration unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back front decoration unit in the back unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back up movable presentation unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back up movable presentation unit in a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up raising / lowering unit of the back up movable presentation unit and was seen from the front with a back up movable main body unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up raising / lowering unit of the back up movable presentation unit and was seen from back with a back up movable main body unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable main body unit of the back up movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable main body unit of the back up movable presentation unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the back-up movable effect unit showing the back-up movable body unit in a normal raised position, and (b) is a back view showing the back-up movable body unit in a lowered position. It is a front view of a movable presentation unit. It is a front view of a back upper movable main body unit schematically showing the rotation of the back top first rotating decoration and the revolution of the back top second rotating decoration. It is a front view of a back top movable main unit which shows roughly movement of a plurality of back up appearance and appearance decoration and LED of a back top decoration board. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a back upper 2nd rotation decoration and a back rising appearance decoration in a back upper movable main body unit according to a rotation angle of a back top 1st rotation decoration. FIG. 156 is an explanatory view, illustrating the motion of the back second rotating decorative body and the back facing appearing decoration according to the rotation angle of the back top first rotating decoration, following FIG. 156. (A) is a front view of the back upper movable main unit shown together with the LED of the back upper decorative substrate in a state where the back upper first rotary decorative body is rotated 45 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state; ) Is a cross-sectional view taken along the line T-T in (a). FIG. 158 is an explanatory drawing showing the relationship between the back-to-back decoration and the second LED on the back-top decoration substrate at the appearance position by enlarging the part of arrow A in FIG. 158. It is a front view of a back-to-back movable effect unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back movable presentation unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back rear movable presentation unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back side movable presentation unit into the fixed side unit side and the turntable side, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side movable presentation unit to the fixed side unit side and the turntable side, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the turning table side of the back from back movable presentation unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the swiveling table side of a back rear movable presentation unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the turning table side of the back movement effect | action production unit into every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the turning table side of a back-to-back movable presentation unit by every main structure, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the turning structure of the turntable in a back rear center movable presentation unit in the front view of a back back movable presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the rotation to the direction of anticlockwise rotation of the turntable in a back-rear center movable presentation unit. It is an explanatory view showing roughly rotation to the direction of clockwise rotation of a turntable in a back-rear center movable presentation unit. Fig. 171 is an explanatory view schematically showing rotation of the turning table in the clockwise direction, continued from Fig. 171; It is the perspective view which looked at the back back left movable presentation unit and back back right movable presentation unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a back rear left movable presentation unit and a back rear right movable presentation unit in a back unit from back. The rear back left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit are disassembled into the back rear left movable decoration unit, the back rear right movable decoration unit, the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit, and viewed from the front It is a disassembled perspective view. The rear back left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit are disassembled into the back rear left movable decoration unit, the back rear right movable decoration unit, the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit, and viewed from behind It is a disassembled perspective view. It is a front view of a back rear left movable presentation unit in a back unit, and a back rear left movable decoration unit and a back rear right movable decoration unit in a back rear right movable presentation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back left movable decoration unit and back back right movable decoration unit in back back left movable presentation unit and back back right movable presentation unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at back back left movable decoration unit and back back right movable decoration unit in back back left movable presentation unit and back back right movable presentation unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back movable left movable decoration unit and back back right movable decoration unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back movable left movable decoration unit and back back right movable decoration unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left rotation decoration body and back back right rotation decoration body, and rotation connection mechanism of the back back left movable decoration unit and back back right movable decoration unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left rotation decoration body and back back right rotation decoration body, and the rotation connection mechanism of back back left movable decoration body unit and back back right movable decoration unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation connection mechanism of the assembled state, (b) is a disassembled perspective view of a rotation connection mechanism. (A) is an explanatory view showing a movable member of the back movable left movable decoration unit in the back movable left movable effect unit from the left side, and (b) is a back rear left movable decorative unit in the back left movable movable unit It is an explanatory view showing the movable member of from the front. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a back back left rotation decoration in a back back left movable decoration unit in the back back left movable effect unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing a movable member of the back rear right movable decoration unit in the back rear right movable rendering unit from the front, and (b) is a back rear right movable decoration unit in the back rear right movable rendering unit It is an explanatory view showing a movable member from the right side. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back rear right rotation decoration in the back rear right movable decoration unit in the back rear right movable effect unit. (A) is a back rear left movable decoration unit and a back rear right movable decoration unit in the back rear left movable decoration unit and a back rear right movable decoration unit in the back left movable effect unit and the back back right movable effect unit. It is a front view shown in the state of the 1st production position, (b) is a front view showing the back rotation left rotation decoration body and the back rotation right rotation decoration body in the state which was rotated to the 2nd production position, (c) These are front views shown in the state which turned the back back left rotation decoration body and the back back right rotation decoration body to the 3rd rendering position. (A) is a perspective view of the back and left slide unit and the back and right slide unit in the back and left movable effect unit and the back and back right movable and effect unit seen from the front, and (b) is the back and left and left movable effect unit and It is the perspective view which looked at a back rear left slide unit and a back rear right slide unit in a back rear right movable presentation unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back slide left slide unit and the back back right slide unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back slide left slide unit and the back back right slide unit and was seen from back. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back and rear left movable decoration unit and the back and back right movable decoration unit by the back and rear left slide unit and the back and rear right slide unit in the back and rear left movable effect unit and the back and rear right movable effect unit. (A) is a front view showing the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit in the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit in a normal separated position, (b) The back movable left movable decoration unit and the back movable right decoration unit are moved to the approaching position by the back movable left moving unit and the back movable right moving unit by the back movable left sliding unit and the back rear right sliding unit. It is a front view shown by. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back and rear movable presentation unit in the back and rear movable presentation unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front together with the turn table; It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back movable upper movable presentation unit by main structure, and was seen from the back with a turntable. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state in which the sub effect display device in the back rear upper movable effect unit is at the retracted position farthest from the turning center, and (b) is a sub effect display device as a pivotable position It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which was carried out by schematic structure, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which made the protrusion position which approached the pivoting center closest to the turning center by schematic structure. (A) is a front view of the turn table side of the back movable executability unit showing the sub rendering display of the back movable upper movable effect unit in the normal retracted position, and (b) is a projection of the sub effect display It is a front view by the side of a turntable in a back rear movable production unit shown in the state where it is in a position. It is a front view of the back rear movable effect unit which shows the state which made the sub effect display apparatus the turning possible position in a 1st turning position by schematic structure. It is a front view of the back rear movable presentation unit which shows the movable range of the sub presentation display apparatus in a 1st turning position by schematic structure. It is a front view of the back rear movable effect unit which shows the movable range of the sub effect display apparatus in a 2nd turning position by schematic structure. It is a front view of the back rear movable presentation unit which shows the movable range of the sub presentation display apparatus in a 3rd turning position by schematic structure. (A) is a perspective view of the back-to-back movable production unit in the back-to-back movable production unit seen from the front, and (b) is the back of the back unit back-to-back movable presentation unit in the back-to-back movable production unit It is the perspective view seen from. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the back top 1st rotation decoration body and the back top 2nd rotation decoration body in the back top movable presentation unit in a back unit to the fall position. The back table of the back unit is separated from the back movable left decoration unit and the back movable right decoration unit after the back movable left display unit and the back movable right display unit in the state of the first turning position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved from the position to the approach position. The back table of the back unit The back movable left movable effect unit and the back movable right movable unit in the state of the third turning position in the state of the third turning position of the swivel table in the movable effect unit It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved from the position to the approach position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the sub production | presentation display apparatus in the back rear movable presentation unit of the back unit to the protrusion position in the normal 1st turning position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where it has turned from the first turning position to the second turning position in a state where the sub effect display device in the back rear movable effect unit of the back unit is in the projecting position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the sub effect display device has been moved to the reverse position from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where it is moved from the 2nd turning position to the 3rd turning position in the state of a projection position in the state of a projection position in which the sub effect display device in the back rear movable effect unit of back unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the sub effect display device has been moved to the reverse position from the state of FIG. In the state of FIG. 205, the back rear left rotation decoration and back rear right rotation decoration in the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit in the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit While being in the state of three staging positions, move the back top first rotary decoration and back top second rotary decoration of the back top movable effect unit to the lowered position, and set the back top first rotary decoration and back top second rotation It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which is rotating the decoration body. It is a block diagram which roughly shows the control structure of a pachinko machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. Moreover, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a door frame for a pachinko machine, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit.

  The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend laterally, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which connect the both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view The outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30 on the left end side in front view of the curtain plate member 50 are provided. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a quadrangle in which the external shape of the front view extends vertically and which has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 which penetrates back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 attached to the front lower right corner below the side 111 and operable by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is attached to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game unit being attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and the dish unit 320 which are attached to the lower front on the lower side and the dish unit 320 It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 and the presentation operation unit 400 capable of presenting participatory effects. A door frame left side unit 540, a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right side on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 540 And a door frame top unit 570 attached to a front upper portion above the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-like main frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 is attached to the lower front of the front and is for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 in a front view. 4, A lock unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped character attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 to pay out the game ball to the player -Like payout unit 800, a base board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a rear of the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 openably and closably And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  Dispensing unit 800 of body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of body frame base 600 and attached to the top of dispensing unit base 801 and extends upward and leftwardly. A ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from a not-shown island facility in a box shape, and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, and the gaming balls in the ball tank 802 are left as viewed from the front A tank guide 803 extending to the left and right, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 at the upper left side in a front view and guiding the gaming ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; Gaming balls which are detachably mounted on the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 A payout device 830 which pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 951 accommodated in the payout control substrate box 950 and a gaming ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward An upper full-ball path unit 850 which causes the game balls to be released from either the normal outlet 850d or the full tank outlet 850e according to the storage state of the gaming balls in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320 and the payout unit A normal guiding path 861 and a full guiding path 861 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guiding the gaming ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the penetrating ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full tank receptacle 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the main body frame base 600 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass A speaker unit 920 having a 921. A power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and having a power supply substrate housed therein, and attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls. And a delivery control board box 950. .

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from the ball launcher 680 are the top of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding the game, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a There is.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the gaming ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the game ball has a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the ball launcher 680. It is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when the gaming balls driven into the gaming area 5a are received by the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by the payout of the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of an outer frame in a pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 16 (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a disassembled (a) FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extends in the left and right direction, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. And the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which are extended in The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side faces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same surface. It is done.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front end left side of the upper frame member 10 and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60; An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end upper portion of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 can attach the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 so as to be able to open and close.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is mounted on the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached at a position from the left to right center of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 And a flat right sliding member 82 mounted at a position near the right end of the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. It has a connecting member 85 connected. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hooking member 90 and the lower hooking member 91 are engaged with the outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later. , Equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engagement notch 11 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. An upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached to the inside of the engagement notch 11. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is equipped with the mounting step part 12 which was depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a front view left side edge part. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed in the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower lengths of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the lower frame member 20 are equal to those of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and rear width of the. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engagement notch 21 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left fixing member 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are mounted in the engagement notch 21.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 is provided with a front end notch 22 which is recessed rearward from the front surface of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same dimension as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded shape of a metal such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward between the position near the rear with respect to the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end on the side surface that is the outside in the left-right direction. It has the convex recessed parts 31 and 41, and the protrusion parts 32 and 42 which bulged from the side surface on the opposite side of the recessed parts 31 and 41, and the inside is formed in the cavity. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the projecting portions 32 and 42, an upper left connecting member 85A, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted and attached.

  Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 while holding the pachinko machine 1 in place when carrying or installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility such as a game hall or the like. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 is U-shaped in such a size that the game ball can pass from the left end of the rear extension 51 and the rear extension 51 extending in the form of a flat plate to the rear near the left end in front view on the upper surface. A left discharge hole 52 which is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates up and down with a size which allows the game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall 54 extending flatly upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension 51 and a front side bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall 54 And a return portion 55 which is inclined so as to move rearward toward the rear.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The horizontal part 71 mentioned later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. In addition, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extension 51 at the upper surface and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end at the upper surface And a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left slide member 81 and the right slide member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although the illustration is omitted, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-like interior divided into a grid by a plurality of ribs, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape fixed to the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61 as illustrated. Of the front extension 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as going forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61 A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lower side extending from the end of the front extension 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open from the left end to the horizontal fixing A flat plate-like hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16 (b) and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting stepped portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and fixed by screws not shown. There is. Further, the front extension portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to insert the main frame 4 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be supported openable and closable. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
The lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is, as shown in FIG. 16, a band-plate shaped lock main body 66a having a predetermined width on the left and right and extending back and forth, and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, a resiliently deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending diagonally forward to the left after extending from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and an attachment hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock main body 66a And 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by a mounting screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member It extends forward so as to be in contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a main frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main frame upper upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock main body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view by rotating the lock main body 66a in the direction in which the front end moves to the left by the operation of the operation portion 66b. Can be completely through. Thus, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontally extending flat horizontal portion 71 and the horizontal portion 71. A flat plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 are vertically penetrated, and only one game ball can pass through. And a discharge hole 74 of a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape whose left side is a base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached at a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 to the left. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and extends from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the front side of the projecting portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is inserted into the main frame lower lower hinge member (not shown) in the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, whereby the outer frame lower upper hinge pin 70 is inserted. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be able to open and close in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 matches the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. Specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the space is rolled backward and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game frame 4 from rolling to the rear side, the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member 20 and a left lower connecting member 85C connecting the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And 86 a flat lower lower fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connection member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 from the front and rear both sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided separately in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are respectively fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the projecting portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. As a result, it is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward more than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. Ru.

[2-9. Locking mechanism of outer frame side upper hinge member]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. Refer to the description. Fig.17 (a) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper side. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts on the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 The lock main body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip end portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, A space in which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  In the supporting mechanism of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a The right side face of the lock body 66 is in close proximity to the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side face of the front end of the lock main body 66a and the right hanging In the normal pivotally supported state, the respective centers of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are diagonally offset and opposed It is in the state.

  And, in this normal support state, since the main frame upper hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin There is almost no load from 622 on the front end face of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. In addition, since the front end face of the lock main body 66a is formed in a circular arc shape, when the operation portion 66b is turned to turn the lock member 66, the lock member 66 is smoothly turned. There is. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is taken as the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the slope of the bearing groove 63 formed in the V shape and abuts on the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force A component force F1 (a normal direction of an arc of a front end face of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arc shaped front end face, a body frame upper hinge pin 622 and a bearing groove 63 The component force F1 is directed to the center (rotation center of the lock member 66) of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side The moment that the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 rotates in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right does not work, and the hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is one of the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal pivotally supported state or a state where the action force of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, and integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from coming off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move to the right, the front right side of the lock main body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 to further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  Note that even if the shape of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the forward extension portion 62. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, Even when the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a just abuts on the hanging portion 65, and therefore the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper side of the main frame in the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63 Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 abuts on the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 pivots around the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is moved by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 is pivoted so that the front end of the arm moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can rotate at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

  When removing the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to turn the locking member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock main body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member]
Ball catching prevention for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upright wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the rear side of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upstanding wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the incorrect tool from being inserted further backward. Thus, it is possible to prevent a fraud from being conducted through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the incorrect tool in contact with the upper wall portion 54 is bent upward, the end of the incorrect tool by the return portion 55 Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from invading the rear side of the main body frame 4, and cheating is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably blocked.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the gaming ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Because the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the gaming balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 Between the game ball and the game ball can be reduced.

  Therefore, by the game ball being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged or the main frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. A gap is created between the main unit frame 4 and the gap, which can be used to prevent fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross section taken along the line C-C in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, etc., the door frame 3 is attached to the frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular shape with the outline of the front view extending vertically and the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100 The handle unit 300, the dish unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the dish unit 320 A door frame left side unit 540 attached to the front left of the 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side Door frame top attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is provided with a knit 570, a.

  Although details will be described later, the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back in a rectangular shape (square shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view are hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a crime prevention cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; A door frame 3 and a main body frame 4 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and a main body frame 4 and an outer frame 2 Between the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, the ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launcher 680, and the ball attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 And a fall cover unit 270 for receiving the game balls which have been fired by the launch device 680 and have not reached the game area 5a and discharged to the lower tray 322.

  The details of the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described later, but the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 can be adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player turning the rotatable handle 302. It is possible to drive into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with an extra strength.

  The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper dish 321 for storing gaming balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and gaming balls provided under the upper dish 321 and supplied from the upper dish 321 and the far cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for extracting the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a cash obtained by subtracting a game ball loaned from a ball lending machine or a return button 329 for returning a prepaid card, a cash inserted into the ball lending machine And a ball loan return display unit 330 for displaying the number of remaining prepaid cards and the like, a production selection left button 331 and a production selection right button 332, which allow reception of the player's operation at the time of presentation, and a lower tray Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player It can be done. Although this effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, a door frame side effect capable of displaying the effect image, which is disposed so as to be visible from the player side in the operation button 410 and the large operation button 410 operable by the player And a display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the plate unit 320, although the detailed contents will be described later. It decorates the left outside of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 540 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. It decorates the right outside of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes to the front more largely than the door frame left side unit 540, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both left and right sides. And a right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can emit and decorate the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 in the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the left and right sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the front center, and the top middle decoration member 576 A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can emit and decorate the top middle decoration member 576, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side in a front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 300 is attached to the front lower corner, and the plate unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame left side unit 540 is on the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 is, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 which has a rectangular shape whose front view outline extends vertically and which penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 are projected forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640, and a front face of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 A door frame left side decoration substrate 160 mounted on the left side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base 110 in front view and is attached to the cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 for closing the through hole 111, a crime prevention cover 200 for covering a lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an open / close cylinder unit attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to project forward through the door frame base 110. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending display portion 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) And a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the upper speakers 573 and the like and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the penetration opening 111 formed in the substantially rectangular shape which the inner peripheral shape in the plain view extended up and down. The upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the through hole 111 approach the outer periphery of the door frame base 110 respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is from the lower end of the door frame base 110 vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner in the front view of the front view, and is inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 112, and the through hole 111. The cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening and closing cylinder unit 210 is attached is recessed toward the front from the rear surface in the vicinity of the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting portion 113 penetrates back and forth The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting surface 112 in a front view on the left before and behind the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, The lower plate passage port 116 and the front side of the door frame base 110 are penetrated forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 in the vicinity of the left end, and the through ball passage 273 of the far cover unit 270 is faced forward A recess for the plate 117, a recess from the rear to the front along the inner circumference of the through hole 111, a glass unit attachment portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and left and right on the door frame base 110 It has the speaker insertion port 119 which penetrates back and forth in the corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1 b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110, thereby enhancing the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left and right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a laterally extending middle reinforcement attached below the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side in a front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in the front surface on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 It has a sheet metal 134 and a locking / locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame wedge 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

  The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking / locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending a metal sheet. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch 132 a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although not shown in detail, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 which are bent in the front-rear direction, The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the portion, and the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire and a screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1 c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame upper hinge member 140 is a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141 a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 which penetrates the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 Between the wedge member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 And a lock spring 144 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece connecting the rear ends of a pair of projecting pieces 141a although not shown, and the shape of the side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, mounting pieces connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projecting upward from the upper projecting piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the site | part which protrudes below rather than the lower side piece 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

  The wedge member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted. The upper end is in contact with the wedge member 143, and the lower end is in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the wedge member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141 a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward through the wedge member 143. .

  The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. By coming into contact with the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount than the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame upper hinge member 140 holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, and pulls the portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, whereby the door frame The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved entirely downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it down. Can. Thereby, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, whereby the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is obtained. , And can be rotatably supported relative to the body frame 4.

  Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower lower hinge member 150 described later. It is coaxially supported with the lower hinge pin 152. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a good state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1 d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket And a cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extension piece 151a.

  The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the flat extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and the overall shape of the side view Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) of the lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  The lower end of the lower door frame hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end portion is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is disposed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame lower hinge member 640. Support.

[3-1 e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the left side in a front view of the through hole 111. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height at a position lower than the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side in the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through opening 111 A door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height at the lower position of the frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage 117 And a substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 are respectively provided with a plurality of LEDs 161 a and 162 a capable of emitting light forward on the front surface. The LEDs 161a and 162a are full color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 540 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161 a and 162 a provided on the front surface By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 540 can be decorated to emit light.

[3-1 f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit attachment member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit attachment member 170 has a disk-like base 171 rotatably mounted about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a bar-like projection from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion outside the glass unit attachment portion 118 below the pair of speaker insertion holes 119 in the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  By setting the glass unit attachment member 170 to rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is more outward than the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. In the state of being positioned, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base portion 171 with the glass unit 190 inserted in the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 is glass The rear side of the mounting piece 191 a of the unit 190 abuts against the rear side of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit attachment member 170, the projection 172 projects from the disk-like base 171 rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so the center of gravity of the glass unit attachment member 170 is located in the projection 172 . From this, in the state where the glass unit attachment member 170 can freely rotate, the protrusion 172 is stabilized in the state of protruding downward from the base 171. And, in the glass unit attachment member 170, since the projection 172 restricts the backward movement of the glass unit 190 at the rotational position where the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171, the glass unit attachment Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the projecting portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction on the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, the glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the projection 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the projection 172 is attached to the attachment piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved backward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 extends outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 from the rear end of the cylindrical cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181. A plurality of annular flanges 182 extending, and a plurality of protruding into the cylindrical portion 181 and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 181 and disposed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, the three protruding ridges 183 are provided, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment surface 112 with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. The three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182. The axis 181 is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same inclined state.

[3-1 h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 is for closing the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-like glass frame 191 attachable to the glass unit attachment portion 118 larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110, and the inside of the glass frame 191 closed. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated in the front and back direction so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 26 etc.).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side And a plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be in contact with the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191 b is insertable into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is inserted from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated to make the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 a mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110.

[3-1 i. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The crime prevention cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Security cover 200 is disposed with a flat main body portion 201 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection piece 202 which protrudes backwards short along the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 201, and is separated left and right And a pair of locking pieces 203 that project forward relative to the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body portion 201 of the crime prevention cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward more than the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5 a in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer periphery of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and the strength and the rigidity are high. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protrusion 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear projection 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the gaming ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the gaming ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not abut the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200, and the inside of the gaming area 5a There is no impediment to hitting the game ball into.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the crime prevention cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  In the state where the crime prevention cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191). The removed rear projection 202 is inserted into the security recess (not shown) of the front component 1000. In addition, the security cover 200 has a state in which the rear projection 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward more than the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component member 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to intrude into the game area 5a from below the front of 5 between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the crime prevention recess. An unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the area 5a.

[3-1 j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 extending in the front and rear direction, and a lock unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and locking operation of a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmitting member 212 to be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of 700 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

  The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) opened at the rear, and is directed from the rear end to the front at a position opposite to sandwich the central axis. And a pair of notched portions 212a. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (a key inserted into the key hole 211 a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 and the key cylinder 710 can be rotated.

  The cylinder mounting plate metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in plan view is projected forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a rectangular plate-like front plate portion 213a that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of side plate portions 213b that extend in a flat plate shape rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in the form of a flat plate in the direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right in front view is of the reinforcing unit 130 It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thereby, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  In the open / close cylinder unit 210 assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 is the cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 are accommodated in a box-like cylinder mounting portion 113 which is inserted into the housing 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-1 k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the back case removed and the tamperproof member removed. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launcher 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be It can be pulled out to the lower plate by the operation of the removal button 327.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front and back direction An entrance 251a, and a box-like front cover 251 having a ball outlet 251b opened to the lower side of the entrance 251a and opened at the rear, and a box closing the rear end of the front cover 251 and opening the front And a rear cover 252 having a striking ball supply port 252a for supplying to the ball launcher 680 the gaming ball which has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front and rear direction, the rear cover 252 and the front cover A partition 253a rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and separating the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251 The game balls on the separating member 253a of the ball removing member 253 and the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the ball hitting supply port 252a of the back cover 252 and extend in the vertical direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 A ball feeding member 254 rotatably supported around the axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 255 for turning the ball feeding member 254 are provided.

  The ball feeding unit 250 has a ball feeding member 254 disposed on the right side of the entrance 251 a in a front view, as shown, and the ball removing member 253 is provided on the left side of the ball feeding member 254. The ball feeding solenoids 255 are respectively disposed on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 251 c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251 b in front view. The actuating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253, which will be described later, is designed to extend forward. Further, the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feed guiding path 323e of the pan unit base 323 and the upstream side of the ball removing guiding path 323f. It is formed so as to close from the rear side a site which is open to the rear at the end side.

  The ball removing member 253 divides the space between the inlet 251 a and the ball outlet 251 b below the inlet 251 a and divides the lower surface in the direction of the ball feeding member 254, and the ball of the partition 253 a It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and is bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b from near the middle in the vertical direction, and the lower end is rotated about an axis extending in the front and rear direction From the side surface of the pivoting rod 253b below the actuating rod 253c, the pivoting rod 253b supported movably, the rod-like operating rod 253c projecting forward from the upper end of the pivoting rod 253b, and the operating rod 253c And a weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253 c of the ball removing member 253 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 251 c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The actuating rod 253 c abuts on the upper end of the actuating transmission portion 327 a operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball release button 327 of the disc unit 320 via the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feed member 254 is directed toward the entrance 251a and the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253, and has a blocking portion 254a having a fan-like plan view centering on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a The ball holding portion 254b is recessed in an arc shape toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped collar portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 is sized to be able to hold one gaming ball. The ball feed member 254 is pivoted about the axis of rotation by moving the collar portion 254 c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feed solenoid 255 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feed member 254 has a supply position in which the ball holding portion 254b is in communication with the ball hitting supply port 252a at the same time as the blocking portion 254a faces the partition portion 253a, and the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a. It is pivoted between the holding position facing it. When the ball feed member 254 is at the supply position, the gaming ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the ball striking supply port 252a to the ball firing device 680, and the gaming ball entered into the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the movement toward the ball holding portion 254b (ball hitting supply port 252a) is blocked by the blocking portion 254a, and the movement of the ball holding portion 254b remains on the partition portion 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 is turned to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 254b on the flange portion 254c side closes the hitting supply port 252a. The game ball on the partition part 253a is held in the ball holding part 254b by only one.

  Also, the ball feed unit 250 has a ball feed operating rod 256 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 255, and a back and forth movement of the tip of the ball feed rod 256 moving in the vertical direction. And a ball feed crank 257 for pivoting the ball feed member 254 around the vertically extending axis while pivoting about the axially extending axis. The ball feed crank 257 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256 and extends in the left and right direction from an engaging portion 257a and a side engaged with the ball feed operating rod 256 of the engaging portion 257a A shaft portion 257b disposed on the opposite side and pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 and extending upward from the shaft portion 257b And a transmission portion 257c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the member 254.

  The ball feeding unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feeding actuating rod 256 which is rocked by the driving of a ball feeding solenoid 255 which is advanced and retracted in the vertical direction by a ball feeding actuating rod 256 and a ball feeding crank 257 It can be turned. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip end is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is at the supply position. It will be located in Further, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 so that the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 254 pivots to the holding position. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 254 receives one gaming ball and the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 254 Can be sent (supplied) to the ball launch device 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by the firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 682.

  In addition, the ball removing member 253 rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 250 is configured such that a moment is applied by the weight portion 253 d so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view. The rotation of the actuating rod 253c is restricted by the contact of the actuating rod 253c with the upper end of the actuating transmission portion 327a which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball releasing button 327 of the disc unit 320. The parting part 253a of the part separates the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, and the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  Then, when the player presses the upper bowl ball release button 327 of the tray unit 320 downward, the upper bowl ball removal slider 327b slides downward with the operation transmission portion 327a to move the operation transmission portion 327a downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c is also moved relatively downward. When the actuating rod 253c moves downward together with the actuating transmission portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partitioning portion 253a is released. Be done. Thereby, the game ball entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball removal guiding path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  The upper disc ball removal slider 327b in which the operation transmission portion 327a with which the actuating rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 abuts is biased upward by the upper disc ball removal spring 327c. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper disc ball release spring 327c through the actuating rod 253c, and breakage of the ball removal member 253 and the like can be prevented. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 253a.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is provided with a rectangular attachment recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) etc.) that is recessed forward on the upper right in the back view of the hitting supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 252 b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends in the left and right direction, and is separated vertically at a substantially central position in the vertical direction between predetermined distances from the right side to the left. A lower piece portion 262, and an inclined portion 263 each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 facing each other . The upper piece portion 261 of the tamper-proof member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamper-proof member 260 so that the right end in the front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 262 extends in the same plane as the general surface of the tamperproof member 260. Thus, in the plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove which spreads as it goes to the right.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 is in communication with the inside of the bat striking hole supply port 252a. Become.

  According to this fraud preventing member 260, the illegal gaming ball attached with the string is driven from the upper plate 321 through the ball feeding unit 250 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 680 and attached to the illegal gaming ball When a cheating operation is performed such that an illegal game ball is moved into and out of the first starting opening 2002 etc. by operating the string, the force of the illegal game ball fired (hit ball) by the ball launching device 680 causes an illegal action. The string attached to the game ball is inserted between the upper piece part 261 and the lower piece part 262, and then V-shaped narrow formed by the upper piece part 261 and the lower piece part 262 It can be cut off by a part, and it can prevent that the fraudulent act using the illegal game ball which attached the string is performed.

[3-1 l. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of a front cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the rear cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view from the front with the cover removed, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view from the back with the cover removed. is there. Furthermore, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid removed.

  As shown in the figure, the fool cover unit 270 is a shallow box-shaped unit body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and opened on the front side, and a flat cover member attached to the front of the unit body 271 272, and. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view and connects the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full-ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper ball supply port 323a of the plate unit 320 A channel 273 and a full tank receptacle 274 which is opened rearward on the lower right side in a front view of the through ball channel 273 and which can communicate with the full channel guide 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 And have.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is opened upward on the right side in front view of the full tank receptacle 274 and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main frame 4 The ball ball receptacle 275 for receiving the game ball (far ball) and the game ball which is opened forward in the vicinity of the lower right corner of the front view and received by the full tank ball receptacle 274 and the ball ball receptacle 275 And a ball outlet 276 communicating with the lower ball feed port 323c of the tray unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full ball receptacle 274 and the far ball receptacle 275 and the ball outlet 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of gaming balls. The storage passage 277 having a wide width, the flat plate-like movable piece 278 which constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and the movable piece A full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting a rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 biasing the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  In the far cover unit 270, when the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls are not released from the ball outlet 276 to the lower plate 322 side, a certain number of them are stored in the storage passage 277 Game balls can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280 by the weight of the game balls. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full of gaming balls, so that when full is detected by the full detection sensor 279, the payout of more gaming balls is stopped, This can be notified to the player or a person in charge at the game hall to urge that the lower tray 322 be completely filled.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 273 on the rear side of the unit main body 271, and a door opening / closing door of a lower full ball passage unit 860 in a dispensing unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 281 is provided, which can be in contact with the operation projection 863e of 863 (see FIG. 127). The door opening and closing contact portion 281 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing abutment portion 281 is formed such that the operation projection 863 e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts. When the actuating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts on the door opening / closing abutment portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotated and the downstream ends of the normal guideway 861 and the full induction passage 862 (front opening ) Can be released.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 40 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and operated by the player so that the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 It is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  Further, the handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302 and a handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 It has a shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 306. And a handle rotation detection sensor 307 held between the base and the steering wheel.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 has one end attached to the handle base 301 and the other end attached to the handle 302 to return the handle 302 to the initial rotational position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). One end side is attached to the inner base 304, the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is clockwise viewed from the front through the transmission gear 306. Auxiliary spring 309 biased in the direction, handle touch sensor 310 attached to handle base 301 at the rear of inner base 304, tip end is outward from the left side in front view of the front end outer peripheral surface of handle base 301 Protruding and handle on the rear side of inner base 304 with proximal end A single-shot button 311 rotatably mounted on a shaft 301 and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 attached to the handle base 301 for detecting a pressing operation of the single-shot button 311; There is.

  The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical base 301a extending in the front and rear direction, a disk-like front end 301b radially projecting from the front end of the base 301a, and a cylindrical base 301a. And three grooves 301c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180. Therefore, the base 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 in a state in which the three grooves 301c coincide with the three ridges 183, and the ridges 183 are respectively inserted in the three grooves 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 can not be rotated relative to the handle attachment member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d, which protrude outward in a circumferential direction away from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from a position inside with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e And a locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a has a side in the clockwise direction of the portion of the handle 302 that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 in a clockwise direction, and bulges outward. The side in the direction of is concaved (curved) to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 302b most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most projecting portion of the first protrusion 302a in the clockwise direction by about a 85 degree rotation angle. Is slightly lower. In the second protrusion 302b, the side surface in the clockwise direction in the front view clockwise bulges so as to expand outward, and the side surface in the direction around the opposite side is curved inward. It is concaved and formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

  The third protrusion 302c is located at the most projecting part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees in the clockwise direction from the most projecting part of the second protrusion 302b. It protrudes at about half height. The side surfaces on both sides of the third protrusion 302c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 302d, the most protruding part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding part of the third protrusion 302c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees from the first protrusion 302a It also protrudes slightly high. The fourth protrusions 302 d are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle, with the side surfaces on both sides inclined in a substantially linear manner.

  The handle cover 303 has three round mounting bosses 303 a that are rounded forward on the front and bulge forward. The three mounting bosses 303 a are attached to the front of the handle base 301 by penetrating the slit 302 e of the handle 302 from the front. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a abuts on the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees of rotation.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via the handle attachment member 180. The handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end is positioned more rearward than the left end in plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 300 to be attached via is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily hold the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can make the user perform the turning operation without feeling a sense of discomfort.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the emission solenoid 682 in the ball emission device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 is plated with conductive, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact when the player contacts the handle 302 or the like. Then, when the handle touch sensor 310 detects the player's touch, when the handle 302 is turned, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is accepted, and the emission solenoid is generated with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be hit. It can not be done. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 302 in a method different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In the handle unit 300, when the player presses the one-shot button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the one-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the one-shot button 311, and the discharge control unit of the payout control board 951 (shown Is omitted to stop the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302 and, by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 311, the driving before the one-shot button 311 is operated. The game ball can be reentered into the game area 5a by the strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 includes, in the handle 302, four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d, and the handle 302 is rotated most in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front. The fourth protrusion 302d positions the first protrusion 302a when the fourth protrusion 302d does not rotate the handle 302 when the game ball is most strongly hit into the game area 5a (so-called "right hit"). Since the fourth protrusion 302d is used as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 at the “right-handed” position in a comfortable state by replacing the fourth protrusion 302d with the first protrusion 302a. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the person and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 (a) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41 (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the left front. FIG. 42 (a) is a perspective view of the pan unit as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42 (b) is a perspective view of the pan unit as viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an enlarged explanatory view of a portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. The plate unit 320 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. On the front surface of the plate unit 320, a rendering operation unit 400 described later is attached.

  The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper dish 321 for storing gaming balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and gaming balls provided under the upper dish 321 and supplied from the upper dish 321 and the far cover unit 270. And a lower plate 322 which can be stored.

  The plate unit 320 is attached to a flat plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the upper front of the plate unit base 323, and the left side greatly protrudes forward from the left and right center An upper plate main body 324 forming the upper plate 321, and a lower plate main body 325 attached to the left side of the front lower portion of the plate unit base 323 more than the center left and right and bulging forward to form the lower plate 322. And a pan unit cover 326 attached to the front of the pan unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper pan body 324 and the lower pan body 325.

  Further, the dish unit 320 is provided with an upper disc ball removing button 327 mounted so as to be capable of pressing from above in the front view right side of the upper disc 321 on the upper surface of the disc unit cover 326; A ball lending button 328 mounted on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 attached on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side in a front view of the ball lending button 328, and a ball lending button 328 Ball return indicator 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the and return button 329, and attached to the plate front decoration 326b on the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the upper plate 321 Projected forward from the front of the pan unit cover 326 in front of the production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332 and the lower tray 322 And it has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 and 44 and the like. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side largely bulges forward from the center on the left and right in a front view, and is formed into a container shape opened upward. It is done. In the upper tray 321 (upper tray main body 324), a portion about 1/3 of the width from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. The upper plate 321 has a front end receding to the rear as it goes to the right in a front view from the most bulging part, and an induction passage portion 321a is formed in which the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball There is. The upper plate 321 is inclined such that the entire bottom surface including the induction passage portion 321 a is lowered at the right end side, and the right end side of the induction passage portion 321 a in a front view (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is placed below the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323, against the upper end of the upper plate ball feed opening 323d. It is inclined to be lower towards the position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. As a result, the gaming balls discharged forward from the upper ball dispensing opening 323a can be received and stored in the upper tray 321, and the received gaming balls can be received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 321a. The ball feed port 323d can be supplied.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface of the upper portion 321 is lowered downward in the guide passage portion 321a in which the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrow. That is, a part of the upper tray 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the tray unit cover 326 to which the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) described later is attached. Therefore, in the upper tray 321, a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls can be secured. The upper tray 321 (upper tray main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the tray unit cover 326 so as not to contact with the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A).

  The induction passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding member 321b electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball contacts (rolls) to make the game ball It can remove charged static electricity.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is disposed below the upper plate 321 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in a front view. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to the lower plate ball removing hole 322a which penetrates the bottom wall 325a vertically and can discharge the game balls, and the plate unit cover 326 And a relief unit 322b for avoiding contact with the selected rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322 b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner thereof is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower tray 322 includes a lower tray main body 325 which is open at the upper side and a rear side, a lower tray cover portion 326k of the lower plate body cover 326 which covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325 The tray unit is formed by the tray unit base 323 closing the back and the lower tray cover 340 covering the upper side of the portion of the lower tray main body 325 projecting into the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a, It faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d of the cover 326. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a quadrangular shape extending in the right and left directions in a plan view, and a trapezoidal shape whose upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. And the right and left sides of the trapezoidal shape are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases as it goes from the front to the rear in plan view.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower tray main body 325 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper and rear portions are open. The lower bowl body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral end excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and the bottom wall portion 325a. And a lower countersink hole 322a penetrating up and down with a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is curved so that the left and right sides of the quadrilateral extending in the left and right directions are disposed on the front side with the upper side shorter than the base and the rectangular side extending to the left and right. It is formed in the shape which combined the trapezoid and. The bottom wall 325a (the upper surface thereof) is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower countersink hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height twice to five times the diameter of the gaming ball. The lower countersink ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position closer to the right than the center in the left-right direction of the lower disk main body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a). In the lower tray main body 325, the curved portion of the bottom front wall portion 325a and the main body vertical wall portion 325b in the front right-hand front corner corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

  The lower tray cover 340 is formed to cover the upper right half of the lower tray main body 325. The lower cover 340 is, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, substantially formed from a cover upright wall 340a rising upward from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 and an upper end of the cover upright wall 340a. And a ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover upright wall 340a rises from a portion from the part on the front side of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 to the rear end of the right side. When the lower tray cover 340 is assembled to the tray unit 320, the rear ends of the cover upright wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the tray unit base 323. Further, the front end (the left end side of the front side) of the cover upright wall portion 340 a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening portion 326 d of the plate unit cover 326. Furthermore, the left end of the ceiling portion 340 b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover portion 326 k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower cover 340, a curved surface portion of the cover upright wall portion 340a and a portion obliquely extending between the cover upright wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (rendering operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end in the front view near the left end of a portion extending short to the left and right with the front end side. Located behind the. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half thereof turns to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower tray 322 is a lower tray first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326 described later Lower tray second area A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the right side of the opening 326 d (on the front end side of the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the pan unit cover 326, and the lower pan cover 340) Region of and). In other words, the lower plate 322 is half or more of the storage area (the area obtained by combining the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 corresponding to the storage area in plan view). It is located to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the area of the dotted hatching is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the pan unit cover 326.

  In the lower tray 322, the lower bowl ball supply port 323c of the tray unit base 323 forming the rear wall opens to the right of the center of the rear wall in the front view left-right direction. More specifically, the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the lower tray 322 is the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a (right outer side of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, the front end of the lower tray cover 340 It is disposed in the lower tray second area A2 which is the rear of the side, etc. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower ball and ball supply port 323c can not be seen from the player through the lower plate opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower tray 322 is formed so as to turn from the lower tray opening 326 d on the left side surface of the tray unit 320 (the tray unit cover 326) bulging forward to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400, The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range viewed from the front. In other words, the lower tray 322 is formed larger in the lower tray second region A2 than in the lower tray first region A1. As a result, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 more than it looks.

  In the lower tray 322, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the right half (lower tray second area A2) of the lower tray main body 325 in the right and left direction is a rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a (attachment space 326j) of the tray unit cover 326. The lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 projecting into the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the finger of the player from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a penetrating vertically in the front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second area A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined to be lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The lower ball ball extraction hole 322 a of the lower plate 322 is closed in an openable / closable manner by a lid member 334 operated by pressing the lower ball ball extraction button 333. Under the normal condition, the lower tray 322 is closed by the cover member 334 and the gaming ball can be stored in the lower tray 322. Then, when the lower bowl ball removal button 333 is pressed to open the lid member 334, the gaming balls in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower bowl ball removal hole 322a to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

  The lower countersink hole 322a of the lower tray 322 is disposed in front (directly in front of) the lower countersink supply port 323c of the tray unit base 323 which forms the rear wall of the lower tray 322. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame 3, the lower countersink hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower end opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the rendering operation unit 400, It can not be seen from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed on the front side of the rectangular shape extending to the left and right, It inclines to become lower toward the head. Therefore, with the lid 334 open and the lower countersink hole 322a open, the gaming balls supplied from the lower countersink supply opening 323c into the lower tray 322 are directly in front of the lower countersink supply opening 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the opened lower countersink hole 322a. The lower end of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower ball ball supply port 323c, so the lower ball ball supply hole 322a is open. The gaming ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not flow directly to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is located on the left of the right end of the lower ball ball supply port 323c, the game is supplied to the lower plate 322 from near the right end of the lower ball ball supply port 323c. The ball comes in contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. The right standing wall of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-back direction so as to face the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, so the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it abuts on a sloped part, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower ball open hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower ball open hole 322a without going to the area on the left side of the lower ball open hole 322a. (See Figure 45).

  As described above, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed to guide the gaming balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. In the open state, the game ball supplied from the lower ball supply opening 323c is immediately penetrated from the lower ball removal hole 322a without entering the area to the left of the lower ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, when the lower ball ball removing hole 322a is kept open, the player can not see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, and the player is paid out from the upper plate 321 or the payout device 830. The player can play the game by making it difficult for the game balls, etc. to be discharged directly into the dollar box and making it difficult for the game balls to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322. And the effect image etc.) to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extended upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball is supplied to the inside and jumps up in the lower plate 322, the game ball can be prevented from intruding from the lower plate 322 into the mounting space 326j side, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 is Contact with the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible that the gaming balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 322 contact or press the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). It can prevent and it can prevent that the back side of the rendering operation unit 400 (2nd rendering operation unit 400A) is damaged by the game ball.

  Furthermore, since the lower disc ball supply hole 323a is provided in front of the lower disc ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower disc ball supply port 323c is released from the lower disc ball supply port 323c. The game ball can be made to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 because it can be made to enter the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and be discharged downward (dollar box) as it is Can. In addition, since the bottom wall 325a of the lower tray main body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the gaming ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 is inclined The bottom surface is to be climbed, and the movement speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the game ball released from the lower ball supply opening 323c into the lower plate 322 can reduce the impact when it abuts on the lower cover 340, 340A or the main body standing wall portion 325b, and they are broken. It can be difficult.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a lid member 334 that closes the lower disc ball extraction hole 322 a may be interlocked with the upper disc ball extraction button 327. As a result, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a is opened, so the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper bowl sphere removing button 327 is operated to pull out the gaming bowl from the upper plate 321, the gaming sphere of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower bowl sphere extracting button 333 is not operated. As a result, the player can be strongly illusoryed as if the gaming balls of the upper plate 321 are directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described effects can be further exhibited. The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray cover 340 constituting the lower tray 322 are shown as separate parts which can be disassembled, but the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Also, although an example is shown in which the cover upright wall 340a of the lower tray cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325, the bottom wall 325a of the lower tray main body 325 The cover upright wall 340a may rise. In the example, the ceiling 340 b of the lower cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover upright wall 340 a, but the ceiling 340 b of the lower cover 340 is the main upright wall 325 b of the lower main body 325. It may be extended substantially horizontally from the upper end.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the relief portion 322 b for avoiding the contact of the lower tray 322 with the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400 A) is provided, but the release portion 322 b is not provided. The lower plate 322 may be used.

  Further, although the lower plate 322 (the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, etc.) in this embodiment is a uniform flat plate without holes penetrating, a plurality of through holes through which the game ball can not pass It may have a hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall 325a, the main body standing wall 325b, the cover standing wall 340a, the ceiling 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap where game balls can not pass through. It is good also as what was formed in thing or mesh shape. A light emitter such as an LED may be disposed in the plate unit cover 326 (attachment space 326j), and the inside of the lower plate 322 may be illuminated (or decorated with light) through the fence-like or net-like gap of the lower plate 322. .

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) which are separately formed. However, the four members may be united in an appropriate combination to form the lower plate 322. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are One united, one in which the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, one in which the lower plate main body 325 and the plate unit base 323 are integrally formed, the plate unit base 323 and the plate unit cover 326 The lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, or the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrally formed. A lower plate cover 340, a plate unit base 323 and a plate unit cover 326 integrated with each other; a lower plate body 325; a plate unit base 323; That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guide part of lower plate]
An embodiment including a ball guiding portion 322c or the like for guiding the gaming ball from the lower ball feeding opening 323c to the lower ball dropping hole 322a in the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. . FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is a description schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). It is a figure and (c) is an explanatory view showing roughly an example provided with still another different ball guidance part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  An example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (a) is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate spherical hole 322a at the portion between the lower circular plate feed port 323c and the lower plate spherical hole 322a at the bottom of the lower plate 322. It has a pair of ball guiding parts 322c which are disposed to be separated left and right by a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322 c is formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Also, the lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lowered toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball supply opening 323c into the lower plate 322 is guided to the lower ball removal hole 322a by the pair of ball guiding portions 322c without crossing over the ball guiding portion 322c. It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  Then, the lower tray 322 of this example is, similarly to the above, in the rear (lower tray second area A2) on the right side of the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball The through holes 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower disc ball supply port 323c and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower disc cover 340 and the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the effect unit 400, the disc unit cover 326 They are not visible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower tray 322 of the present embodiment is provided with the pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the gaming ball supplied from the lower peripheral ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower counterball opening 322a is opened. Can be discharged from the lower countersink opening 322a downward (dollar box) immediately without entering the area on the left side of the lower countersink opening 322a in the lower tray 322. Then, since the gaming ball circulating on the lower plate 322 can not be seen from the player side, the gaming ball etc. paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 is illusive as being directly discharged to the dollar box It is possible to make it difficult for the player to concentrate on the game (such as the operation for hitting the game ball and the effect image) by making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322 and to suppress the decrease in interest. Can.

  In the example shown in FIG. 46 (a), the ball guiding portion 322c is shown as a rail, but the invention is not limited to this, and the gaming ball may be lowered like a groove extending toward the lower ball ball opening 322a. Any guide can be used as long as it can be guided to the countersink hole 322a.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 46 (b), the gaming ball released to the right of the lower wall of the lower plate ball opening 322a in the lower plate 322 is diagonally forward right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. In addition to being shaped in such a way as to reflect in the direction of the lower ball ball opening hole 322a, the buffer portion 322d is provided at a portion where the gaming ball abuts. The buffer portion 322 d is formed of rubber, foam or the like.

  Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example has the lower plate ball removal hole 322a just in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game balls discharged straight forward from the lower ball supply opening 323c are discharged from the lower ball removal hole 322a downward (dollar box). On the other hand, the gaming ball discharged to the right front from the lower ball supply opening 323c is reflected by the buffer portion 322d in the direction of the lower ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate removal hole 322a Be done. At this time, since the gaming ball abuts and reflects on the buffer portion 322d, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Furthermore, the lower tray 322 in this example is also located at the rear of the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326 in the same manner as described above (rendering operation in the presentation operation unit 400 and tray unit cover 326 which is the lower tray second region A2 It is arrange | positioned at the unit mounting part 326a and the back of the covering wall of the front end side etc. of the lower saucer cover 340, and it can not be seen from the front.

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 in this example is provided with the buffer portion 322d on the wall that reflects the game balls, even if the game balls are not released forward from the lower ball supply opening 323c, By the buffer portion 322d, it can be reflected toward the lower countersink hole 322a without sound and can be discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the clash is also directly discharged to the dollar box because the collision sound of the game balls is not heard from the lower plate 322 By making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation for hitting the game ball and the effect image, etc.) and to suppress the decline in interest. It can be done.

  Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (c), the lower surface of the lower surface 322 (bottom wall portion 325a) is a portion on the opposite side to the lower surface ball supply port 323c with the lower surface ball opening 322a interposed therebetween. , And a return portion 322e for reflecting the gaming ball having jumped over the lower ball ball release hole 322a to the lower ball ball release hole 322a side. In addition, the return part 322e may use the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322, or may use a shock absorbing material such as rubber or foam that reduces the collision noise at the time of reflection. Further, the return part 322e may not constitute the side wall of the lower tray 322, or may constitute a part of the side wall (main body standing wall portion 325b) of the lower tray 322.

  In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line sequentially from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 Rearward on the right side of the opening 326d (at the rear of the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower operation cover 400, the operation operation unit 400 in the lower operation second area A2, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a in the lower unit cover 326) It is placed and invisible from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the gaming ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply opening 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a side is made by the return part 322e. It can be reflected and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower countersink hole 322a. Therefore, the same effect as the above can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same effect as the above can be exhibited.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of the lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower tray 322 of the tray unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the lower tray made dividable, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state where the storage area of the lower tray is expanded according to the size of the space behind the rendering operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower tray of (b) by a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at a dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second area A2. The region indicated by the dotted hatching in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

  First, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower tray first area A1 and the lower tray second area A2 and has the lower countersink hole 322a. A main body portion 325A and a first extension portion 325B attached to the right of the main body portion 325A and constituting the remaining area of the lower tray second area A2 are provided. The first extension unit 325B is the remaining space of the mounting space 326j in which the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is accommodated further than the main body portion 325A (the rendering operation unit 400 and the second rendering operation unit 400A It projects into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases as it goes from the front to the rear. Further, in the first extension portion 325B, a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A is formed at the right front corner.

  Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the effect operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is more than the example of FIG. 47 (a). The space behind the rendering operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is wide. The lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is a part of the lower tray first area A1 and the lower tray second area A2 and has a lower disc ball opening 322a, and a main body It is attached to the right side of the part 325A, constitutes the remaining area of the lower tray second area A2, and has a second extension part 325C larger than the first extension part 325B. As illustrated, the second extension portion 325C has a constant width in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end, and a storage area of gaming balls is formed larger than the first extension portion 325B. Further, the lower plate 322 is attached with a lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C (see FIG. 47 (c)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C to the main body part 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (connected), and the storage areas of the game balls are stored. Will expand. Further, the boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C is a dividing line PL. In addition, the first expansion portion 325B and the second expansion portion 325C in the lower tray main body 325 are in a predetermined gap (connected to the mounting space 326j) with the rear surface of the rendering operation unit 400 or the second rendering operation unit 400A. Space) is formed.

  As described above, in the above example, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be splittable, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable. The reservoir area can be made larger or smaller as needed. Further, since the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be split, the projection operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) attached to the tray unit cover 326 protrudes backward (in the mounting space 326j) An expansion unit (a first expansion unit 325B or a second expansion unit 325C) of a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the lower tray second area A2 located behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) has been described as having the dividing line PL arranged, but the dividing line PL is not It may be disposed on the boundary between the first dish area A1 and the lower dish second area A2, or may be arranged in the lower dish first area A1.

  In the above embodiment, the lower disc body 325 (the lower disc 322) is provided with the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a in the main body part 325A, but the first expanded part 325B and the second expanded part 325C are shown. The lower countersink hole 322a may be provided.

  In the above embodiment, the first extension 325B and the second extension 325C are attached on the right side of the main body 325A of the lower tray main body 325, but on the right side of the main body 325A A flat plate-like closing member without a storage area may be attached.

  Furthermore, although the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described in the above embodiment, the lower plate cover 340 can be divided similarly to the lower plate main body 325, or the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion It may be shaped according to the size of 325C.

[3-3 c. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 323 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The plate unit base 323 is attached below the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends flat across the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is opened) It is formed in a shallow box shape).

  The pan unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan and ball supply port 323a, which extends cylindrically rearward. A speaker slit 323b having a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, and a lower circular sphere supply port 323c penetrating longitudinally in the lower part on the left side from the left and right center of the front view and cylindrically extending backward; The lower disc ball supply port 323c has an upper disc ball feed port 323d which penetrates forward and backward in a front view upper right side of the lower disc ball supply port 323c and which extends vertically and whose upper part is positioned at the right end of the upper disc body 324.

  Further, the bowl unit base 323 guides the gaming balls sent to the rear side of the bowl unit base 323 through the upper bowl ball feed port 323d and guides the ball to the entrance 251a of the ball transport unit 250, and It is extended in a substantially L shape so as to be lowered toward the right side surface of the cylindrical lower surface ball supply port 323c after hanging down from the lower side of the feed guiding path 323e, and from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250. A ball extraction guide path 323f for guiding the released gaming ball to the lower ball supply port 323c, and a lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and an upper end of the ball extraction guide path 323f in front view left of the ball feed guide path 323e An opening that projects backward so that it penetrates back and forth at the height position between and abuts against the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and is operated by the upper flat ball release button 327 Includes a 323g, the. The ball removal guide path 323f has a downstream end opening into a cylindrical portion of the lower ball feed port 323c.

  Furthermore, the plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in a front view, and the handle insertion opening 323 h through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted And a cylinder insertion opening 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 323a of the pan unit base 323 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the upper pan 321, and the cylindrical rear end is an upper pan passage port for the door frame base 110 A front end of the through hole 117 is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the far cover unit 270. As a result, the gaming balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 321 through the upper counterspin supply port 323a.

  The lower disc ball supply port 323 c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens to the rear wall of the lower disc 322, and the cylindrical rear end penetrates the lower disc passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side And the front end of the ball outlet 276 of the far cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the far cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower ball supply port 323c. The lower bowl ball supply port 323c is disposed at the rear of the stage operation unit 400, the stage operation unit attachment portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening portion 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, etc. When the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the player can not see through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3 d. Dish unit cover]
The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The pan unit cover 326 is attached to the front of the pan unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper pan body 324 and the lower pan body 325. The pan unit cover 326 bulges forward at the center in the left-right direction and opens largely at the center in the left-right direction, and the presentation operation unit attachment portion 326a to which the presentation operation unit 400 is attached and the left and right sides of the presentation operation unit attachment portion 326a A plate front upper decoration portion 326b formed substantially at the same height as the upper plate 321, and a plate front lower decoration portion 326c formed on the lower side of each of the left and right plate front upper decoration portions 326b There is.

  The rendering operation unit attachment portion 326 a is formed to have a size of about 1/3 of the entire width in the left and right direction of the pan unit 320 in the left and right direction, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height in the vertical direction of the pan unit 320 It is formed in height. In addition, the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined so as to move rearward as the front end goes upward. Specifically, the front end of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front portion of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the center side in the left-right direction of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the end portion on the center side in the left-right direction of the plate unit cover 326 and the left and right sides The middle portion is formed in a curved surface shape slightly bulging forward with respect to a plane connecting the end portion of The lower front end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined to move upward from the center of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the left and right sides. It is formed so that the up-down direction may be narrowed toward the left and right both end sides from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side). The dish unit cover 326 has the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 attached to the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left in front view.

  The lower front portion of the dish lower decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the end in the left-right direction of the dish unit cover 326 and the left and right ends The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape that is recessed rearward with respect to a plane connecting the end portion of

  A lower plate opening portion 326d penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed in the lower plate front decoration portion 326c on the left side in a front view, and the lower plate 322 faces the front from the lower plate opening portion 326d. In the lower front dished decorative portion 326c on the left side in a front view, a lower cylindrical ball release button 333 protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the lower counters opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker port 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening portion 326d in the lower plate front decoration portion 326c on the left side in a front view. The lower speaker port 326 e is located in front of the speaker slit 323 b of the dish unit base 323 in a state of being assembled to the dish unit 320.

  The handle insertion opening 326f which penetrates the back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view and into which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted A cylinder insertion port 326g is formed which penetrates back and forth on the upper side of the handle insertion port 326f near the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-like top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate portion 326h It covers the upper right side. An upper bowl ball release button 327, a ball loan button 328, a return button 329, and a ball loan return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

  The pan unit cover 326 includes a flat plate-like bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the pan front lower decoration portion 326c to the front surface of the pan unit base 323. The lower side of the tray unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a step-like shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed downward from below, and a lower-disc bowling base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, in the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole penetrating vertically is formed at a position corresponding to the lower countersink hole 322a of the lower tray 322.

  The pan unit cover 326 has a mounting space 326j which is opened forward at a portion of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a and into which the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the pan unit cover 326 extends in a plate shape rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower pan opening 326 d, and includes a lower pan cover 326 k covering the lower pan 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower end cover portion 326k is in contact with the left end at the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b in the lower end body 325, and the right end is in contact with the left end of the ceiling portion 340b in the lower end cover 340. There is.

[3-3 e. Upper bowl ball release button]
The upper bowl and ball withdrawal button 327 of the bowl unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper plate 321 in a front view, and pressing the game ball in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 by pressing. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration of the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is omitted, the rear end side is below the top board portion 326 h by the ball extraction button holder attached to the lower side of the top board portion 326 h of the dish unit cover 326. It is rotatably mounted around an axis extending to. An upper end of the ball-drawing lever which extends vertically is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper disc ball-extracting button 327. The ball release lever is slidably mounted in the vertical direction by a ball removal base attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 below the upper plate ball release button 327.

  The ball release lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper ball ball extraction button 327 is in contact with the upper portion of the upper ball ball extraction slider 327b slidably mounted vertically by the disk unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper disc ball removal slider 327 b includes an operation transmission portion 327 a projecting rearward from the rear surface, and in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission portion 327 a passes through the opening 323 g in the pan unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face, and abuts on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250 from below. The upper disc ball removal slider 327b is urged upward by the upper disc ball release spring 327c, and the biasing force of the upper disc ball release spring 327c is via the upper disc ball removal slider 327b and the ball extraction lever. The upper bowl ball release button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Therefore, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the upper disc ball extraction spring 327 c, the operation transmission portion 327 a of the upper disc ball extraction slider 327 b moves downward, and the operation transmission portion 327 a Since the actuating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in front view, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the opening 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. Thus, the gaming balls in the upper plate 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to the ball removal guiding path 323f of the plate unit 320, and are discharged to the lower plate 322 through the lower ball feeding port 323c. It can be (supplied).

  In addition, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a may be moved in an interlocking manner. As a result, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a is opened, so the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper bowl sphere removing button 327 is operated to pull out the gaming bowl from the upper plate 321, the gaming sphere of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower bowl sphere extracting button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that the game balls on the upper plate 321 are discharged directly to the dollar box, making it difficult for the game balls to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322. A decrease in interest can be suppressed by concentrating the player on a game (such as a game ball hitting operation and an effect image). The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3 f. Ball loan button, return button, and ball loan return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the tray unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. As shown in the figure, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display portion 330 have a circular decoration on the right side of the upper plate ball removing button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. Is attached to

  The ball lending button 328 inserts a predetermined number of gaming balls by inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing it. The unit 320 is to be lent (dispensed) into the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed in a state in which cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or the prepaid card is returned after subtracting the portion of the game ball which has been lent out.

  The ball rental return display unit 330, though not shown, has a 3-digit 7-segment LED arranged on the lower side of the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball rental machine, or It displays an error code etc. when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-3 g. Effect selection left button and effect selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached near the right end near the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a in the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left in front view in the plate unit cover 326 as illustrated. The presentation selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed to the left. The presentation selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape in which one vertex is directed to the right on the right side of the presentation selection left button 331.

  In the main effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are displayed to the player. When the effect image for prompting selection is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and the desired item is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time.

[3-3 h. Lower bowl ball release button]
The lower bowl sphere removing button 333 of the bowl unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower tray ball withdrawal button 333 projects forward from the lower end of the front of the lower tray decoration part 326c on the left side in a front view on the lower side of the lower tray opening 326d in the tray unit cover 326 which is the front of the lower tray 322. The lower disc ball extraction button 333 can be pressed to operate the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball outlet hole 322a of the lower disc 322, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower bowl ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the bowl unit 320.

  The lower disc ball release button 333 can slide in the front-rear direction by the lower disc ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the lower plate body 325 below the lower disc body 325. Is attached to The lower disc ball extraction button 333 is disposed on the left with respect to the lower disc ball extraction hole 322 a of the lower disc 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The bottom plate ball withdrawal base 335 is a bottom plate so that the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 is housed in a step formed in a step shape so as to be recessed downward from below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the part 326i. The lower countersinking base 335 has a discharge port 335a, which has the same size as the lower countersink opening 322a and is vertically penetrated, at a position immediately below the lower countersink opening 322a for the lower tray 322. . The lid member 334 is disposed between the lower disc main body 325 and the lower disc ball removing base 335, although the detailed illustration is omitted. As a result, when the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball opening hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower ball ball sink base 335 is also opened, and the lower ball ball outlet hole 322a and the discharge port 335a And are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower countersink base 335 so as to be rotatable about a position on the left side of the lower countersink button 333 in plan view. The lower disc ball withdrawal button 333 is connected to a part between the part for closing the lower disc ball withdrawal hole 322 a in the lid member 334 and the part to which the lower disc ball withdrawal base 335 is rotatably attached. As a result, when the lower countersunk ball release button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 can pivot around an axis extending in the vertical direction to open and close the lower countersink spherical opening 322a (discharge port 335a).

  Although not shown, the holding device for holding the lower tray ball withdrawal button 333 when the lower bowl ball withdrawal button 333 is pressed and moved to the lower disc ball withdrawal base 335, and the lower bowl ball withdrawal button A lower ball ball release spring biasing the 333 forward is attached. With the lower disc ball release button 333 projecting forward and closing the lower disc ball release hole 322a with the lid member 334, when the lower disc ball outlet button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is opened to move, and the lower ball ball extraction button 333 is held by the holding device so as to be moved backward. In this state, even if the lower disc ball release button 333 is released, the lower disc ball release button 333 does not move forward, and the lower disc ball out hole 322a is maintained in the open state, and the lower disc The game balls in the ball 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 320 through the lower ball ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, when the lower disk ball extraction button 333 is held in the holding device and the lower disk ball extraction hole 322a is open, when the lower disk ball extraction button 333 is pressed backward, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, when the pressing of the lower ball releasing button 333 is released, the lower ball removing button 333 moves forward by the biasing force of the lower ball removing spring and returns to the protruded state, and the cover member 334 is rotated. The lower ball ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed to move. Thereby, the gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  In addition, separately from the pressing operation of the lower disc ball extracting button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball extracting hole 322 a (discharge port 335 a) is also moved by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extracting button 327. The lower countersink hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when it is desired to discharge the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 321 into the dollar box disposed below the tray unit 320, the dollar box via the lower tray 322 can be operated simply by operating the upper tray ball release button 327. Can be discharged to simplify the labor involved in ball removal. The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The entire configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48 (a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48 (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 49 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button. FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 48 (b). Fig.53 (a) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present a rendering image to the player It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and is formed transparent at the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 which the player can press and operate, and the outer periphery of the operation button 410 surrounds the operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decoration board unit 420 attached to the front, and attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. Fig. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the height in the vertical direction of the pan unit 320, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 is formed on the front side of the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 and the outer periphery of the button lens 411, which are formed in a curved surface (a part of the spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to pass light.

  The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface having no unevenness on the surface side. The button lens 411 is extended in a predetermined length to the center side (inner side) in a state of being recessed in a W shape in cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and The first button decorative portion 411a and an outer circumferential side of the first button decorative portion 411a are recessed in a circular arc shape in cross section and extend on an axis toward the central side and in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction And a plurality of (six) second button decoration parts 411b provided.

  The first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 in the assembled state to the operation button 410 as shown, and a group of both right and left sides is a group of upper and lower sides It extends longer than the center.

  The plurality of second button decorative portions 411 b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three by three on each of the left and right sides. The second button decorative portion 411 b is formed to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrudes forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect that light is refracted by the W-shaped cross section and the arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface at the portions of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly seen.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration parts 411 b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic gloss on the surface.

  The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and the main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. Along the outer periphery of the main body 413a, and a plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape along the outer periphery of the body and arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction; A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d projecting in the shape of a band plate to the rear and arranged in the circumferential direction and penetrating the flange portion 413b on the outer side than the main body portion 413a and having a predetermined length along the outer periphery And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and cylindrically extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer periphery of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension portion 413 f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413 b. The four guide bosses 413c are disposed at positions corresponding to the four corners in the upper, lower, left, and right directions with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. The four guide bosses 413 c are respectively slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be disposed two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These three detection pieces 413 d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided three each on the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decorative portion 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the region of the base opening 413 e in the button base 413, parts of the main body 413 a and the inner extension 413 f are recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extension portion 413 f which is narrowed inward substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side The display screen of can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 is an operation button spring 438 in which four guide bosses 413 c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430 and are inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431. Is biased forward by the Since the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 is in contact with the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, the further movement to the front is restricted. The rear end is moved backward until it abuts on the front surface of the base unit 430 by pressing against it. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

  In addition, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in the assembled state of the rendering operation unit 400 The gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the in-operation button decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made less visible to the player by the portion 411a.

  Furthermore, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 by the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is operated by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion visible in the rear is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button of the base unit 430.

  Further, in a state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in the state of protruding backward. Thus, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 42 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is a button The inside of the base 413 can be prevented from leaking inward, and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower area Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration substrate unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper decoration substrate 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being light emitting decorated other than the light emitting decoration target part, and the light emitting decoration can be performed with good appearance.

[3-4 b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in an outer shape that matches the front end side of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 and has a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a, and a frame main body 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a. There is.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and which penetrates back and forth, and which penetrates back and forth on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. And a plurality of (six) peripheral opening portions 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the frame, and notches 416c cut out with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening portion 416a And. The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. Thus, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be in contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416 b are provided three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416 a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch portion 416 c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  In addition, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylindrical portion 416d, when the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the left and right upper portions of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (rendering operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attaching portions 416e and the notch portion 416c are attached to the effect operating unit attaching portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 is substantially entirely metal on the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a interposed therebetween. A shiny plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes, from the rear side, outer peripheral openings 416 b formed three on each side of the frame main body 416. The frame side lens 417 is formed to have a smooth surface without irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the rear surface side along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 can not be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the cutout 416 c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 is formed to be smooth on the front side. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 can not be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second outer LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the light emitting decoration is possible by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them. .

[3-4 c. Decorative substrate unit]
The decoration substrate unit 420 of the rendering operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can emit and decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. And a motor cover 425 attached to the front of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main portion 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413. And, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 is formed on the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outward of the plurality of first LEDs 422 a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front side and the plurality of first LEDs 422 a And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 is formed on the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outward of the plurality of first LEDs 423 a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front side and the plurality of first LEDs 423 a And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. Both the front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are white.

  The vibration motor 424 has a weight 424a eccentrically attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative substrate unit 420 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body portion 413 a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 is inserted inside the substrate base 421. In the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Moreover, in the state assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is formed between the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Therefore, the decorative substrate unit 420 causes only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light and decorate by the light from the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. It is possible to emit and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by the light from each of the second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, by rotating the weight 424 a of the vibration motor 424, the decoration substrate unit 420 can generate vibration to vibrate the entire rendering operation unit 400.

[3-4 d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. FIG. 58 (a) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as disassembled and viewed from the rear. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 while the operation button 410 is mounted so as to be movable back and forth.

  The base unit 430 includes four through holes 431 a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically at the central portion, and a blind hole opened forward outside the through hole 431 a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, an operation button inner decorative member 432 attached so as to cover the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 and having a short cylindrical extension in the longitudinal direction Of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 and the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434 which are respectively attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431 a in the front of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432 Manipulations attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a at the front of the unit base 431 at the rear A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  Further, the base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 respectively inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder Three pressing detection sensors 440 attached to 439 respectively for detecting pressing operation of the operation button 410, a rendering operation unit relay board 441 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 431, and a rendering operation unit relay board 441. And a relay substrate cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and a substantially square through hole 431 a extending vertically is formed. The through hole 431 a has a size that fits in the cylindrical main body portion 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed in a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 are formed at four corners on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the through hole 431 a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413 c of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. The inner diameter of each of the holding holes 431b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted slidably.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b extends from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Further, the holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b disposed at the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b. .

  The unit base 431 is a light shielding wall portion 431 c projecting forward in the form of a flat plate from the portion on the upper front surface where the operation button inner decorative substrate 435 is attached and the portion on which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached. Is equipped. The light shielding wall portion 431 c allows the light emitting decoration of the frame top lens 418 to be performed only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

  The operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape so as to close the front end side of the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a which extends in the front and rear direction and the peripheral wall portion 432a. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening portion 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b back and forth and extending vertically, a flange portion 432d extending outward from a rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d And a plurality of mounting bosses 432 e that project rearward from the rear and are attached to the unit base 431.

  An outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed to have substantially the same size as an inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432 c penetrating the front plate 432 b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the operation button inner decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed in a smooth surface without unevenness.

  The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is depressed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of first button inner decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b and bulging in an arc shape, extending in an octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and concentrically centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b And a second in-button decorative portion 432g (see FIG. 63). The second in-button decoration 432 g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432 c.

  The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The rear end of the operation button inner decoration member 432 can not be clearly seen behind by the lens effect of the first button inner decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. By emitting light, the decoration member 432 in the operation button can be decorated to emit light. By emitting and decorating the operation button inner decoration member 432, it is possible to cause the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 to emit light and decorate.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by emitting the LEDs, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be decorated to emit light.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are each full color LED It is assumed. Also, the front of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button inner inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are white. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 431 b in the unit base 431. The guide button spring 438 is a guide boss whose rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431 b in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 400 and whose front end protrudes rearward from the main portion 413 a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. The operating button spring 438 biases the operating button 410 forward.

  The three pressure detection sensors 440 are disposed at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front of the unit base 431, one of the three pressure detection sensors 440 is on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, and the other is on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the remaining one is lower left The sensor holder 439 is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 431b. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction centering on the center of the unit base 431. The three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect three detection strips 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The effect operation unit relay substrate 441 is attached to the left side (right side in front view) of the through hole 431 a in rear view on the rear side of the unit base 431. The effect operation unit relay substrate 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422, an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, an operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, an operation button inner decoration substrate Connection of the door main body relay substrate (not shown) of the door frame base unit 100 with the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, the press detection sensor 440, and the door frame side effect display device 460. To relay the

  The relay substrate cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay substrate 441 to the left in front view, and includes a leg 442 a attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3, and between the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. Form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Thus, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a is in contact with the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted downward, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be avoided from acting on 326a and the like to prevent their breakage.

[3-4 e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 54 and 55 and the like. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432 c of the decoration member 432 in the operation button in the base unit 430. While being able to visually recognize a display screen from the front side (player side) through a center part, an effect image can be displayed on a display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front and to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 and to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a bottomed square cylindrical mounting bracket 462. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The mounting bracket 462 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof has the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached so that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape abuts on the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  When the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled in the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decoration member 432 in the operation button (See Figure 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located in the vicinity of the front end of the peripheral wall 432a of the in-operation button decorative member 432 and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on the control signal from the peripheral control board in the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4 f. Operation effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 51. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, in which part of the operation button is cut away to hide it by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. FIG. 63 (a) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 63 (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game ball being hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player is operated. The player can be made to participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410 and the player can be entertained.

  The rendering operation unit 400 is formed to have a height substantially equal to the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the full width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The rendering operation unit 400 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction below the gaming area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. In the effect operation unit 400, the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 serving as the bottom surface in a state attached to the dish unit 320 is a gap between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. As attached. Thus, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the dish unit 320 (rendering operation unit 400) The central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player, because the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a in the game board 5. Therefore, when the player drops his eyes from the game area 5a to the rendering operation unit 400 (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 or the like in the operation button 410 can be viewed in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide bosses 413 c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the base unit 430, respectively, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 has the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. It abuts on a portion near the central opening 416 a in the rear surface of the frame main body 416.

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the central opening 416 a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 to the center side (central axis line CL side) from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is , And protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In the normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 which is bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed It is likely to be More specifically, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached such that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment is attached. Since the central axis CL is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from the upper side as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The part away from the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, since the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed on a flat surface on which the player performs the pressing operation, the operation button is enlarged while the portion to be pressed is made flat. When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation can not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulging forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is dispersed to the entire operation button 410 and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the effects of operation.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper portion is dished so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Because it is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate a vibration, the vibration is generated at the most distant part from the attached portion The whole of the rendering operation unit 400 can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the rendering operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61), for the player pressing the operation button 410 The strong vibration can be transmitted to surprise the player and enjoy the presentation.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the bottom surface and the bottom plate of the pan unit cover 326 Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck down, the frame is held between the abutment of the lower surface of the leg portion 442a with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i The impact can be absorbed by bending downward the attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. In addition, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the mounting of the tray unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the part 326a and the like, and damage to the rendering operation unit 400 and the like can be prevented. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 with a strong force or when the player depresses the operation button 410, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is presented when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400 is presented to the player. Since 400 etc. will not be damaged, interruption of the game due to the breakage can be avoided, and a decrease in interest of the player can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side is increased by making the breakage difficult. It can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) projecting forward, it is flat. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411 even if it is strongly hit, making it difficult to break.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation member in the operation button 432 are made of transparent members, the effect operation unit 400 is composed of The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the first button inner decoration 432f, and the second button inner decoration 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side Can be viewed from In addition, since the plate thickness is changed and light is complicatedly refracted at the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed, it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed .

  Since the rendering operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the decoration of the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to view the rear at a portion of the outer peripheral edge of the portion to be the inside of the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis line CL direction), the inner circumferential surface of the main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation member inner decoration member 432 There is a gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player's side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be hard to see. As a result, even if the operation button in-operation decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided in the depressible operation button 410, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the operation button 410 is seen. While being able to prevent the player from having a sense of discomfort, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be disposed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, in the rendering operation unit 400, the outer periphery of the in-operation button decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411 a, the second button decoration portion 411 b and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. A unit base 431 and a decoration board unit 420, etc., which are on the rear side (rear side) outside the unit, are formed so as to be invisible to the player through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is made invisible from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden and concealed It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the entire rendering operation unit 400.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decorative portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decorative member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, the concavo-convex line of the first button decorative part 411a and the concavo-convex line of the second in-button decorative part 432g intersect with each other, as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decorative portion 411a and the second in-button decorative portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decorative portion 411a and The second button inner decoration portion 432 g can show the player a geometrical pattern with a deep three-dimensional feel, and can enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decorative portion 411a and the second in-button decorative portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, the unevenness of the first button decorative portion 411a occurs when the player's eyes move. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g changes, it is possible to show the player a moving decoration, and the player can be entertained.

  As described above, the effect operation unit 400 allows the player to have a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 is located in the operation button 410 (inside of the button frame 412) and behind the in-operation button decoration member 432, the operation button left inward decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inward decoration substrate 434, the operation button The upper inner decorative substrate 435 and the lower operating button inner decorative substrate 436 are disposed, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the upper and lower decorative substrates 435 emit light, thereby emitting the inner decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 It can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be lighted and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. As shown in FIG. 52, the LEDs mounted on the front of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the light is transmitted from the light to the outside of the main portion 413a because it is disposed inside the cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The light emission decoration can be performed well only in the operation button 410.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, of the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420. The first LEDs 423a of the first LED 422a and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are disposed, and the six second button decorative portions 411b of the operation button 410 are lighted by emitting the first LEDs 422a and 423a. Can. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 have a cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit Since the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not leak to the inner side of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d, it is located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d in the frame main body 416 of Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. A second LED 423 b of 423 is disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated to emit light by emitting the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416 It is located, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated. .

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, a plurality of frame top lens decoration substrates 437 in the base unit 430 are disposed behind the frame top lenses 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of them are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrates 437 The frame top lens 418 can be decorated to emit light by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, the flat light shielding wall portion 431 c protrudes forward to the rear lower end of the frame top lens 418 The light from the LED of the top lens decorative substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably decorated by light emission.

[3-4 g. Overall configuration of second embodiment of rendering operation unit]
Next, the second effect operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 described above, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and FIG. 64 (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line G-G in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. 64 (b). 69 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is an enlarged view of a portion A in (a). FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 instead of the effect operation unit 400 described above. The second effect operation unit 400A, like the effect operation unit 400, allows the player to perform a pressing operation and can present an effect image to the player. Hereinafter, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as those of the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The second effect operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and is formed transparent at the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 which the player can press and operate, and the outer periphery of the operation button 410 surrounds the dish unit cover 326 A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a; a decoration substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 , The second base unit 450 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decoration board unit 420 attached to the front, and the second base unit 450 visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect table that can be displayed on the screen and can display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A has a surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in front view, and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 And a relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in a front view so as to cover the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 and the relay substrate cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector attachment member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  The second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422, an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration substrate 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, And, it is for relaying the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4 g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape whose diameter is slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 which is formed in a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 It has an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The configuration is substantially the same as that of the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

  Specifically, the difference between the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is the pattern of the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

  Describing in detail, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex on the center side of the button lens 411 in a portion in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. A truss-like pattern in which a plurality of triangles facing one another and a triangle whose one apex is on the opposite side to the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction over the entire circumference, and the button lens 411 in the truss-like pattern A rectangular triangle-shaped pattern consisting of a base facing to the center side, a side extending from both ends of the base to the center of the button lens 411, and an oblique side extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base , The hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, the side extending longer than the right triangle pattern from the center of the base of the truss shaped triangle to the center side of the button lens 411, and the tip of that side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, each triangle which comprises the 1st button decoration part 411a has faced the direction from which each surface differs, and is formed in polyhedron shape. Thus, the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface, while the back surface side is formed in a polyhedron at the portion of the first button decorative portion 411a, so the first button decorative portion 411a The thickness of the button lens 411 changes intricately at the part of the point of, and the light passing through this part will be irregularly refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, it is possible to show the player a geometrical pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined, and at the same time, it is possible to make the rear member difficult to see by irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape whose rear is open. The guide boss portion 413 c is inserted into the holding hole 451 d of the second base unit 450, and is a button shaft 452 held in the holding hole 451 d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Is slidably inserted. In the present example, the operation button 410 is mounted so as to be movable back and forth in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind into the guide boss portion 413c.

[3-4 g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in an outer shape that matches the front end side of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as that of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given thereto and detailed description will be omitted.

[3-4 g-3. Decorative substrate unit]
The decoration substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 57, FIG. 69 to FIG. 71 and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can emit and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. And a motor cover 425 attached to the front of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decoration substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decoration substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description will be omitted.

[3-4 g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second rendering operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 mounted so as to be able to move back and forth, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached and mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 It is

  The second base unit 450 has a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and a cylindrical guide boss portion 413c projecting from the front surface of the unit base 451 on the button base 413 of the operation button 410 Operation button spring which inserts four cylindrical cylindrical button shafts 452 which are respectively slidably inserted from the inside and four button shafts 452 are inserted to urge the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (Not shown) and three pressing detection sensors 454 attached to the front of the unit base 451 and detecting three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b which protrudes hemispherically from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a vertical direction with respect to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through hole 451c which penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth in a substantially rectangular shape extending up and down when viewed, four holding holes 451d which are recessed backward from the front surface of the main portion 451a, and a main portion 451a An upper bearing 451e recessed in a semicircle (U-shape) from the front to the rear in the upper part of the upper part, and a semicircle coaxial with the upper bearing 451e from the front to the rear in the lower part of the main body 451a The lower bearing portion 451f recessed in a (U-shape) and the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a are formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e, and the screen unit 470 rotates And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 is formed to have substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 in which the inner circumference and the outer circumference are formed in a C-shape. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front of the main body 451a. Cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when screen unit 470 of door frame side second effect display device 460A rotatably attached by upper bearing portion 451e and lower bearing portion 451f rotates. There is. The through hole 451 c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A to pass from the rear.

  The four holding holes 451 d of the unit base 451 are formed at the four corners on the top, bottom, left, and right of the front surface of the main body 451 a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413 c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of the holding hole 451d is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. In the four holding holes 451 d, a button shaft 452 is attached coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451 d protrudes more forward than the front surface of the main body 451 a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be attached slidably in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can.

  The upper left holding hole 451 d of the four holding holes 451 d is counterclockwise around the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. The holding hole 451 d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451 d is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, among the four holding holes 451 d, the two holding holes 451 d disposed on the lower side are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451 d. .

  In addition, operation button springs (not shown) are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 451 d, and the front ends of these operation button springs abut on the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413 c, whereby the operation buttons are formed via the guide boss portions 413 c. The 410 is urged forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape in which the front is opened and the rear extends. The upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f are coaxially located at the center of the portion extending in a semicircular arc shape. The upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f are inserted with the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460 A from the front, and then the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 from the front side. Can be rotatably supported on the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A by being attached to the front surface of the main body 451a.

  The front surface of each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 passes through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (face) is recessed rearward in a U shape. It is formed in the same manner, and is separated in the circumferential direction at a predetermined angle around the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451 g restricts the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by the abutment of the stopper 475 b of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. There is. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  Although not shown, magnets are embedded in the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g and magnetically contact the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b to abut the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is made difficult to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, in the screen unit 470, the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b cause the main screen 471 to face forward or the sub screen 472 to face forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the position states, and the movement by which the screen unit 470 tries to rotate is suppressed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 etc. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three pressing detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 at a position corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one of the three pressure detection sensors 454 remains on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. One of them is attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals circumferentially around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect three detection strips 413 d of the operation button 410.

[3-4 g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A has a screen unit 470 rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by the upper bearing 451e and the lower bearing 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base An upper bearing member 480 attached to the upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably mounted on the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450; and attached to the lower front surface of the second base unit 450 And a lower bearing member 485 rotatably mounted on the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  In the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the screen unit 470 is rotationally driven, and the rotation drive unit 490 attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 and the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from behind and mounted is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 451 so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. Mounted so as to cover the actuating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from the top on the left side in a front view of the box-like projector mounting member 505 open at the front and the rotary drive unit 490 at the top of the second base unit 450 Top cover 506 and the top And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4 g-5 a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 about an axis extending up and down, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500, The effect image can be displayed (projected) so as to be visible from the player.

  The screen unit 470 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape, and has a milky white light transmitting main screen 471 and a disk shape whose one end side in the axial direction of the main screen 471 is a part of the outer periphery, and the central portion is an axis A milky-white, translucent sub-screen 472 that curves to bulge outward in a direction, and a cylindrical shape that protrudes outward in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, and the actuating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having gear teeth 475a formed over substantially a half of the outer periphery, and the subscreen 472 Sub-screen decoration member 476 (see FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 etc.) which is formed in the shape of a relief that imitates a predetermined character (dot) to be The sub screen decoration substrate 477 (see FIG. 75 etc.) mounted on the back side of the 472 and having a plurality of LEDs 477a mounted on the side facing the sub screen 472 and the side opposite to the sub screen 472 of the main screen 471 And a semicircular arc-shaped peripheral decoration member 478 extending short from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 is formed such that its axial length is about 4/3 times as large as the semi-cylindrical radius. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both axial ends are bordered by the peripheral decoration 472 a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

  The sub screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74 (b)). . The sub screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and closes the inside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal concavities and convexities are arranged in the circumferential direction. And a curved surface general screen portion 472b. The peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472 b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b of the sub screen 472 is formed with a through hole, and the sub screen decoration member 476 is attached to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are rotatably inserted from the front into the upper bearing 451 e and the lower bearing 451 f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, respectively.

  The actuating gear member 475 is engaged with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotational drive unit 490 and protrudes outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed substantially along the circumference and the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. A stopper 475b is provided, and a detection piece 475c projecting outward in the form of a flat plate from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475 b of the actuating gear member 475 is located in the recess 481 a of the upper bearing member 480 which is recessed in a circular arc centering on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in a state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by coming into contact with the pair of rotation restriction parts 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the concave part 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b in contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and the iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It is supposed to be.

  The screen unit 470 can be pivoted between a first position where the main screen 471 is directed forward and a second position where the sub screen 472 is directed forward. The detection piece 475 c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472 b of the sub screen 472. The sub screen decoration member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull by a transparent member, and since the plate thickness is complexly changed, transmitted light is irregularly refracted in a complex manner, and the rear is viewed It is difficult. In addition, although detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the character of "PUSH" is formed in the relief which imitated the subscreen decorative member 476.

  The sub screen decoration substrate 477 is attached on the back side of the sub screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub screen 472 and the sub screen 472, and a plurality of LEDs 477 a are provided on the front side (the side facing the sub screen 472). Has been implemented. The outer surface of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 is smaller than that of the sub screen decorative member 476, and its surface is white. By emitting the LED 477a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477, the sub screen decoration member 476 and the sub screen 472 can be lighted and decorated. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can cause the LED 477a to emit light, thereby strongly emitting and decorating the "eye" portion of the skull and the character portion of "PUSH".

  Further, since the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen 472 and the sub-screen 472, the LED 477 a emits light. , And the point light source of the LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Further, the sub screen decoration substrate 477 can block the light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can cause the sub screen 472 to project the shadow of the sub screen decoration substrate 477.

  The peripheral decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472. Similar to the peripheral decorative portion 472a, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal concavities and convexities are arranged in the circumferential direction of the arc. .

  As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens such as the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. The main screen 471 is for projecting the effect image from the projector 500 over the entire surface of the semi-cylindrical shape, and is intended to display the effect image which is noticed by the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the subscreen 472 is a narrow area where the effect image from the projector 500 forms the periphery of the central subscreen decoration member 476 by the presence of the subscreen decoration substrate 477 in the center on the back side (narrower than the main screen 471). Of the subscreen decoration member 476 and pressing the operation button 410 to the player by the light emission decoration of the subscreen decoration member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to

[3-4 g-5 b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f which are open forward of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front of 451a. In the state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f of the unit base 451, respectively. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 by being attached to the front surface of the unit base 451.

  The upper bearing member 480 is mounted on the upper portion of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member And a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of 481. The bearing member 481 has a recessed portion 481 a which is recessed in a circular arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is deepest. The recessed portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The stopper 475b of the actuating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and disposed, and the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 is located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The arc-shaped recessed portion 481a allows the stopper 475b of the actuating gear member 475 to rotate favorably between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. ing. Thus, by emitting the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated to emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed substantially in a flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451 f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 by inserting the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 into the lower bearing portion 451 f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4 g-5 c. Rotary drive unit]
The pivot drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow unit case 491 inside, and the switching drive motor 492 mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and having a rotary shaft protruding into the unit case 491. A spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-like first gear engaged with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491 The transmission gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear are meshed with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. And a second transmission gear 495 in the form of a spur gear.

  The second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475 a of the actuating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state where the rotational drive unit 490 is assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The rotational drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 back and forth around the axis via the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be turned.

[3-4 g-5 d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The projector 500 is disposed in the hemispherical cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by emitting the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cube-shaped projector main body 501 attached to the projector attachment member 505, and a lens portion 502 projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from the projector main body 501 and irradiating the effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector attachment member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 pass through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side and are disposed in the cover portion 451b. Mounted as.

  The projector 500 can project the effect image over substantially the front of the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector and has an autofocus function.

[3-4 g-5 e. Projector mounting member]
The projector attachment member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The projector attachment member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the projector 500 is attached to the inside and attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector attachment member 505 can be attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, thereby covering the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, and the projector 500 can be mounted in an inclined state so as to coincide with the inclination of the operation button 410 . The rear wall of the projector attachment member 505 is formed with a plurality of slits 505 a penetrating in the front and rear direction, and the heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505 a.

  A second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 and a relay substrate cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector attachment member 505 in a front view.

[3-4 g-5 f. Upper cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 70, FIG. 71, and the like. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper side of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions separated by a rotational angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operating gear in the screen unit 470 The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 have a detection piece 475c at a first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 faces the front, and a second position where the sub screen 472 faces the front. The time detection piece 475c can be detected. The rotational drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotational drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475 c by the two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4 g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 70 and 71. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and mitigates an impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, and the plate unit cover in the plate unit 320 It is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of 326.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with the elastically deformable flat buffer member 511 which is in contact with the lower surface of the projector attachment member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the buffer member 511. And a buffer base 512 mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 has a flat plate-like main body portion 512a that abuts on the lower surface of the buffer member 511, and leg portions protruding downward from both left and right sides of the main body portion 512a in a front view And 512b. The leg portion 512 b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326 i of the pan unit cover 326 in the pan unit 320 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  In the buffer unit 510, the projector mounting member 505 attached to the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 in the buffer unit 510 when the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 are strongly pressed downward or hit down. Move down to The shock absorbing member 511 is compressed to absorb an impact. Then, when the projector mounting member 505 is further moved downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 abuts on the upper surface side of the main body 512 a of the buffer base 512. Since a gap is formed between the main body portion 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 by the left and right leg pieces 512b, the projector attachment member in contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a When the 505 further moves downward, the flat plate-like body portion 512a is bent, and the impact can be absorbed also by the bending of the body portion 512a. Furthermore, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the downwardly bent main body portion 512a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the pan unit cover 326, and further bending of the body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. Thus, when the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 are strongly hit from the upper side, the impact can be absorbed in multiple steps, and the attaching portion 416 e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attaching portion of the plate unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be avoided from acting on 326a and the like to prevent their breakage.

[3-4 g-7. Operation effect of the second rendering operation unit]
The effects of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. FIG. 74 (a) is an explanatory view of the second rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends in a state in which the main screen of the screen unit is directed forward; (b) is a sub of the screen unit It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned the screen forward. FIG. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) is a view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen directed forward and is hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going, and (b) shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd rendering operation unit of the state of (a). FIG. FIG. 77 (a) is a view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub screen directed forward and is hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going, and (b) shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd rendering operation unit of the state of (a). FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410, the operation button, or the like in accordance with the game state which changes as the game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5. The effect image can be displayed in 410 to entertain the player, and the player can operate the operation button 410 to cause the player to participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second effect operation unit 400A is formed such that the entire height thereof is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the entire width of the second effect operation unit 400 </ b> A is formed to be slightly larger than 1⁄3 of the entire width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is disposed at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper portion of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A, when attached to the dish unit 320, is between the lower end of the leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. There is a gap in the That is, only the upper part of the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. It is attached to become. Thereby, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis line CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is a vertical line. At an angle of 63 degrees, it is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the plate unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A) The central axis line CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player, because the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a in the game board 5 being played. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The door frame side second effect display device 460A or the like in the operation button 410 or the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 slide on the four cylindrical guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410, respectively. It is inserted in a movable manner and biased forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the second effect operation unit 400A, in the normal state (the state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring. A portion of the rear surface of the frame main body 416 near the central opening 416a.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, in the normal state, the center side (center axis line CL side) of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 goes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. It protrudes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is , And protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In the normal state, when the player depresses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 which is bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed It is likely to be More specifically, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached such that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of this embodiment is performed. Since the central axis CL of the button 410 is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from the upper side as in the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 The region will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, since the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed on a flat surface on which the player performs the pressing operation, the operation button is enlarged while the portion to be pressed is made flat. When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation can not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed and operated by the player has a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) Because the shape of the operation button 410 is pushed away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is dispersed to the entire operation button 410 and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the effects of operation.

  In addition, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the pan unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate a vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the attached part Since it generate | occur | produces, the whole 2nd rendering operation unit 400A can be vibrated large (strongly), and a vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the 2nd rendering operation unit 400A. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation (near the upper portion of the operation button 410), the vibration is strong against the player pressing the operation button 410 Can be transmitted to surprise the player and enjoy the presentation.

  Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the bottom plate of the projector attachment member 505 and the plate unit cover 326 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A. A buffer unit 510 is disposed between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The buffer unit 510 includes an elastically deformable buffer member 511, and a gap is formed between the main body 512a with which the buffer member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the impact is multistaged by elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511, bending of the main portion 512a of the buffer base 512, or the like. It can be absorbed, and it can be avoided that an unreasonable force acts on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, etc., and breakage of the second rendering operation unit 400A etc. Can be prevented. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 with a strong force or the like when the player is presented with the effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is performed. Since the button 410 and the second effect operation unit 400A and the like are not damaged, interruption of the game due to the breakage can be avoided, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed, and it is difficult to damage it. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed and operated by the player is formed in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) projecting forward, compared with the case where it is flat. The strength and the rigidity are high, and even if struck strongly, the impact can be dispersed to the whole button lens 411, and the breakage is difficult.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decorative portion formed on the back side thereof Decoration by unevenness such as 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, since the plate thickness is changed and light is complicatedly refracted at the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed, it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a It is possible to make the rear difficult to look at the outer peripheral portion of the portion to be the inner side of the button lens 411 by the decoration of the concavities and convexities in which the triangles are combined. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis line CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device A gap between the screen unit 470 and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 is located, but the outer side or the back side of the screen unit 470 is viewed from the front side (player's side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the space. Can be obscured. Thereby, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 capable of pressing, deterioration in the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented, and the player who saw the operation button 410 can While being able to prevent having a sense of discomfort, the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be disposed without problems in the transparent operation button 410, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A uses the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like located on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc. It is shaped to be invisible. Specifically, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 directed forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the outer left of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the right of the peripheral decoration member 478 The outer part (in FIG. 76, the part of the cross hatch surrounded by an alternate long and short dash line) is made invisible from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the second position in which the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the portion outside the annular peripheral decoration 472 a of the sub screen 472 (the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. ) But from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside or the back side of the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and hence the entire second rendering operation unit 400A can be improved.

  In the first position where the main screen 471 faces forward, the screen general part of the sub screen 472 is formed by the first button decorative part 411a of the button lens 411, the second button decorative part 411b, the button frame 412, and the like. 472b and the sub screen decoration member 476, and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are obscured (see FIG. 76). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the sub screen 472 exists, the main screen 471 can be rotated, etc. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated and switched from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472, the operation is performed. A movement beyond the player's expectation in the button 410 can be made to have a strong impact on the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the second position where the sub screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the button frame 412, etc. of the button lens 411. The member 474 is obscured (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub screen 472 (the sub screen decoration member 476) can be rotated, thereby increasing the impact when the sub screen 472 (the screen unit 470) is rotated, The player can be entertained.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is a button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display disposed inside the rear of the operation button 410 while having a polyhedral first button decorative portion 411a combining a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width range The apparatus 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged, and a peripheral decoration member 478. Thus, the triangular decoration (first button decoration 411a) disposed on the front side and the quadrilateral decoration (peripheral decoration 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) disposed on the rear side overlap so as to intersect with each other. This makes it possible to show a complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

  Further, as described above, since the first button decoration 411a mainly composed of a triangle, and the peripheral decoration 472a mainly consisting of a square and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated in the front-rear direction, the eyes of the player When the position moves, the degree of overlapping of them changes, so that the geometric pattern that is seen overlapping changes, and it is possible for the player to show the decoration with motion, and the player to make the decoration with a three-dimensional feeling with depth. The player can be entertained.

  Furthermore, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed behind the inside of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by driving the switching drive motor 492 to direct the main screen 471 forward, or a sub screen 472 can be directed forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated vertically and extend vertically. The decoration of the geometric pattern is such that the decoration consisting of a plurality of square weights arranged in a row crosses the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular ring of the first button decoration part 411a of the button lens 411 It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration portion 472a extends in an annular shape, and a decoration consisting of a plurality of square weights arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern overlapped with the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the player's attention is drawn to the operation button 410 by the change of the decoration, or The change can cause the player to suggest the arrival of a chance or the like, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) having different switchable forms on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, it is possible to display an effect image which is completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device, and a strong impact on the player Can be entertained. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a disc-shaped sub screen 472 having a sub-screen decorative member 476 in the center in the center, and the centers of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided separately in the circumferential direction of the rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis.

  Then, in the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a rectangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75A), and the milky white light transmitting property is obtained. The effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized through the main screen 471 of FIG. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape on the display screen. Thus, while the display screen of the general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape, so that the conventional display screen appears to the player And the player can be surprised, the player can be made to pay attention to the main screen 471, and the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be entertained. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the second position where the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the disk-like central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 It appears that the sub screen decoration member 476 imitating a skull is located at the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472. By the way, since a flat and opaque subscreen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the back side of the subscreen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at the portion of the subscreen decoration substrate 477 And the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central part of the rear surface of the subscreen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, in the sub screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion on which the shadow of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub screen 472 can be made to emit light by the light, and the sub provided in the center of the sub screen 472 The screen decoration member 476 can be lighted and decorated. In addition, by making the LED 477a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 emit light, the shadow of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472 can be obscured by the light from the projector 500. The entire side can be brightly decorated.

  The door frame side second effect display device 460A emits the LED 477a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 with the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 directed forward, and the effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When illuminated, the effect image is displayed on the portion of the sub screen 472 where the shadow of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, the portion outside the sub screen decoration member 476 consisting of the decoration imitating a skull The sub screen decoration member 476 which becomes the inner side of the light emitting decoration is emitted by the LED 477 a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the light emission decoration of the fixed sub screen decoration member 476 is decorated by the effect image (moving image), and a decoration effect which is completely different from the light emission decoration of the decoration member in the conventional pachinko machine While being able to show to a player and giving a strong impact to a player, a player can be made to pay attention to the subscreen 472 strongly. Further, in this state, the light of the LED 477a is brighter (at high brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, and thus a partially high-intensity effect image which can not be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device Can be displayed, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and, at the same time, it is possible to display an effect image that makes the player more entertaining.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the screen directed to the front is appropriately rotated in a state in which the effect image is irradiated from the projector 500 forward, and the main screen 471 is changed to the sub screen 472 When the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 are rotated, the portion located in the projection range of the projector 500 in the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 is changed. The effect image is projected and displayed. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub screen 472, such a strange visual effect that the peripheral edge decoration portion 472 a and the sub screen decoration member 476 rotate and move on the effect image projected from the projector 500 is It can be shown to the player and can entertain the player.

  Thus, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Since the player can show the player a decoration with a three-dimensional effect by the movement, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A can emit light such as an effect image or the like to the front of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 on the front surface of which the LED 477a is mounted in the back of the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  Further, behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420 The first LEDs 422a of the first operation button and the first LEDs 423a of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are caused to emit light by emitting the first LEDs 422a and 423a. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 have a cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit Since the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not leak to the inner side of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d, it is located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d in the frame main body 416 of Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is located behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outside The second LEDs 423 b of the decorative substrate 423 are disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated to emit light by causing the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416 It is located, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated. .

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415. By emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decorative substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be favorably decorated with light emission.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens different in form from each other by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed behind the inside of the operation button 410. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and the player can be presented with an effect that can not be realized with a conventional pachinko machine in which the shape of the display screen changes (is switched). Can give the player a strong impact and enjoy it.

[3-4 h. Overall configuration of third embodiment of rendering operation unit]
Next, the third effect operation unit 400B which is the third embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 85 and the like. FIG. 78 (a) is a front view of a third effect operation unit different from that of the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77, and FIG. 78 (b) is the right side surface of the third effect operation unit FIG. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the third effect operation unit. FIG. 80 (a) is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 80 (b) is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an explanatory view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view taken along line L-L in FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line M-M in FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the third effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the third effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back FIG.

  The third effect operation unit 400B can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 instead of the effect operation unit 400 or the second effect operation unit 400A. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the third effect operation unit 400B can be pressed by the player. Hereinafter, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the same components as those of the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The third effect operation unit 400B has a circular outer shape and is formed transparent at the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that the player can press and operate, and the outer periphery of the operation button 410 surrounds the dish unit cover 326 A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a; a decoration substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 , The third base unit 520 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decoration substrate unit 420 attached to the front, and the third base unit 520 visible from the player side through the operation button 410. A decorative rotating unit 530 attached to the That.

[3-4 h-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 84 and 85 and the like. The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B is formed in a circular shape whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 which is formed in a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 are provided.

  The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numeral is attached and the detailed description is omitted.

[3-4 h-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in an outer shape that matches the front end side of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 has a circular central opening 416a, a plurality of outer peripheral openings 416b arranged along the periphery of the central opening 416a, and a cutout cut out with a predetermined width at the upper front of the central opening 416a. It has a portion 416c and is attached from the rear side to the frame main body 416 so as to close the frame-like frame main body 416 attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 and the outer peripheral opening 416b. A pair of light transmitting frame side lenses 417 and a light transmitting frame top lens 418 attached to the frame main body 416 from the front side so as to close the notch 416 c are provided.

  The frame unit 415 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as that of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given thereto and detailed description will be omitted.

[3-4 h-3. Decorative substrate unit]
The decoration substrate unit 420 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85 and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the third base unit 520 below the frame unit 415, and can emit and decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The third effect operation unit 400B can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. And a motor cover 425 attached to the front of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 can emit light and decorate only the second button decoration portion 411 b of the operation button 410 and the frame side of the frame unit 415 And a second LED 422 b and a second LED 423 b capable of emitting and decorating only the lens 417.

  The decoration substrate unit 420 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the decoration substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description will be omitted.

[3-4 h-4. Third base unit]
The third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the third base unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400 B has the operation button 410 mounted so as to be able to move forward and backward, and the decorative rotation unit 530 is mounted and mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 .

  The third base unit 520 includes a receiving wall portion 521a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and recessed in a semispherical shape in the central portion rearward, and a blind hole opened forward on the outside of the receiving wall portion 521a. An annular unit base 521 having two holding holes 521b, a frame top lens decorative substrate 522 mounted on the front upper portion of the unit base 521, and four inserted in the four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521, respectively. Operation button spring 523, three sensor holders 524 attached to the front of unit base 521, three pressure detection sensors 525 attached to each sensor holder 524 for detecting pressing operation of operation button 410, unit During the third rendering operation unit attached to the rear side of the base 521 A substrate 526, and a third staging operation unit relay board cover 527 attached to the rear side of the unit base 521 so as to cover the rear side of the relay board 526, a.

  The third base unit 520 is in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotation shaft of the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521 and the presentation operation unit first drive motor 528. A first drive gear (not shown) and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 529 meshed with the first drive gear and rotatably mounted on the unit base 521 are provided. The first transmission gear 529 meshes with a rotating gear 531 a of a decorative rotating unit 530 described later.

  The unit base 521 has a substantially circular outer shape, and is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 521 includes, in addition to the housing wall 521 a and the holding hole 521 b, a light shielding wall 521 c projecting forward in a flat plate shape from the lower side of the portion to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached A plurality of ventilating openings 521d penetrating through the wall 521a, a left projecting part 521e projecting forward from substantially the center of the left outer side and the up and down direction of the housing wall 521a, and housed so as to face the left projecting part 521e A right protrusion 521f protruding forward from substantially the center of the right outer side and the vertical direction of the wall 521a, a left shaft 521g extending cylindrically from the left protrusion 521e to the right, and an extension of the left shaft 521g And a right bearing portion 521h coaxial with the axis (first axis CL1) and penetrating the right protrusion 521f.

  The housing wall portion 521a which is semispherically recessed rearward of the unit base 521 is formed so as to be able to be housed in a state in which substantially the rear half of the decorative rotary unit 530 is not in contact with the recessed front side.

  The four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521 are formed at the four corners on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the housing wall 521a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of each of the holding holes 521b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 521b of the four holding holes 521b extends from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 521. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. The holding hole 521b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 521b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 521 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, among the four holding holes 521b, the two holding holes 521b disposed on the lower side are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 521 with respect to the upper two holding holes 521b. .

  The light shielding wall portion 521 c of the unit base 521 can prevent the light from the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 from leaking downward, so that the frame top lens 418 can be decorated to emit light only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 522. It is to do.

  The left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 has its left end fixed horizontally to the left protrusion 521e, and the right side thereof is rotatably inserted into the rotary member-side left bearing portion 531b of the decorative rotary unit 530. It is a thing. Further, in the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, the cylindrical rotary member-side right shaft portion 531c of the decorative rotary unit 530 is rotatably inserted therein. The left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h are coaxially disposed with respect to a first axis line CL1 (see FIG. 83) extending in the horizontal direction. The decorative rotator unit 530 can be rotatably mounted about a horizontally extending first axis CL1 by the left shaft 521g and the right bearing 521h of the unit base 521.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522, and the light emission decoration of the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be achieved by making the LEDs emit light. In addition, the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 has a white front surface, and the mounted LED is a full color LED.

  The operation button spring 523 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 521 b in the unit base 521. When assembled into the third effect operation unit 400B, the rear end of the operation button spring 523 is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 521b, and the front end protrudes rearward from the main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c. The operation button 410 is urged forward by the operation button springs 523.

  The three pressure detection sensors 525 are disposed at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front of the unit base 521, one of the three pressure detection sensors 525 is on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 521b, and the other is on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 521b, and the remaining one is lower left The sensor holder 524 is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 521b. The three pressure detection sensors 525 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction centering on the center of the unit base 521. The three pressing detection sensors 525 can detect three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The third effect operation unit relay substrate 526 is attached on the rear side of the unit base 521 to the left outside (right side in front view) of the housing wall 521 a in rear view. The third effect operation unit relay substrate 526 includes an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422, an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, a vibration motor 424, a frame top lens decoration substrate 522, a pressing detection sensor 525, and a production operation unit first drive motor 528 , A rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 of the decoration rotating body unit 530, a first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535, and a second decoration surface portion decoration substrate 536, and a door main body relay substrate (illustration is omitted) of the door frame base unit 100 To relay the connection of

  The relay board cover 527 extends from the lower end of the part covering the rear side of the third effect operation unit relay board 526 to the left in front view, and includes a leg 527a attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the unit base 521. The leg portion 527a of the relay substrate cover 527, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally, and between the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. Form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Thus, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the bottom surface of the leg 527a is in contact with the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the third effect operation unit 400B is restricted downward, and the effect operation unit of the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the mounting portion 326a and the like, and damage to them can be prevented.

  The rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521, and the left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 and the first transmission gear 529 via the first drive gear (not shown). The decorative rotator unit 530 rotatably mounted by the right bearing portion 521h can be rotated about a horizontally extending first axis CL1.

[3-4 h-5. Decorative Rotor Unit]
The decoration rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85 and 87. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the decorative rotator unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotator unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. The decorative rotator unit 530 is attached to the third base unit 520, and can show the player a movable effect through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The outer surface of the decorative rotator unit 530 is generally formed in a generally spherical shape as shown in the drawing.

  The decorative rotator unit 530 is rotatably attached to the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, and has a disc-shaped rotator base unit 531 and one of the disc-shaped rotator base units 531. The first decorative surface portion 532 rotatably mounted on the outside of the surface, and the rotary surface of the rotary base unit 531 mounted on the outer side of the surface opposite to the first decorative surface portion 532 A presentation operation unit second drive motor 534 (not shown in 532) mounted in the second decoration surface 533 and the rotating body base unit 531 which have different decorations and rotates the first decoration surface 532 and the second decoration surface 533. See FIG. 83).

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the decorative rotator unit 530 is attached to one surface of the rotator base unit 531 and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the first decorative surface portion 532 are The first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 mounted and the surface opposite to the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 of the rotator base unit 531 are attached and can emit light toward the second decorative surface portion 533 And a second decoration surface portion decoration substrate 536 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The rotor base unit 531 has a disk-like shape with a predetermined thickness, and the inside is hollow. The rotor base unit 531 is attached at a predetermined position on the outer peripheral surface and penetrates the center of the spur gear-shaped rotor gear 531a meshing with the first transmission gear 529 of the third base unit 520, and the rotor gear 531a. The left shaft portion 521g is inserted cylindrically from the outer peripheral surface opposite to the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b into which the left shaft portion 521g is inserted so as to be capable of relative rotation and the rotating body gear 531a. The rotating body side right shaft portion 531c to be inserted and a stopper 531d projecting outward on the base end side of the rotating body side right shaft portion 531c are provided.

  The rotating body gear 531a, the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b, and the rotating body side right shaft portion 531c are orthogonal to the second axis line CL2 passing through the disk-like center in the rotating body base unit 531 and pass through the axial center of the outer peripheral surface It is coaxially arranged with respect to the single axis line CL1. The stopper 531 d is formed to abut on the front surface of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. The stopper 531 d regulates the rotation range around the horizontally extending first axis CL 1 of the decorative rotator unit 530 with respect to the third base unit 520 to a predetermined angular range (here, 180 degrees).

  Further, the rotating body base unit 531 includes a bearing cylindrical portion 531e extending in a cylindrical shape concentrically with the second axis line CL2 passing through the center of the disk shape, and a plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f which decorate the outer peripheral surface. And. The shaft member 532 d protruding from the first decorative surface portion 532 is inserted into the inside of the bearing cylindrical portion 531 e, and the shaft member 532 d can be rotatably attached by the bush attached to both ends. The peripheral surface decoration portion 531 f penetrates the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531, can release the heat in the rotating body base unit 531 to the outside, and decorates the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531. You can make it look better.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, it is attached to the decoration rotation body unit 530 in the rotation body base unit 531, and the surrounding surface on which several LED which can irradiate light toward the surrounding surface decoration part 531f is mounted A decorative part decorative substrate may be provided. By appropriately emitting the LED of the peripheral surface decorative portion decorative substrate, the peripheral surface decorative portion 531 f of the rotating body base unit 531 can emit light and decorate.

  The first decorative surface portion 532 is generally formed in a substantially hemispherical shape. The first decorative surface portion 532 has a light transmitting property formed radially around a logo decoration portion 532a consisting of a predetermined character provided at the center of the bulging surface and a logo decoration portion 532a. An opaque first sub decoration which is formed to fill the outer periphery of the first main decorative portion 532b and the first main decorative portion 532b and whose outer peripheral end forms a circular outer peripheral end of the first decorative surface portion 532 It has a portion 532c, and a shaft member 532d projecting cylindrically along the center from the back surface.

  The logo decoration portion 532a and the first main decoration portion 532b are lighted and decorated by the light from the LED mounted on the first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535. The shaft member 532d is rotatably inserted into the bearing cylindrical portion 531e via a bush. The shaft member 532d is formed to have a length extending through the bearing cylindrical portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531 to the opposite side when assembled to the decorative rotating body unit 530, and the central axis is a first axis It will be in the state which corresponded with 2nd axis line CL2 orthogonal to CL1.

  The whole of the first decorative surface portion 532 can be rotated around the second axis CL2 by attaching the shaft member 532d to the bearing cylindrical portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531.

  The second decorative surface portion 533 is disposed between the rotary decorative portion 533a attached to the tip of the shaft member 532d of the first decorative surface portion 532 and between the rotary decorative portion 533a and the rotary base unit 531, and the rotary base unit And a fixed decoration portion 533 b attached to the housing 531. Since the rotation decoration part 533a is attached to the shaft member 532d, it can rotate together with the first decoration surface part 532 via the shaft member 532d, and can rotate around the second axis CL2. On the other hand, since the fixed decorative portion 533b is attached to the rotating body base unit 531, it does not rotate with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and does not rotate around the second axis.

  The rotation decoration part 533a is formed in a decoration shape provided with a plurality of fins (feathers) in the circumferential direction, and has a plurality of decorations extending in the circumferential direction concentrically. The rotating decorative portion 533a can generate a wind by rotating. The fixed decorative portion 533b is formed with a decoration having a plurality of radially extending lines. The rotating decoration portion 533a and the fixed decoration portion 533b are partially translucent, and are lighted and decorated by the light from the LED mounted on the second decoration surface portion decoration substrate 536.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is mounted in the rotating body base unit 531 so that the rotation axis protrudes rearward. A spur gear-like second drive gear 534 a is attached to the rotation shaft of the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. The second drive gear 534a meshes with a spur gear shaped decorative surface portion gear 534b fixed in the middle of the shaft member 532d. Therefore, the first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 (rotational decorative portion 533a) are rotated by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 via the second drive gear 534a, the decorative surface portion gear 534b, and the shaft member 532d. It can be rotated together.

  The first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 have a white front surface, and the mounted LEDs are full color LEDs.

  In the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the present embodiment, a first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 which are different in decoration from each other are arrayed in the circumferential direction around the second axis line CL2. Specifically, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are provided at an interval of 180 degrees in the circumferential direction.

[3-4 h-6. Operation effect of third rendering operation unit]
Next, the function and effect of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 78, FIG. 81, and FIG. FIG. 88 (a) is a front view of the third rendering operation unit showing the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotator unit facing forward, and FIG. 88 (b) is a front view of the central button of the operation button in FIG. FIG. FIG. 89 (a) is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface in a state where the first decorative surface is directed forward in the third rendering operation unit, and FIG. 89 (b) is the second decorative surface in the third rendering operation unit It is an explanatory view showing rotation of the 2nd decoration surface part in the state which turned to the front.

  The third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the gaming state which is changed by the game ball being hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player The player can be made to participate in the player participation type effect presented to the player by operating the operation button 410 and can be enjoyed.

  Although the third effect operation unit 400B is not shown, the overall height is formed to be substantially the same height as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. ing. In addition, the entire width of the third effect operation unit 400 </ b> B is formed to be slightly larger than 1⁄3 of the entire width of the door frame 3. The third effect operation unit 400B is disposed in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, the upper portion of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. With the third effect operation unit 400B attached to the plate unit 320, the lower surface of the leg 527a of the relay substrate cover 527 which is the bottom surface is between the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 , A gap is formed. That is, only the upper part of the third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. It is attached to become. Thereby, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the central axis line CL (see FIG. 82) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is a vertical line. At an angle of 63 degrees, it is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the plate unit 320 (third effect operation unit 400B) The central axis line CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player, because the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a in the game board 5 being played. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the third effect operation unit 400B (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The user can visually recognize the operation button 410 and the decoration rotary unit 530 in the operation button 410 in a good state.

  In the third effect operation unit 400 B, the four guide bosses 413 c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 521 b of the third base unit 520, and biased forward by the operation button spring 523. It is done. In the normal state (the state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the third effect operation unit 400B is operated by the urging force of the operation button spring 523 as in the case of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. The front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of 410 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416 a in the rear surface of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, in the normal state, the center side (the center axis line CL side) of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 goes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. It protrudes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is , And protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 82 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In the normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 523. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 which is bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed It is likely to be More specifically, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached such that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the operation of the third effect operation unit 400B of this embodiment is performed. The central axis CL of the button 410 is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line in the same manner as the rendering operation unit 400 and the second rendering operation unit 400A, so that the player operates the operation button from above as in the conventional pachinko machine When 410 is pressed, as shown by a white arrow in FIG. 61, a portion away from the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, since the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed on a flat surface on which the player performs the pressing operation, the operation button is enlarged while the portion to be pressed is made flat. When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation can not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulging forward. Because the shape of the operation button 410 is pushed away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is dispersed to the entire operation button 410 and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the effects of operation.

  In addition, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, the third effect operation unit 400B is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the pan unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate a vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the attached part Since it generate | occur | produces, the whole 3rd rendering operation unit 400B can be vibrated large (strongly), and a vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the 3rd rendering operation unit 400B. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player who is pressing the operation button 410, so that the game can be played. Can surprise the person and enjoy the production.

  Furthermore, the third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the pan unit cover 326 in a suspended state and the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 forming the lower surface and the pan unit cover 326. A gap is formed between the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 527a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or smashed, until the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the lower plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by bending downward the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. In addition, after the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the third effect operation unit 400B downward is restricted, and the effect operation of the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 is performed. Unreasonable force can be avoided from acting on the unit attachment portion 326a and the like, and damage to the third effect operation unit 400B and the like can be prevented. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 with a strong force or when the player depresses the operation button 410 or the like, the operation button 410 or the third operation operation unit 400B is displayed. Since the three effect operation units 400B and the like are not damaged, interruption of the game due to the breakage can be avoided, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed, and it is difficult to damage the game hall side. It is possible to suppress the increase in burden.

  Further, as described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) projecting forward, it is flat. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411 even if it is strongly hit, making it difficult to break.

  In addition, since the third effect operation unit 400B includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decoration portion 411a By the decoration of the concave and convex portions, it is possible to make the rear difficult to see at the portion of the outer peripheral edge of the portion to be the inside of the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis line CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the decorative rotator unit 530 The gap between the outer periphery of the decorative rotator unit 530 can be made difficult to see from the front side (player's side) by the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap. . As a result, even if the rotating decorative rotator unit 530 is provided in the operation button 410 capable of pressing, deterioration in the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented, and the player who saw the operation button 410 feels uncomfortable And the decorative rotary unit 530 can be disposed without problems in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 and the decorative rotary unit 530, and thus the entire pachinko machine 1 can be prevented. You can do better.

  Furthermore, the third effect operation unit 400B includes the first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535 and the second decoration surface portion decoration substrate 536 in the decoration rotation unit 530 disposed in the operation button 410 (inside of the button frame 412). By emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on them, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be lighted and decorated in the operation button 410. When the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 emit light and decorate, the inside of the operation button 410 can be decorated to emit light. At this time, since the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is provided with a cylindrical main body portion 413a surrounding the outer periphery of the decoration rotation body unit 530, light from the decoration rotation body unit 530 is outside the main body portion 413a. There is no leakage, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  In addition, the third effect operation unit 400B is an operation button left outside decoration substrate in the decoration substrate unit 420 behind the second button decoration portion 411b that faces from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410 The first LED 422a of the second button 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decorative portions 411b of the operation button 410 are lighted by emitting the first LEDs 422a and 423a. It can be done. The first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 have a cylindrical main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a cylinder of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. Between the first LEDs 422a and 423a (the decorative rotary unit 530 side) and the inner cylinder There is no leakage to the outside of the portion 416d, and only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Furthermore, the third effect operation unit 400B is located behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outside The second LEDs 423 b of the decorative substrate 423 are disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated to emit light by causing the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416 It is located, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated. .

  In the third effect operation unit 400 B, the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 in the third base unit 520 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 The frame top lens 418 can be decorated by emitting light by emitting the plurality of LEDs. From the lower side of the portion of the third base unit 520 to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 of the unit base 521 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 521c protrudes forward to the rear lower end of the frame top lens 418 The light from the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  The third effect operation unit 400 </ b> B of the present embodiment can visually recognize from the front the decorative rotary unit 530 disposed on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. In the normal state, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 80, the third effect operation unit 400B is in a state where the first decorative surface 532 of the decorative rotating unit 530 is directed forward. In this state, the central axis of the shaft member 532d (second axis CL2) of the first decorative surface portion 532 substantially coincides with the central axis CL of the operation button 410 (see FIG. 82). Further, in the normal state, the rotational position of the first decorative surface 532 about the second axis CL2 is rotationally stationary in a state in which the logo decoration 532a having directivity is oriented correctly.

  Further, in the normal state, the stopper 531 d of the rotating body base unit 531 in the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in contact with the front surface above the right bearing portion 521 h of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. That is, in the normal state, the rotation of the decorative rotator unit 530 in the direction in which the upper portion moves backward is restricted by the stopper 531d with respect to the first axis line CL1 extending horizontally.

  In this normal state, the rotary gear 531a of the decorative rotary unit 530 via the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529 by the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 in the third base unit 520. Is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated about the first axis line CL1 so that the upper part thereof moves forward. Then, when the decorative rotator unit 530 rotates 180 degrees around the first axis line CL1 from the normal state, the stopper 531d abuts on the front surface lower than the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, and the rotation more than that Is restricted, and the rotational drive by the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is stopped.

  Although not shown, the third base unit 520 is provided with a rotation detection sensor for detecting the rotational position of the decoration rotation unit 530, and the third base unit 520 is configured of the decoration rotation unit 530 based on the detection by the rotation detection sensor. The rotational position is controlled.

  When the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis line CL1 from the normal state, as shown in FIG. 88, the second decorative surface portion 533 is in a state of facing forward. Therefore, the second decorative surface portion 533 can be favorably viewed through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. In this state, the second axis CL2 of the second decorative surface 533 substantially coincides with the central axis CL of the operation button 410.

  Further, the third effect operation unit 400B extends coaxially with the second axis CL2 via the second drive gear 534a and the decoration surface portion gear 534b by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 in the decoration rotating body unit 530. When the shaft member 532d is rotated, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 attached to both ends of the shaft member 532d can be rotated simultaneously (see FIG. 89). In other words, the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 are rotated by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 around the second axis CL2 orthogonal to the first axis CL1 extending horizontally. Can.

  Although illustration is omitted, the decoration rotation body unit 530 is provided with a rotation detection sensor for detecting the rotational position of the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533, and the first rotation detection sensor detects the rotation position sensor. The decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 can be stopped at any rotational position. Therefore, even if the logo decorative portion 532a having directionality such as the first decorative surface portion 532 is provided, the rotation can be stopped at a position according to the directivity, so the decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 is impaired. There is no need to be used, and the decorativeness can be exhibited with certainty.

  Further, the third effect operation unit 400B includes the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530, Each can be decorated to emit light. The light emitting decorations of the first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 rotate around the first axis line CL1 in which the decorative rotator unit 530 extends horizontally. It can be performed even when the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotating around the second axis CL2 orthogonal to the first axis CL1.

  Since the second decorative surface portion 533 includes the rotating decorative portion 533a and the stationary decorative portion 533b which does not rotate, the second decorative surface portion 533 is mounted on the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 when the rotating decorative portion 533a is rotated. When a plurality of LEDs are made to emit light, a part of the light irradiated forward through the fixed decoration 533b is periodical due to the opaque portion or the colored portion of the rotating decoration 533a which is rotating. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a flickering light emitting decoration like a flickering, and strongly attract the player's attention.

[3-4 h-7. Movable effects in the third effect operation unit]
Next, movable effects in the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 90 and 91. FIG. 90 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the movable effect for rotating the decoration rotating body unit in the third effect operation unit. FIG. 91 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the movable effect in which the decoration rotating body unit is rotated in a state in which the first decorative surface portion and the second decorative surface portion are rotated in the third effect operation unit. First, with reference to FIG. 90 etc., the movable effect of the decoration rotating body unit 530 using only the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 will be described. In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 90 (a) etc., the first decoration surface 532 having the logo decoration 532a is directed forward.

  As an example of the movable effect to rotate only about the first axis line CL1 extending horizontally, from the normal state (the state of FIG. 90 (a)), the first drive gear (shown in FIG. Omitted) First rotation by rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 in the counterclockwise direction in right side view through the first transmission gear 529 and the rotator gear 531a without stopping halfway in the counterclockwise direction. The second decorative surface portion 533 disposed on the opposite side of the surface portion 532 is directed forward (see FIG. 90 (d)). As a result, it is possible to show the player such a movable effect that the second decorative surface portion 533 moves and appears from above while rotating so that the first decorative surface portion 532 moves downward. Therefore, the first decorative surface portion 532 can give the player an impression as if suddenly switching to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, which can surprise the player and changes the decoration. The player can be made to think that something is good, and the expectation of the game can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, the effect operation unit such that the decoration rotating body unit 530 reciprocates in the counterclockwise direction within the angle range of 0 degrees to 60 degrees in the right side view from the normal state The first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and reverse several times. Thereby, when the first decorative surface portion 532 is turned downward, a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 is slightly visible with the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531 f interposed above the first decorative surface portion 532 (Refer to FIG. 90 (b)), the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the second decorative surface portion 533, which appears and disappears when the decorative rotary unit 530 reciprocates. The player's expectation for the arrival of the chance can be enhanced by whether or not the second decoration surface 533 faces forward. Thereafter, the decorative rotary unit 530 is returned to the original state (the state shown in FIG. 90 (a)), thereby making it possible to suggest that the player does not have a chance. On the other hand, it can be suggested that a chance will come by further rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 to bring the second decorative surface 533 in the forward direction (the state of FIG. 90 (d)). Can entertain people and control the decline in interest.

  Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotary unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in right side view from the normal state, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotary base unit 531 is directed forward. State (see FIG. 90 (c)). Thus, with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 facing downward, the second decorative surface portion 533 facing upward, with the first decorative surface portion 532 facing downward. In this state, the plurality of circumferences relatively provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 are located respectively and the decorations of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 become unclear. The decoration of the surface decoration part 531 f can be clearly shown, and the decoration of the peripheral surface decoration part 531 f can be enjoyed. In addition, the rotation of the decorative rotator unit 530 is stopped at an intermediate position facing the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531 f forward, so that the player can be made to foresee a change in the game situation, and the player's game Can increase expectations for Thereafter, by rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 in a predetermined direction, the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward as a base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. The same effects as those described above can be achieved.

  Furthermore, in the state where the decoration rotation body unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view from the normal state (see FIG. 90 (c)), a predetermined angle centering on the rotation angle In order to reciprocate within the range, the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and reverse several times. As a result, the player is likely to see more on the first decoration surface 532 side or more on the second decoration surface 533 side, with the rotating body base unit 531 (plural circumferential surface decoration portions 531 f) interposed therebetween. Whether the first decorative surface 532 is facing forward or the second decorative surface 533 is facing forward, the player can be excited and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. Thereafter, the decorative rotary unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward, as described above. The effects and effects of

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, the decoration rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees from the normal state, and the second decoration surface portion 533 is directed forward (see FIG. 90D). Based on the state, it is also possible to perform a movable effect in which the operation reverse to the above is performed, and the same function and effect as described above can be obtained. In this case, the second decorative surface 533 facing forward rotates so as to move upward and the first decorative surface 532 appears from the lower side, so that the player feels an upward momentum. And increase the sense of expectation for the game, and by turning the second decorative surface 533 upward, the line of sight of the player is directed into the game area 5a above the third effect operation unit 400B. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by enjoying the game or effect in the game area 5a.

  In addition, when performing the above-described movable effect, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 appropriately emit light, and the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second The decorative surface portion 533 is in a state where light emission decoration is appropriately performed. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 viewed through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be more easily seen, so that the player can clearly recognize the difference in the decoration. As well as being able to fully exhibit the premium feeling due to the difference in the decoration, it is possible to enjoy those decorations and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the player's game. In addition, by making the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 emit light and decoration, the player's interest can be directed to the operation button 410, and thus, the player participation type effect operation of pressing the operation button 410 is performed. At the same time, the player can be urged to press the operation button 410, and the player can be made to participate in the player participation type effect and enjoyed.

  Then, with reference to FIG. 91 etc., the movable rendering of the decoration rotation body unit 530 using the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 and the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 will be described. In the initial state, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the first decoration surface 532 having the logo decoration 532a is directed forward, and the first decoration surface 532 is the second operation motor of the effect operation unit. By 534, it is rotated about a second axis CL2 (here, a clockwise direction) extending to coincide with the central axis CL of the operation button 410. In this state, since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates around the second axis CL2, the logo of the logo decorative portion 532a having directionality is hard to be recognized from the player side.

  As an example of a movable effect performed in a state in which the first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 are rotated by the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534, the first decorative surface 532 (second decorative surface 533) has a second axis While rotating around CL2, the decoration rotating body unit 530 is rotated by 180 degrees without stopping halfway in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view by the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528, The second decorative surface portion 533 rotating on the opposite side of the one decorative surface portion 532 is in a state of being directed forward (see FIG. 91D). Thereby, while the 1st decoration surface part 532 rotated clockwise is suddenly switched to the 2nd decoration surface part 533 with a different decoration, the 2nd decoration surface part 533 (rotation decoration part 533a) becomes the 1st decoration surface part 532 and Is rotating in the counterclockwise direction in the opposite direction, so it can have a strong impact on the player and can attract the player's attention strongly and It can be made to think that there is a good thing, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, the decoration rotating body unit 530 in a state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. In the right side view, the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and reverse a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within an angle range of 0 degrees to 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Thereby, when the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to face downward, the upper side of the first decorative surface 532 rotates around the second axis CL2 And the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531 f are visible, and a portion of the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating about the second axis CL 2 is slightly visible above the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531 f (See FIG. 91 (b)). Therefore, by rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 back and forth around the first axis CL1, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the second decorative surface portion 533 which is hidden or seen, and the second decorative surface portion Whether 533 points forward can increase the player's expectation for the arrival of the chance. Thereafter, the decoration rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction about the first axis line CL1 so that the first decoration surface 532 is directed forward (the state of FIG. 91 (a)), or the second decoration When the face portion 533 is turned forward (the state shown in FIG. 91B) and the player desires, it is possible to convince the player of an opportunity, and the player is entertained to suppress the decrease in interest. It can be done. The rotation may be stopped so that the logo decoration portion 532a of the first decoration surface portion 532 is correctly oriented after the first decoration surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward. As a result, since it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the logo decoration portion 532a of the first decoration surface portion 532, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance, and the player's expectation for the game is enhanced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, as a movable effect different from the above, from the state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis line CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, the decorative rotating body unit 530 Is rotated 90 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in a right side view with respect to the first axis line CL1 so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 is directed forward (see FIG. 91 (c)). . Thus, with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 facing downward, the second decorative surface portion 533 facing upward, with the first decorative surface portion 532 facing downward. Making the decorations of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 unclear because the respective decorative members are located and move so as to move in the same direction. As a result, it is possible to clearly show the plurality of peripheral surface decoration parts 531 f on the outer peripheral surface of the stationary rotary body base unit 531 sandwiched between them. Therefore, in the operation button 410, the stationary peripheral surface decorative portion 531f can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f, and the decoration can be enjoyed. Thereafter, by rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 in a predetermined direction, the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward as a base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. The same effects as those described above can be achieved.

  Furthermore, while rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis line CL2, the decoration rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis line CL1 to front the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531. In the state directed to (see FIG. 91 (c)), the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is extended multiple times so as to reciprocate within the predetermined angle range around the first axis CL centering on that state. Rotate forward and reverse. As a result, with the rotary base unit 531 (the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f) interposed, the first decorative surface portion 532 side that rotates around the second axis CL2 is more visible, and the second decorative surface portion 533 is more visible. And the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward to the player, and the player is entertained to suppress the decrease in interest. It can be done. Thereafter, the decoration rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction about the first axis line CL1 so that the first decoration surface 532 is directed forward (the state of FIG. 91 (a)), or the second decoration By setting the surface 533 to the front (the state of FIG. 91 (b)), the same function and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, after rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis line CL2 from the normal state, the decorative rotating body unit 530 around the first axis line CL From the state in which the rotating second decorative surface 533 is directed forward by rotating 180 degrees, or from the normal state, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis line CL, and the second decoration is made After the surface portion 533 is directed forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated about the second axis CL2, and with the above state (see FIG. 91D) as a reference, Can also perform a movable effect that performs the reverse operation, and can achieve the same effects as those described above. In this case, the rotating second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward rotates around the first axis line CL1 so as to move upward, and the second decorative surface portion 533 is reverse with respect to the second axial line CL2 Since the first decorative surface 532 rotating in the direction appears from below, it is possible to make the player feel a rising momentum, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and the second axis By moving the second decorative surface 533 rotating around CL2 upward, the player's gaze can be directed to the inside of the game area 5a above the third effect operation unit 400B, and the inside of the game area 5a It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by entertaining the game play and effects in the

  In addition, when performing the above-described movable effect, the rotation around the second axis line CL2 of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is reversely rotated on the way Alternatively, it may be reciprocated within a predetermined angular range. In addition, the rotational speed of the decoration rotating body unit 530 around the first axis line CL1 by the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528, and the second decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 by the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534. The rotational speed around the axis line CL2 may be the same or different. By combining these as appropriate, it is possible to increase the number of patterns of movable effects by the third effect operation unit 400B, and to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult for the player to get bored with abundant variations of the movable effects. it can.

  In addition, when performing the above-described movable effect, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are appropriately caused to emit light and rotated around the second axis CL2 The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are appropriately light emitting and decorated. Thus, in a state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the entire transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated with uniform light. On the other hand, in a state in which the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis line CL2 is directed forward, the transparent button lens 411 looks like blinking due to periodical light blocking by the rotary decorative portion 533a. It can be made to emit light by light. As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be decorated to emit light colorfully, the player's interest can be directed to the operation button 410, and the player participation type effect for pressing the operation button 410 At the time of execution, it is possible to urge the player to press the operation button 410, and the player can be made to participate in and enjoy the player participation type effect.

[3-4 h-8. Exhaust heat action of the third rendering operation unit]
Next, the heat exhausting action of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is an explanatory view showing the flow of air due to the rotation of the second decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit. In the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, the decorative rotator unit 530 disposed behind the operation button 410 includes the operation button 410 and the unit base 521 (accommodating wall portion 521a) of the third base unit 520. , And is disposed in the button internal space AS which is closed back and forth (see FIG. 92). A plurality of ventilating openings 521d penetrating in the front and rear direction are formed in the accommodation wall portion 521a which forms the rear part of the button inner space AS and covers the rear side of the decorative rotary unit 530. Therefore, the button inner space AS is in communication with the inside of the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the third effect operation unit 400B is attached through the plurality of ventilating openings 521d. Although not shown, the mounting space 326j communicates with the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through an exhaust port formed in the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower plate cover 340.

  Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, in the decorative rotating body unit 530, one of the shaft members 532d rotatably mounted coaxially with the second axis line CL on the bearing cylindrical portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531. A first decorative surface 532 and a second decorative surface 533 having different decorations are attached to both ends, respectively, so that the first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 can rotate together. A rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 for rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is mounted in the hollow rotating body base unit 531. A plurality of peripheral surface decoration parts 531f consisting of through hole-like decorations are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotary body base unit 531, and the inner and outer sides of the rotary body base unit 531 are formed through the peripheral surface decoration parts 531f. Are in communication with each other.

  Of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 mounted rotatably around the second axis CL in the decorative rotating body unit 530, the second decorative surface portion 533 is rotated about the second axis CL The decorative portion 533a is formed in a shape capable of generating a wind when it is rotated.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B configured as described above, with the first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 facing forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 When the second drive motor 534 causes the second decorative surface 533 to rotate in a predetermined direction about the second axis line CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary decorative portion 533a in the second decorative surface portion 533 Through the ventilating opening 521d, it comes out to the rear side more than the accommodation wall portion 521a (see FIG. 92 (a)). By the flow of the wind, the air in the button internal space AS in which the decorative rotator unit 530 is accommodated can be forcibly exhausted to the outside and ventilated. And since the button inner space AS and the inside of the rotating body base unit 531 communicate with each other through the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f, the heat released from the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 is divided into a plurality of It is possible to discharge it to the rear of the third effect operation unit 400B (in the mounting space 326j of the pan unit 320) through the surface decoration 531f, the button internal space AS, and the ventilating opening 521d. As a result, it is possible to suppress an abnormal rise in the temperature in the decorative rotator unit 530 or the operation button 410, and to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to heat.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 are arranged in the same manner as the third operation operation unit 400B, with the second decoration surface portion 533 of the decoration rotation body unit 530 directed forward. When the second drive motor 534 rotates in a predetermined direction about the second axis line CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary decorative portion 533 a in the second decorative surface portion 533 is guided backward along the inner surface of the operation button 410 As a result, the plurality of ventilating openings 521d of the accommodation wall 521a covering the rear of the decorative rotation unit 530 are removed rearward relative to the accommodation wall 521a (see FIG. 92 (b)). The air flow in the button space AS in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is accommodated can be forced to be discharged to the outside and ventilated by the flow of the wind, so that the air is installed in the rotating body base unit 531. The heat released from the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 is transmitted to the rear of the third rendering operation unit 400B (the mounting space 326j of the pan unit 320) through the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f, the button inner space AS, and the ventilating opening 521d. Can be discharged into the As a result, it is possible to suppress an abnormal rise in the temperature in the decorative rotator unit 530 or the operation button 410, and to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to heat.

  The exhaust heat discharged into the mounting space 326j through the plurality of ventilation openings 521d of the housing wall 521a of the unit base 521 passes through an exhaust port (not shown) formed on the bottom plate part 326i and the lower cover 340. Discharged to the outside of the

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 93 to FIG. Fig. 93 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 96 is a cross-sectional view taken along line N-N in FIG. 93 (a). The door frame left side unit 540 is a door frame base unit so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 (door frame left side decoration substrate 160) above the plate unit 320 It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 at 100. The door frame left side unit 540 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 540 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 541 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a left unit base 541. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 542 attached to the front surface, and a translucent unit disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit mounted on the front upper portion of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and projecting like a cylinder frame to the front and extending vertically The decorative base 544 is attached to the front lower portion of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, and is mounted on the left unit. To cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit lower decoration base 545 projecting forward in a frame shape shorter than the decoration base 544 and the left unit upper decoration base 544 and the left unit lower decoration base 545 A transparent left unit decorative cover 546 mounted on the front side of the left unit base 541 and a plurality of decorative members 547 mounted on the front side of the left unit decorative cover 546.

  The left unit base 541 of the door frame left side unit 540 is formed in a shallow box shape whose rear side is opened, and has a plurality of openings 541 a penetrating in the front and rear directions on the front surface. The plurality of openings 541a have circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically as shown. The left unit base 541 includes LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) from the plurality of openings 541a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face the front. The respective opening portions 541a of the left unit base 541 are formed such that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 541 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 542 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided up and down into an upper diffusion lens member 542A and a lower diffusion lens member 542B. The left unit diffusion lens member 542 is a square lens of a front view circle corresponding to the circular opening 541a of the left unit base 541 and a square of a front view square corresponding to the square opening 541a. And a lens unit 542 b. The door frame left side unit 540 is assembled in the door frame 3 so that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are located immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 542a and the square lens portion 542b. It is formed.

  The circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed in the rear can be emitted forward in a point-like manner by the circular lens portion 542a. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be lighted and decorated by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 542a.

  The square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 542c which is recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 542d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 542c at the front surface. , The input lens portion 542e bulging backward in the form of a curved surface at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusive reflection portion 542c), and as it moves away from the input lens portion 542e generally on the outside of the input lens portion 542e on the rear surface And a front reflector 542 f inclined to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 542 d of the square lens portion 542 b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffusion reflection portion 542 c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 542d, the groove portion is arched backward in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the ridge portion between the grooves is forward It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 542 d is formed such that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflection portion 542f of the rectangular lens portion 542b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centering on the input lens portion 542e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 542 f is formed in a sawtooth shape in which a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed in a triangular shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is pointed rearwardly. The front reflection portion 542 f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center is increased. Further, the front reflection portion 542 f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The circumferentially dividing radially extending lines coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 542d.

  In the square lens portion 542b, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 542e.

  In the square lens portion 542 b, light irradiated forward from the LEDs 161 a and 162 a is input from the input lens portion 542 e into the square lens portion 542 b. Since the input lens portion 542 e bulges backward in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161 a and 162 a is refracted so as to advance in parallel in the forward direction. Substantially all can be directed to the conical central diffuse reflector 542c. The light guided to the central diffusive reflector 542c is perpendicular to the axis extending back and forth (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffusive reflector 542c. In the square lens portion 542b and travel along the front surface from the center side to the outside. The light reflected by the central diffusive reflector 542c travels from the center side to the outside (in a direction away from the center line of the central diffusive reflector 542c) over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 542b.

  When light reflected inside the rectangular lens portion 542b from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection portion 542f, the front reflection portion 542f faces the front Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflection portion 542 f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it gets away from the central diffuse reflection portion 542 c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 542 b becomes thinner as it goes away from the center (See Figure 96). As a result, in the central diffusive reflection part 542c, light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens part 542b is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection part 542f as it goes from the center side to the outside. It can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 542 f is irradiated forward from the square lens portion 542 b through the front diffusion lens portion 542 d. At this time, since the front surface diffusing lens portion 542 d is formed to have a wave-like cross section, it can diffuse light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 542 f in various directions, and the prismatic lens portion 542 b Light can be emitted to the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

  The prismatic lens portion 542 b is divided into a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending grooves in the front diffusion lens portion 542 d and the front reflection portion 542 f, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves bordering the dividing line. Are arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light irradiated forward from the front of the square lens portion 542b has concentric stripes of light and shade. Light can be avoided, and more uniform light can be emitted forward. Thereby, the multi-faced decorative part in front of the square lens part 542 b in the left unit decorative lens member can be lighted and decorated substantially uniformly.

  The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 542 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 and the front of the square lens portion 542 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 And a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is depressed and which extends short in the front and back direction. In the multifaceted decorative part, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front of a rectangular solid extending in the vertical direction, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular solid. It is formed in the same shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-sided decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561 a and the multi-sided decorative portion 561 b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player's side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 546. In the left unit decorative lens member, the multi-faced decorative portion is moved forward from the square lens portion 542 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 542 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542. Each of the lights is decorated by light emitted.

  The left unit upper decoration base 544 is a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and is formed in a square tube shape extending in the front and rear direction. The left unit upper decorative base 544 is inclined such that a portion forming the lower surface in the outer periphery protrudes downward as going from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The left unit upper decoration base 544 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decoration base 545 is formed in a U-shape which is opened upward in a front view. The left unit lower decoration base 545 is inclined from the substantially vertical center at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves upward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 545 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit decorative cover 546 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 540. The left unit decorative cover 546 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 544, Connects the lower end of the upper V-shaped portion and the upper end of the lower V-shaped portion along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 545. And a linear portion.

  The left unit decorative cover 546 has upper and lower ends attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 545, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 546 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decorative member 547 extends vertically short and is attached to the front of the left unit decorative cover 546 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 547 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101 and the like. Fig. 97 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 100 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. FIG. 101 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 101 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 97 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is a box-shaped right unit base 551 mounted on the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 in a front view and a front surface of the right unit base 551. Is mounted on the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 attached to the front of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and extends in the vertical and longitudinal directions A transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and being decorated, a right unit left decoration member A transparent flat right unit left cover mounted on the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is a front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 and a right side and a right unit left diffusion lens from a front view center on a front surface of the right unit base 551 in front view right of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. A transparent flat light unit right diffusion lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions and a right unit side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are decorated and decorated A sheet-shaped right unit right decoration member 557, and a transparent flat plate right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decoration member 557; There is.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and extends vertically and longitudinally with the front and right opened. A box-shaped non-light transmitting right unit left light shielding member 559 and a light shielding attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 And a right unit right light shielding member 560 in the form of a flat plate.

  In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 penetrating back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 mounted on the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 mounted on the front side of 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to penetrate the right unit base 551 up and down, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570 A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay substrate 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a rectangular shape which is elongated in the vertical direction in a front view, extends in a short and short rectangular tube shape, and is formed in a box shape closed near the center in the longitudinal direction. It is done. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending band plate. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction at the front in the left-right direction with a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left from the center in the left-right direction at the front And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for emitting and decorating the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552 b is for emitting and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552 c is for emitting and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

  Both front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided up and down into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B is connected to the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A is a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes: a flat main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction; and a rear wall portion 553b short in a plan view right short in plan view from the rear side of the main body portion 553a; The right unit left decorative member is notched in a rectangular shape from the right end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 553b to the left and formed in plural in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the left side of the main portion 553a in front view An accommodation recess 553d which is recessed so as to be able to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e projecting backward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 553a in a front view And a plurality of side reflectors 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the rectangular shape extending vertically is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side goes upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. In addition, as shown in FIG. 101, the whole of the main body portion 553a moves with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 so that it moves toward the right in front view from the rear end side. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553 b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall 553b.

  The plurality of notch portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a portion thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552 c favorably emit the right unit decoration lens member 561 It can be decorated.

  The bottom of the accommodation recess 553 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decoration member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553 e are projected rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. The input lens portion 553 e is, although not shown in detail, recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion where the vertically extending quadrilateral protrudes backward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. The input lens portions 553 e are respectively located immediately in front of the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 553a.

  A plurality of (six) side surface reflecting portions 553 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side surface reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centering on the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric circular arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion It extends perpendicularly to the plane of the surface 553a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflection portion 553f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e, with the mountain portion between the grooves facing the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with the radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, light emitted forward from the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 enters the main portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553 e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and in the main portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It spreads radially toward the front centering on the

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole moves toward the right in front view as it goes forward, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main portion 553a strikes the flat left surface in the main portion 553a. However, direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main portion 553a, but is reflected to the side surface reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward in a front view by striking the saw-like side reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (right side in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left through the main body portion 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light emitted from the side surface reflection portion 553f to the right side are left at the left surface of the right unit left light blocking member 559 The light reflected to the left and transmitted through the main body portion 553a is irradiated to the left, so that the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a emits light and decorates with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided into a plurality of radially extending grooves, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated to the outside (left) from the left surface of the main body portion 553a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. It is possible to irradiate the left with more uniform light. Thus, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553 d on the left surface of the main body portion 553 a can emit and decorate substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side in the front view of the main body portion 553a (the side on which the accommodation recess 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. The side portion can be decorated by the side reflection portion 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Is applied to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decoration member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions, and a rear wall short in a plan view left from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. A portion 556b and a plurality of notches 556c which are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction A front view of the main body portion 556a, an accommodation concave portion 556d recessed so as to be able to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e projecting backward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a A plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are disposed in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view, with the upper corner of the front end side of the rectangular shape extending up and down being beveled in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side going upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same as that of the main body portion 553a. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the whole of the main body portion 556a moves with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 so as to move to the left in front view from the rear end side. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556 a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 556 b is assembled with the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end thereof extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts on the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 556 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening which is penetrated back and forth by the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 The inner LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c can favorably emit and decorate the right unit decoration lens member 561.

  The bottom surface of the accommodation recess 556 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decoration member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556 e project rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. The input lens portion 556 e is, although not shown in detail, recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in which the vertically extending quadrilateral protrudes backward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. These input lens portions 556 e are respectively located immediately in front of the right LED 552 b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

  A plurality of (six) side reflectors 556 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main portion 556a in each groove, and the surface remote from the input lens portion 556e is the main portion It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e such that a mountain portion between the groove and the groove is directed to the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. In addition, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 enters the main portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e is formed in the main portion 556a. It spreads radially toward the front centering on the

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves to the left in front view as it goes forward, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main portion 556a strikes the flat right surface in the main portion 556a. However, direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side surface reflecting portion 556f on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in front view by striking the saw-like side reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right through the main body portion 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted from the side surface reflection portion 556f to the left side Since the light reflected toward and transmitted through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 mounted on the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by the radially extending plural lines, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form concentric circular arc grooves. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. Can be emitted to the right with more uniform light. As a result, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556 d on the right surface of the main body portion 556 a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in the front view of the main body portion 556a (the side on which the accommodation recess 556d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 556f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decoration member 557 Parts can be decorated by the side reflectors 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Is applied to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations provided to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape as the side unit of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front and right sides are open. The right unit left light shielding member 559 has a flat main body 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction, a rear wall 559b short in a plan view right from the rear side of the main body 559a, and a rear A plurality of notches 559c which are cut in a rectangular shape from the right end side in the front view of the wall 559b to the left and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction and extend from the right surface of the main body 559a to the right And a plurality of flat plate-like reinforcements 559 d extending from the wall 559 b to the front end of the main body 559 a.

  The main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending rectangular is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upwardly directed toward the front It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and its outer shape is formed in substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The rear wall portion 559 b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall portion 559 b extends more to the right than the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 559 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c and 556 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552 c favorably emits the right unit decorative lens member 561. It can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in a pair at a height substantially the same as the width of the left and right, and three pairs of the reinforcing portions 559d are spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending square is notched like a C-chamfer and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines, and is formed in the substantially same shape as the main-body part 559a in the right unit left light-shielding member 559. As shown in FIG. The right unit right light shielding member 560, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. 101, and the main unit 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 The left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed in proximity to each other. Thus, the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated in the left-right direction, and form a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . The light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 through the space formed between the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is the right unit decoration The light is irradiated to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of non-light transmitting members, and are emitted forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 respectively. Left light 552a, right LED 552b, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561, respectively. The light emission decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

  Furthermore, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind the respective divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559 d. The light can be prevented from interfering between the spaces by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 which is located, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decoration lens member 561 can be , Each can be decorated independently luminous. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide into plural (four) areas in the vertical direction and emit and decorate each of them independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed along the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and having a plurality of polyhedrons formed thereon. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is depressed and extends short back and forth. In the multifaceted decorative part 561b, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are vertically arrayed on the front face of a rectangular solid extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons consisting of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular solid part. It is formed in the shape as it was set.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561 a and multi-faced decorative portions 561 b respectively divided into four spaces by three reinforcing portions 559 d of the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the part located forward, in the three parts from the top, the multifaceted decorative part 561b is disposed one by one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative part 561a disposed at the center in the vertical direction. Only the portion 561 b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated to emit light by the inner LED 552 c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 disposed at the rear.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape following the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decoration member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects largely in the form of a plate to the front beyond the door frame left side unit 540, and projects slightly to the front from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the pan unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 independently separates the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on the left and right both sides which are protruded and the right unit decoration lens member 561 provided at the front end. Can be made to emit light.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right with the pachinko machine Can exert an effect like a partition. In this way, it is possible for the player playing a game with the pachinko machine 1 to feel as if playing in the private room, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without disturbing other players around. Can.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 largely protrudes forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, an island facility The pachinko machine 1 can be made visible in the game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Therefore, when the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are lighted and decorated, the present from a distance even if not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1 The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player.

  Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens By making the members 561 and the like emit light and decorate in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the attendant of the game hall, and to be able to respond quickly to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can feel frustration and suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105 and the like. Fig. 102 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame top unit as viewed from the back It is a perspective view. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 102 taken along the line R-R. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the central base 571 at the center of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, which is attached to the center of the through hole 111 above the through hole 111 A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached respectively to the fronts of the pair of side bases 572 A pair of openings 574a penetrating in the front and back at a front position of a pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape having an open rear, and from a position closer to the center in the lateral direction than the pair of openings 574a A plurality of (three on the left and three on the left and three on the left and right sides) which extend in the longitudinal direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction and are separated vertically. A unit body 574 having a pair 574b and attached to the front of the center base 571 and the pair of side bases 572 and a pair of upper speakers 573 are disposed on the front side and close the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal mounted on the rear side of the unit body 574.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 at the center in the lateral direction of the unit main body 574 and is attached to the top middle decorative member 576 having translucency and the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 A door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front of the unit main body 574 and both left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three each in the left and right directions) extending from near the opening 574a to near the left and right ends of the unit body 574 and the top middle decoration member 576 in the front of the unit body 574 Top left decorative lens member 579 attached to the left and right sides respectively and covering the front surface of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578 The top right decorative lens member 580 and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front of the unit body 574 from the front side and the opening 574a from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 The top middle left decoration member 581 and the top middle right decoration member 582 extend to near the center side end portion of

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inner side of the left and right sides of the unit body 574, and the LEDs are mounted on the plurality of (three) light guide members 578 at locations facing the lateral outer end. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the unit main body 574 in the left and right direction A door with a pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective portions and a front face of the pair of substrate bases 585 with a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 574 Frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587, and door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 attached to the front surface of the center base 571 in the unit main body 574 The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 574 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 574, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 574 And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction in a front view. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of asperities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are respectively attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front of each side base 572 respectively. When assembled in the door frame top unit 570, the pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely such that the front sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 move rearward in the side near the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-shaped speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 574 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front, such that the lower part in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the square extending in the left and right direction bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed in a front view such that it has a rectangular shape extending left and right, which is cut away in a trapezoidal shape that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 574 has a square shape extending in the left and right direction, and a half of the entire width (length in the left-right direction) around the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrilateral It is formed in the shape which combined the trapezoid which protruded forward, and the quadrangle which protruded short for the front by making the front end side of the trapezoid into a long side. Therefore, in the unit body 574, a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit body 574 with the left and right ends of the front end of the portion projecting forward on both sides of the portion projecting forward in the left and right direction center in the front surface It is located more backward (is recessed).

  In the unit main body 574, openings 574a penetrating in the front and back direction are respectively formed in a portion from the left and right direction both ends in the front surface to a position outside the portion projecting forward. The unit body 574 is a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a diagonally extending portion of the front side projecting in a trapezoidal shape in the front. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574 b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit body 574 obliquely forward to the vicinity of the opening 574 a. In addition, the plurality of slits 574 b are formed on the both sides at the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 574 so as to be separated vertically three by three respectively.

  Further, the unit body 574 has an upper opening 574c which is notched toward the front from the rear end in the lateral center on the upper surface and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end in the horizontal And. The upper opening 574 c of the unit body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574 d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit body 574 also includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decoration 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 574 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that protrudes forward in the lateral center. The top middle decoration member 576 extends outward in the left and right direction from the upper end of the left and right sides of the metapentagon in which the shape of the front view is bent so that the left and right direction central portion of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward. It is formed in the shape which combined the substantially right-angled triangle which connected the front-end | tip of the edge and the lower end of the right and left of a side pentagon. The top middle decoration member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole, and has translucency.

  In the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, after the top middle decoration member 576, the front surface is inclined to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the irregular pentagonal portion of the top middle decoration member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making the LEDs emit light, it is possible to make the top middle decoration member 576 emit light and decorate.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of both the left and right sides of the front end of the front projecting portion of the front surface of the unit body 574. When the side close to both ends in the lateral direction of the unit body 574 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center is described as the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight from the end side toward the center side. A straight portion 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in the form of a large radius arc so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a to the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction of the arc portion 578b is formed to be smaller toward the center. In the light guide member 578 assembled in the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately in front of the opening 574a of the unit body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 574 from the front. There is.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c having saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and a diffusion input portion 578d having a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. Is equipped.

  In the light guide member 578 assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the end portions on both outer sides in the left-right direction face the LED frame 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the LEDs 586a and 587a of the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident from the end portions in the left and right direction on the light guide member 578, the light is a straight portion 578a The light travels from the end to the front side sequentially by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. The top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and the portion in front of the straight portion 578a of these members is illuminated and decorated.

  In the light guide member 578, light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top or the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is incident from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thus, the portion located in front of the circular arc portion 578 b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top right decoration substrate 584 and the door frame top middle decoration substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to emit and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in the front in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the left side of the center of the front surface of the unit body 574 in the lateral direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a each accommodating the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each of the decorative lens portions 579a, the concavities and convexities of the quadrangular pyramid projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decoration portion 574 e of the unit body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the front of the unit body 574 in the lateral direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a each accommodating three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each of the decorative lens portions 580a, the concavities and convexities of the quadrangular pyramid projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574f of the unit body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the LEDs 584 a and 587 a of the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top via the three light guiding members 578.

  The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 574 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a in the front of the unit body 574 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left It projects further forward than the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decoration member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the front of the unit body 574 from the front of the top right decoration lens member 580 between the right opening 574a in the front of the unit body 574 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle right decoration member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decoration lens portions 580a of the top right decoration lens member 580 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is the top right It projects further forward than the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decoration member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of the three light guide members 578 mounted on the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit main body 574 (see FIG. 105) ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 574 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578 by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 It can be decorated to emit light.

  The door frame top right decoration substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decoration portion 574f) in the unit body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 mounted on the front on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 in the lateral direction (see FIG. 105) ). The three LEDs 584a can emit light independently of one another. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit body 574 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578 by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 It can be decorated to emit light.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574 in which the plurality of slits 574 b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed so as to be substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 has a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending up and down and back and forth, a rear wall of a front view rectangular shape extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall The upper wall of a substantially right triangle with the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse and the lower side of the side wall with the lower wall The lower wall of the right triangle is formed in the shape of a triangular prism box in which the upper and lower oblique sides are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 574 such that the portion that is open is closed by the unit body 574. In the substrate base 585, the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached such that the opened portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close the box-like open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center in the unit body 574 Be The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 with respect to the laterally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. Thus, in the state where the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b on the left side from the center of the unit body 574 in the left and right direction are formed. Approximately parallel to the

  A plurality of LEDs 586 a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 574 on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586. Thereby, in the state where the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side from the center of the unit body 574. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 causes the plurality of LEDs 586 a to emit light, thereby allowing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 to emit light and decorate via the arc portion 578 b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close the box-like open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached on the rear side on the right of the right and left center in the unit body 574 Be The right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 in the door frame top, so that the front surface moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 574 with respect to the horizontally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. Thereby, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b right of the center of the unit body 574 in the left and right direction are formed. Approximately parallel to the

  A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574 of the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Thereby, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side from the center of the unit body 574. The door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 causes the plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light, and thereby causes a portion near the middle middle decoration member 576 of the top right decoration lens member 580 to emit light and decorate via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 is attached to the front rear side of the unit body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle decoration member 587 and the unit body 574. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially in left-right symmetry with each other by an opaque member. A light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of a plurality of LEDs 586 a and 587 a of a left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top and a plurality of right decorative substrates 587 in the door frame top arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574 b in the unit body 574 I am divided. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guiding member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guiding member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration Luminescent decoration can be performed in a state where the respective decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is attached to the front of the center base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, a door frame top left decoration substrate 583, a door frame top right decoration substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and a door The connection between the frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is connected to the door main body relay substrate via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is covered by a relay substrate cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 turn to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to make the player illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes largely forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 disposed at the center, It is formed to extend from the both sides to the top left decoration portion 574e and the top right decoration portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit body 574. Thereby, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, a front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal at the rear of each of both left and right direction both ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are disposed. The speaker cover 575 is provided so as to face forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a spaced apart above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be made to be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is a door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580 The light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580, and the top left decoration lens member The entire front surface of the lens 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can emit and decorate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Operation effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced according to the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is made smaller. Thereby, the front of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be made as wide as possible visible to the player (forward) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the large game board 5 of the game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through hole 111 (second effect operation unit 400A) And the front half of the lower half (the lower part of the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 (the front of the lower front decoration part 326c) is recessed to turn backward (dish unit The front surface of both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces of both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned backward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends ing. As a result, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the front in the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to be largely protruded forward, so that the rendering operation unit 400 is highlighted and emphasized for the player. It can be made to pay attention to the rendering operation unit 400 strongly.

  In the door frame 3, the rendering operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 is inclined so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Because the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 because it is attached in the state, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player loses his sight and effects operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen almost in front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly viewed, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 can be enhanced. In addition, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image is sufficiently facilitated. Maseru can be.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 has the operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the entire height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, the operation of the operation button 410 requires a short distance of hand movement. It is possible to touch any part of the operation button 410, and "early pressing" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is attached in an inclined state, it can not only be pressed from the top like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but also it can be operated left or right The operation can be performed well even from the front, and the operation using the operation button 410 can be more enjoyable by the operation button 410 having a good operability.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is attached to the effect operation unit 400 by the plate unit 320 in a suspended state, and is provided with the vibration motor 424 for generating vibration in the lower part of the effect operation unit 400. According to the state, when the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibration, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper portion of the operation button 410, and the player is surprised by the operation button The presentation using the 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) across the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the front center of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 below is not noticeable, it can be made easy to make the player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine clearly recognize that it is clearly different, and the player's attention is strongly attracted It can be a high power pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 forms the lower plate 322 so as to wrap around the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening portion 326 d opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 in the front surface of the plate unit 320 Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased relative to the size of the lower plate opening portion 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear of the lower plate 322 turns to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts the left hand in the lower plate 322 or places the left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel discomfort, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the game and to reduce the size of the lower plate opening 326d. It can also be recognized that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than the height by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the gaming balls of the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray 322 from the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322 into the lower portion of the tray unit 320 or the like. The countersink holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front and rear direction, and are arranged on the right outside (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) of the lower plate opening 326d in front view. That is, the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball extraction hole 322a, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening portion 326d) in the effect operation unit 400 and the plate unit cover 326, the front end of the lower plate cover 340 Since the player is disposed behind the side, etc., the player can not see the lower ball supply port 323c and the lower ball removal hole 322a, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, since the lower countersink hole 322a is disposed below (in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower tray 322, the lower frame ball opening 322a is opened. Then, the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like when they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball removal hole 322a can not be seen from the player side, the flow of gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box is also I can not see it. In this way, it is possible to give the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the payout device 830 in a state that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the upper plate 321 are full for the player are directly discharged to the dollar box. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the troublesomeness of passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation to hit the game ball and the effect image) and to suppress the decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, the door frame 3 has the lower flat ball opening hole 322a at the front left position of the lower flat ball supply opening 323c, and the lower plate 322 stands upright on the right side of the lower flat ball opening 322a. Since the upper wall portion is bent obliquely so as to face the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is directly moved to the lower ball ball. The light can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be reflected to the right side wall and indirectly guided to the lower circular ball hole 322a. Thus, in the state where the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is open, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is a region on the lower plate 322 on the left side of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a. (The lower plate first area A1) can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower plate 322 without showing the gaming balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be exhibited.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes the lower plate opening portion 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward, between the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be output forward well, and the sound by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player places a hand on the lower plate 322 or moves close to it, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the speaker 921 which is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. Can entertain people and control the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and protrudes forward largely from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an operation effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing a game with this pachinko machine 1 can play a game in a private room It is possible to give an illusion of a feeling of being present, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation to other players around.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 can emit light and decorate the front end and both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 lined up Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can be informed of the presence of the pachinko machine even from a distance from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal for the player. It can be machine 1.

  In the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 A shape recessed so as to be turned backwards (A top middle decoration member in the door frame top unit 570 than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 The front surfaces of the left and right sides of the 576 are formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be positioned rearward. As a result, only the decorative member 576 at the top of the door frame top unit 570 appears to be projected forward largely, so that the decorative member 576 can be made to be highlighted and highlighted to the player, The inner decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by the speaker cover 575 made of punching metal at the left and right ends. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right direction ends are provided with the speaker 573, The entire front face of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. As a result, since the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper portion of the door frame 3, and a decoration distinctly different from conventional pachinko machines is provided It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is present, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player, and to entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. Because each of the left and right direction is largely projected forward, it is possible to show the player a decoration having a sense of unity in the upper and lower sides where the virtual line passing through the left and right direction center is noticeable, and by the refined decoration. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 causes the top middle decorative member 576 and the rendering operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction to project forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the light emitting decoration of the effect operation unit 400 is performed, the light emission line extending vertically at the center in the left and right direction of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be shown to the player, and the line of sight of the player is arranged at the center in the left and right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106 to FIG. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is removably accommodated therein. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall so as to be openable and closable at the upper and lower ends of the front left side and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. It is attached openably and closably.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-like main body frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main body frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame The lower side hinge member 150 comprises a body frame upper hinge member 620 and a body frame lower hinge member 640 rotatably mounted, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. .

  In addition, the main unit frame 4 is attached to the lower front of the main unit frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; And a locking unit 700 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of the main body frame base 600 A reverse L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out gaming balls to the cage player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And a back cover 980 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 106 to 109, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view. The body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth in a range of about 3/4 of the height from a position slightly lower than the upper end, and the game board insertion slot 601 in which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side The lower side of the board insertion slot 601 is formed, and the game board placement unit 602 on which the game board 5 is placed and the upper side of the game board placement unit 602 project upward from the left and right direction And a game board control unit 603 for restricting the backward movement.

  In addition, the main unit frame base 600 is a launch device attachment portion 604 for attaching the ball launch device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board placement portion 602 in front view, and a front view right side of the launch device attachment portion 604 The cylinder insertion port 605 which penetrates back and forth and into which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth from the left and right center from the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 A circular opening which penetrates the front and rear of the game board mounting portion 602 in the front opening left side of the game board mounting portion 602 and which has the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 facing forward. And a speaker opening 607.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side in a front view of the game board slot 601, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is pivotable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided for attachment. The body frame base 600 of the body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions of the left end in front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge attachment for attaching the body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640 A portion 609 and a lower hinge attachment portion 610 are provided.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 is rotatably attached at a position slightly lower on the left side than the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in an opening cover 615 closing the opening for connection 606 openably and closably. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member and body frame lower hinge member]
The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106 to FIG. The body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 and the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the body frame base 600.

  An upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape projecting upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621 A body frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an upper hinge main body 621 in front view left side of the body frame hinge pin 622 penetrate the door frame side upper hinge member 140 And an upper hinge hole 623 for a door frame. A portion of the upper hinge main body 621 that is bent downward is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main frame base 600.

  The lower hinge member 640 on the body frame side vertically penetrates at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the plate material extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And an outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed on the upper side of the lower hinge first main body 641 The lower hinge second main body 643 in which the rear portion of the plate material is bent upward in an L shape, and the upper end of the lower hinge second main body 643 vertically penetrate and the door frame lower lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 The door frame 3 extends upward from the left end on the rear side of the door frame hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame and the door frame hinge hole 644 at the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a restriction piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the .

  The lower hinge second body 643 has a horizontally extending portion spaced upward from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 641 and a portion bent upward is a first lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of a portion of the main body 641 that is bent upward. The main frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main frame base 600 by bending the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 upward.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The cross section of the reinforcing frame 660 in plan view is formed in a U shape whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts movement of the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 to the front and up and down to the rear side of the part extending rightward from the front end. The left positioning member 661 is mounted in a pair at vertically spaced positions.

  The hinge side (left side in front view) of the main frame base 600 can be reinforced by the reinforcing frame 660, and the inside of the main frame 4 (game board 5) from the left passing between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 It is possible to prevent incorrect insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106, 108 and 109. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main unit frame 4. In this ball launcher 680, the hitting strength of the gaming ball changes in accordance with the pivot angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 in the front lower right corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 681 in a front view. A firing solenoid 682 formed of a rotary solenoid extending forward and penetrating, a hitting ball 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682 and a tip end extending diagonally upward from the tip of the hitting ball 683 And a launch rail 684 mounted on the front of the launch base 681 so that the game balls can roll.

  In this ball launcher 680, gaming balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the gaming balls are supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684 Then, when the handle 302 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hit ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hitting ball 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and driven into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the impact strength of the game ball, etc., between the firing rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Then, it falls to the ball receptacle 275 of the lower far cover unit 270 and is discharged into the lower tray 322 through the inside of the far cover unit 270.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lockable units with the door frame 3 that project forward from the unit base 701. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of locking with the outer frame 2, and projecting cylindrically forward from a lower portion of the unit base 701, A protrusion protrudes from the front end in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and by engaging with the rotation transmission member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted, and the door is rotated according to the rotation direction of the key. And a key cylinder 710 for unlocking the locking of either the frame wedge 702 or the outer frame wedge 703.

[4-6. Disbursement unit]
The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 128. FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 114 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 119 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 119 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS in FIG. FIG. 120 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball drawing passage is closed by the ball drawing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 120 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball drawing passage is opened by the ball drawing movable piece. It is.

  FIG. 121 (a) is a front perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 121 (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit. FIG. 122 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear is there. Further, FIG. 123 (a) is a front perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 123 (b) is a rear perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank passage unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank passage unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 126 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 127 is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a door cover full cover unit and a lower full ball unit. FIG. 128 is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls in the payout unit.

  The dispensing unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper portion of the dispensing unit base 801 as shown in FIGS. Ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending upward and downward and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 A tank rail 803 extends to the left and right for guiding the gaming ball in the ball tank 802 in a left direction in a front view. Within the tank rail 803, the game balls are aligned in the front and rear two rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 128) swingably suspended from above while guiding the game balls to the left.

  In addition, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the top left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guides the gaming balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; A payout device 830 which dispenses the gaming balls removably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball induction unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 951 accommodated in the payout control substrate box 950. And have. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, gaming balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the gaming balls are paid out one by one.

  Furthermore, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the gaming balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and according to the storage state of the gaming balls on the upper tray 321 in the tray unit 320 The upper full ball passage unit 850 for releasing the water from either the normal discharge hole 850 d or the full discharge hole 850 e, and the normal discharge hole 850 d of the upper full ball passage unit 850 attached to the lower end of the discharge unit base 801 The guide ball 861 guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. The game ball released from the full tank outlet 850e is guided forward from the front end of the door frame 3. The main frame of the full opening guide channel 862 leading to the full tank receiving hole 274, and the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861 and the full guidance channel 862 And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. The ball guiding unit 820 extends vertically and has a box-like front case 821 open at the rear side, a box-like rear case 822 attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and the front side open, and the front case A flat plate-like partition plate 823 attached between the 821 and the rear case 822 and separating the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and the front and rear ends through the partition plate 823 to the front case 821 and the rear case 822 A pair of movable piece fronts 825 and movable piece members that are rotatably attached by the rod-like shaft member 824 attached and the shaft member 824 and disposed in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 respectively 826, and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational position of the pair of movable piece front 825 and movable piece rear 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding inlet 821a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. 821 b, and a guiding passage 821 c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821 a with the ball guiding outlet 821 b and through which the game balls can flow. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d obliquely extending at a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the ball induction inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end, and the center of height along the left side of the front case 821 The detection unit 821e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 821e to the left and right of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side in a front view of the detection portion 821e in the guiding passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding inlet 822a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage, and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. A guide passage 822c is provided, which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a with the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which the game balls can flow. The guiding passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d obliquely extending at a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the ball induction inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end, and the center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d The detection unit 822e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822e to the left and right width of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection portion 822e in the guiding passage 822c in a front view.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrical to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. The guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front and rear direction when assembled in the ball guide unit 820. There is.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the induction passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 is a flat movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b which penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a into which the shaft member 824 is inserted An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle with respect to the right surface of the movable piece 825a; an extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a; and fanning around the shaft hole 825b A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and which penetrates back and forth, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f extending outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and detectable by the broken ball detection sensor 827 and extending outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece front 825 rotates so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 825b by its own weight. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted through the notch 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 821c. In addition, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction (right direction in front view) approaching the wall of the guiding passage 821c, the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guiding passage 821c. I agree with the inside. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is not detected with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when the gaming ball is in the guiding passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member back 826 is a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically and a shaft hole 826b which is penetrated back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a Extending from the upper end of the movable piece 826a to the right surface of the movable piece 826a at right angles with the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a, and fan-shapedly extending around the shaft hole 826b A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and which penetrates back and forth A detection piece 826f which extends outward in a flat plate shape from the right end and can be detected by the broken ball detection sensor 827, and extends outward in a flat plate shape from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attachment portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is pivoted so as to be positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b by its own weight. The movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Accordingly, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822 and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the induction | guidance | derivation passage 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 822c. In addition, when the movable piece member 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction (right direction in front view) approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the guide passage 822c. I agree with the inside. In this state, the detection piece 826f after the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the induction passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  In the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, a plurality of gaming balls are supplied in a row in the back and forth direction by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are provided in a state in which the plurality of gaming balls are aligned. The lower dispensing device 830 can be guided back and forth in two rows by 822 (see FIG. 128). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the gaming balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c, 822c do not interfere with each other, and are well distributed. Can.

  In addition, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball abuts on the movable piece 825a and 826a of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826, and the movable piece 825a and 826a The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 rotate in a direction coincident with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821 c and 822 c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that gaming balls are present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820 pays out the game balls, the game balls in the guide paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game ball flows in the guide passage 821c, 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing in the introduction portion 821d, 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing in the introduction portion 821d, 822d is the movable piece at the upper portion of the detection portion 821e, 822e It will rebound to the 825a, 826a side, and will abut on the movable piece 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, they are pinched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide paths 821c and 822c by the vibration. Dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight and the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the guiding passages 821c and 822c by means of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 respectively, and the movable piece front 825 and Since each detection piece 825f, 826f of the movable piece member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game ball in any of the guide paths 821c, 822c disappears, the movable piece member front is removed. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the back 825 or movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guiding passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball is lost are detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 Ru. Therefore, the game balls can be detected early, so that the game balls can be quickly replenished, and by reducing the time for interrupting the game as much as possible, the player's interest can be reduced. It can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the weight of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 and the weight can be obtained by screwing in and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826. As a result, the lower end sides of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily turned in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, the upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the induction passage 821c, 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the induction passage 821c, 822c, so dust in the induction passage 821c, 822c No dust or the like adheres to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Thus, the rotation of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, the movable piece 825a, 826a at the lower end side of the movable piece 825a, 826a after the movable piece 825 and 826 after the lower end side protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, 822c By attaching weights made of metal screws to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface in contact with the game ball, the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 by their own weight and weight of the weight The lower end sides of 825a and 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, the upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the induction passage 821c, 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the induction passage 821c, 822c, so dust in the induction passage 821c, 822c No dust or the like adheres to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Accordingly, the movable pieces 825a and 826a (the movable piece members 825 and 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  In addition, in order to screw and attach a metal screw as a weight to weight attachment portions 825e and 826e as through holes, the weight is fixed even if the front of movable piece 825 and the rear of movable piece 826 rotate frequently. The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 (weight attachment parts 825 e, 826 e) . In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825 e and 826 e, the process of attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game balls toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a project inward in the guide passages 821c and 822c. Since the gaming ball flows in the guiding passage 821c, 822c, the gaming ball contacts the movable piece 825a, 826a, so that the movable piece 825a, 826a can be vibrated by the abutment of the gaming ball. Therefore, dust, dirt and the like which are pinched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the walls of the induction passages 821c, 822c can be removed by the vibration of the movable pieces 825a, 826a, and movable by their own weight etc. The front member 825 and the rear movable member 826 can be rotated well.

  Therefore, since the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 can be favorably rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the gaming ball in the guiding path 821c, 822c can be detected reliably, and It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect due to a false detection or the like. In addition, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the inside of the guide passage 821c, 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passage 821c, 822c can be reliably detected through the movable pieces 825a, 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the game ball, and by reducing the time for interrupting the game as much as possible, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

[4-6 b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 830 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 120. The payout device 830 has a box shape whose rear side is open, and the payout opening 831a where the gaming ball is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and the gaming ball is open near the left end in front view Payout outlet 831b, ball outlet outlet 831c where gaming balls are open for passage near the right end of the front view in the bottom surface, payout opening 831a and payout outlet 831b are communicated and the payout passage 831d through which gaming balls can flow , And a dispensing passage 831 d branched from the middle and communicated with the ball outlet 831 c and has a ball out passage 831 e through which gaming balls can flow, and is attached to the back side of the front box 831 The game ball is open near the left end of the top view in the bottom view in the bottom of the payout opening 832a where the game ball is open so that the game ball can pass in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. A payout opening 832b which is overly open, a ball outlet 832c which allows gaming balls to pass in the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the bottom, a payout opening 832a and a payout outlet 832b are communicated, and the gaming balls are distributed It has a possible payout passage 832d and a rear box 832 branched from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicating with the ball removal outlet 832c and having a ball removal passage 832e through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is mounted on the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 open on the rear side, and is mounted in the front box 831 and the rotation shaft passes through the front box 831 The delivery motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the delivery motor 834, and the drive gear 835 are meshed and can be rotated by the front box 831 and the front cover 833 The intermediate gear 836 in the form of a spur gear attached to the gear, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and a driven gear 837 rotatably penetrated, the front end being attached to the front cover 833 and the rear The shaft member 838, the end of which passes through the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and is rotatably attached through the shaft member 838, and the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are dispelled. A blade rotation detection sensor 840 disposed in the passages 831 d and 832 d and disposed between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detecting a rotation of the discharge blade 839. And have.

  Furthermore, the dispensing device 830 is a flat-plate-like partition plate 841 attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 to separate the dispensing passage 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832 d of the rear box 832; And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a gaming ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b by the rotation of the payout blade 839, the payout passage 831d and 832d, and the ball release passage 831e, 832e is a portion where it is bifurcated and is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and it is possible to close the ball removal passage 831e, 832e, the ball extraction movable piece 843, the front box 831 and the rear And a ball pulling lever 844 slidably mounted up and down on the upper right side surface of the box 832 so as to make the ball pulling movable piece 843 pivotable or non-rotatable It is equipped with a.

  The dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 obliquely extends from the dispensing inlet 831a toward the ball removing outlet 831c to the lower right of the front view, and descends at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the entire height of the front box 831 To extend vertically to the left, and bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the front box 831 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 831b so as to be positioned just above the discharge outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the front box 831. A delivery blade 839 is disposed at a cranked portion in the delivery passage 831d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831 e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge inlet 831 a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831 d, and has a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the entire height of the front box 831. It branches between the heights near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface of the front view right side with a guide shelf 831 f projecting backward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the discharge outlet 831 b in the discharge passage 831 d. And a lever attaching portion 831g for slidably attaching the ball removing lever 844 up and down.

  The discharge passage 832d of the rear box 832 obliquely extends from the discharge port 832a toward the ball removal outlet 832c to the lower right in front view, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the entire height of the rear box 832 And bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the rear box 832 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the discharge outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the rear box 832. The delivery blade 839 is disposed at a cranked portion in the delivery passage 832d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 832e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge port 832a to the lower right in the discharge passage 832d, and is about 1/3 height from the upper surface to the entire height of the rear box 832 It branches between the heights near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface in a front view and a guiding shelf 832f projecting forward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the dispensing outlet 832b in the dispensing passage 832d. And a lever mounting portion 832g for slidably mounting the ball release lever 844 in the vertical direction.

  The delivery passages 831 d and 832 d and the ball removal passages 831 e and 832 e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The dispensing passages 831 d and 832 d are partitioned by the partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the dispensing blade 839 is disposed. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide racks 831 f and 832 f and the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b. That is, the gaming balls distributed in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the gaming balls distributed in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 are front and rear of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a in the circumferential direction at an angle of 60 degrees from the rear surface of the spur gear shape that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840 A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connection portion 837c which protrudes cylindrically from the center of the gear portion 837a and has projections and depressions formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end and which can be connected to the discharge blade 839 .

  The delivery blade 839 extends in a cylindrical shape from the front to the back, and projects in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals from the front end of the base cylinder 839a into which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the front end of the base cylinder 839a. (A plurality of (three) front blades 839b, and a plurality of (three) projecting from the rear end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the base cylindrical portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to alternate with the front blades 839b The third part of the rear blade 839c, and a connected part projecting cylindrically forward from the front end of the base cylindrical part 839a and having projections and depressions that can be connected to the connecting part 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end And 839 d.

  The front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the discharge blade 839 are respectively provided three by three at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c is circumferentially opposed to the front blade 839b so as to be staggered. It is extended outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, three front blades 839 b (rear blades 839 c) are connected by a circular arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, between the front wings 839b (rear wings 839c), a ball accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumference of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c with respect to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In addition, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a in the portion (ball housing portion 839e) of the arc between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. 0 of the outer diameter of the gaming ball. It is supposed to be four times.

  Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the gaming ball may be held by the portion (ball housing portion 839e) of the arc between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the gaming ball can be accommodated. As a result, the gaming balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be quickly stored in the space (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

  In the delivery blade 839 of this embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the delivery passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the delivery passage 832d of the rear box 832 in the assembled state of the delivery device 830. The game balls in the payout paths 831 d and 832 d can be paid out respectively. Further, the delivery blade 839 is disposed at a location where the delivery passage 831d, 832d is bent in a crank shape below the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the dispensing blade 839 is located immediately below the portion vertically extending downward from near the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the crank-shaped portion of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) far from the dispensing blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the dispensing blade 839 and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the portion formed in the arc shape of the payout paths 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. .

  Thus, the payout device 830 passes the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831 d and 832 d when the gaming balls having flowed down onto the payout blades 839 abut the outer periphery of the front blade 839 b and the rear blade 839 c. And can not be discharged downward from the delivery outlets 831 b and 832 b. On the other hand, when the gaming ball is housed in the ball housing portion 839e, it moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the cranked portion of the payout passage 831d, 832d, and from the payout outlet 831b, 832b It is discharged downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front wing 839b and the rear wing 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball is 1 by the ball accommodating portion 839e. Since the depth of 1⁄7 to 1⁄4 is accommodated, it is possible to shorten the time taken to accommodate the gaming balls while reducing the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout wing 839 is rotated fast, the gaming ball can be housed in the ball housing portion 839e and sent to the payout outlet 831b, 832b side. Therefore, the number of game balls paid out per unit time can be increased more than in the past, and the time taken to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the top and bottom and front and back, and the lower portion is bent to extend in a tubular shape in the front and back at the upper end of the main portion 843a formed in a V shape. A cylindrical portion 843b rotatably attached at its both ends to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a projecting portion 843c projecting from an upper portion of the V-shaped outer surface of the main portion 843a, and a main portion 843a A weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 120) including a through hole penetrating in the front and back direction in a lower part bent in a V-shape;

  In the assembled state of the dispensing device 830, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left in front view, and the upper cylindrical portion 843b dispenses the front box 831 and the rear box 832 In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position obliquely extending from the delivery port 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view slightly above the portion bent downward Is attached to

  In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 according to the present embodiment slides the ball release lever 844 downward, and the lower portion of the ball release lever 844 is in contact with the protrusion 843 c of the ball release movable piece 843 from the right I am in touch. Thereby, the pivoting movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 120A).

  In this normal state, in the main portion 843a of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 bent in the V-shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is a front left lower left It extends to The lower end of the main body 843a is located in the vicinity of a portion where the dispensing passages 831d and 832d and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, while the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (the main body portion 843a), the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left forms a part of the walls of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The unrolling movable piece 843 of this embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the unpunching movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the axial cylinder portion 843b in a normal state. Thus, a force is exerted to try to rotate counterclockwise in a front view, but since the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball release lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball extracting lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball extracting lever 844 is separated from the projecting portion 843 c of the ball extracting movable member 843 and the counterclockwise movement of the ball extracting movable member 843 is counterclockwise. Motion restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is positioned immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843 b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 (See FIG. 120 (b)). As a result, the ball releasing passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the gaming balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a contact the main body 843a of the ball releasing movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e and discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In this embodiment, since the ball removing movable piece 843 is provided with a weight attaching portion 843d, the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward by screwing in and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portion 843d. And when the restriction of the pivoting in the counterclockwise direction in the front view is released, the lower end of the deballing movable piece 843 is projected into the deballing passage 831e, 832e by the weight of the deballing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be made easy to turn in the direction (counterclockwise in front view).

  Further, in a normal state in which the ball extracting lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball extracting passages 831e and 832e, the gaming ball entering from the payout opening 831a and 832a is attached to the main body 843a of the ball releasing movable piece 843 Since the contact is made, it is possible to vibrate the ball removing movable piece 843 by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust, dirt, etc. which are pinched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surface of the ball removing passage 831e, 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate by biting in dust or the like.

  In addition, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attachment portion 843d formed as the through hole, the weight can be removed from the movable member 843 even if the movable member 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without being detached from the (weight attachment portion 843d). In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 Cost can be reduced.

  By the way, when the ball removing passage 843e closes the ball removing passages 831e and 832e for a long period of time, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable member 843 and the rotating shaft is rusted. The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game balls entered from the payout opening 831a and 832a are in contact with the main body 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843, the ball removing movable piece 843 is used to remove the ball removing passage 831e. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the lock is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, thereby causing an impact of the contact. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831 e and 832 e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball releasing lever 844 is operated to open the ball releasing passages 831 e and 832 e, the ball releasing movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball removing operation can be surely performed. Workability at the time of maintenance can be improved.

[4-6 c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the lower side of the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-like upper full tank base 851 open at the rear side, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and the front side is open. A box-like upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing apparatus pressing member 853 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing apparatus 830 upward are provided.

  Also, the upper full-ball-path unit 850 has an upper outlet ball socket 850a which is open upwards so that gaming balls can pass upward in a region from the left-right center to the left in front view on the upper surface, and Is formed between the upper ball-out opening 850b which is open upward to allow the game ball to pass through at the part of the upper part, the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852 and received by the upper dispensing ball receptacle 850a An upper ball storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which gaming balls circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a lower portion of the upper ball discharge passage 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage At the lower end of the passage 850c, a full tank outlet 850e opened downward at a site excluding the normal outlet 850d, a normal outlet 850d and a full tank outlet 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  Also, the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 is an upper upper ball-opening passage 850g for guiding the gaming ball entering from the upper ball-opening inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion opened downward at the lower end of the upper ball-opening passage 850g. And a ball outlet 850h. In the upper full tank passage unit 850, the normal outlet 850d, the full tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are sequentially opened downward from the left side in front view. In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  The upper full ball passage unit 850 is assembled in the discharge unit 800, and the upper discharge ball socket 850a is located directly below the discharge outlets 831b and 832b of the discharge device 830, and the upper ball removal inlet 850b. Are located directly below the ball removal outlets 831 c and 832 c of the dispensing device 830. Also, when the upper full-tank passage unit 850 is assembled to the delivery unit 800, the normal outlet 850d, the full-tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are normally guided paths of the lower full-tank passage unit 860. Openings 861, a full tank guide passage 862, and a lower ball removal guide passage 865 are respectively directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 128).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the gaming balls dispensed by the dispensing device 830 and discharged downward from the dispensing outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper dispensed ball receptacle 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the gaming ball that has entered into the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper discharge ball socket 850a opens immediately below the upper discharge ball socket 850a. The normal outlet 850d is released.

  When the inside of the upper tray 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls can not be stored, and furthermore, the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with gaming balls The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When the gaming ball enters into the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. When the amount of gaming balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the dividing pieces 850f, the gaming balls that have newly entered the upper ball storage passage 850c overcome the dividing pieces 850f and become full. It is discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and is sent to the lower tray 322 through the filling channel 862 of the lower filling channel unit 860.

  In this manner, the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper tray 321 according to the storage amount of the gaming balls in the upper tray 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 322.

[4-6 d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 123 to 127. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full ball channel unit 850 in the dispensing unit base 801. The lower full-tan ball path unit 860 guides the gaming ball discharged from the normal outlet 850 d of the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 forward to guide it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. And a full induction channel 862 for guiding game balls discharged from the full tank outlet 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the full tank receptacle 274 of the door frame 3 from the front end, A guideway opening / closing door 863 for opening and closing the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 And a closing spring 864 urging the front end opening of the

  In addition, the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 guides the gaming balls discharged from the upper ball outlet 850h of the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 forward and from above the center right end in the front-rear direction on the substrate unit base 910 of the substrate unit 900. A lower ball out guideway 865 is provided for release into.

  In the lower full-tan ball route unit 860, the normal guide path 861, the full-tan guide path 862, and the lower open ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in front view. The rear ends of the normal guide path 861, the full guide path 862, and the lower ball removal guide path 865 open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full guiding path 862 extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower than the width at which the game balls are arranged side by side. Furthermore, the full induction passage 862 usually extends forward at a lower position than the induction passage 861. The normal induction passage 861, the full induction passage 862, and the lower ball out induction passage 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 which can be divided up and down as shown in the drawing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached at a front end of the lower case 867 between the normal guideway 861 and the full induction way 862 and is closed by a closing spring 864 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front. It is energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860, the full induction channel 862, which is open to the right of the front end opening of the normal induction channel 861 in a front view, normally It is placed at a lower position by the height of the ball. And, the guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front and rear direction, generally at a position below the guideway 861 and at the left side of the full induction passage 862.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 has a disk-like base 863a rotatably mounted, and a first door plate 863b which extends in a flat plate shape obliquely from the base 863a to the upper left and can normally close the front end opening of the guideway 861. A second door plate 863c extending flatly to the right from the base 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full induction channel 862; and an extension 863d extending flatly from the base 863a to the lower left side The operation projection 863 e protrudes forward from the front end of the extension 863 d and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the door cover 3 with the door opening / closing contact portion 281.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 does not have to close the openings, as long as the game balls can not pass. The actuating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base 863a in a front view shape, and is inclined so that the front end surface projects forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is biased in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is from the lower side of the front end opening of the full induction path 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By being in contact with the boss portion 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  In the lower full tank passage unit 860 of the present embodiment, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the front end is the ball passing passage 273 in the far cover unit 270 of the door frame 3, the full tank reception 274 and the door opening / closing It is attached to the position which opposes the contact part 281 (refer FIG. 127). And, in the state where the doorway 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, nothing is in contact with the operation projection 863e in the state where the doorway 3 is open to the body frame 4. Thus, the second door plate 863 c is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, and is stopped in a state in which the second door plate 863 c is in contact with the boss 867 a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located at the front of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 and close the front end opening (FIG. 126). See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the gaming balls in the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can not move forward from the front end opening, and even when the door frame 3 is opened, the normal induction passage 861 and full induction There are no spills of gaming balls from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door open / close contact portion 281 of the far cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 abuts on the front end face of the operation projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 The inclination of the front end face of the projection 863 e acts on the urging force of the closing spring 864 to turn the guide path opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view. As a result, the first door plate 863 b and the second door plate 863 c that normally closed the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening. The front end opening of the full tank induction passage 862 is open (see FIG. 126 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate 863 b is located below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate 863 c is located above the front end opening of the full induction passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end opening of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal induction passage 861 and the full The through ball passage 273 and the full ball receiving hole 274 of the far cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide passage 862 and penetrated from the side of the normal guide passage 861 and the full guide passage 862 The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank ball receptacle 274 side.

  In this manner, the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 are made different by vertically varying the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 and rotating the induction passage opening / closing door 863. Since the opening and closing of the induction passage opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, the opening / closing mechanism of the normal passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively enlarged, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more gaming balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper tray 321 of the door frame 3 is full of gaming balls and can not release the gaming balls to the upper tray 321. When the player pays out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 is full of game balls. Then, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guide path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank channel 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of the game ball is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270. Thereafter, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is full of the game ball in addition to the upper plate 321 and the game ball can not be supplied to the lower plate 322, the fall cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are filled with gaming balls when the movable piece 278 is rotated by the storing passage in the storage passage 277 and detected by the full detection sensor 279. Is notified, and the payout of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is cancelled.

  The game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the far cover unit 270, for example, when the payout device 830 stops the payout of the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279. In the upstream storage passage 277, the full tank induction passage 862 of the lower full tank passage unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850 c of the upper full tank passage unit 850. When the game ball of the above is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, since it is possible to store more gaming balls than conventional pachinko machines, in the gaming state in which many gaming balls are paid out, such as during a big hit, the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 It is possible to reduce the need to be concerned about being filled with gaming balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on and play a big hit game.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The board | substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 106 thru | or FIG. The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the main body frame base 600 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass A speaker unit 920 having a 921. A power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and having a power supply substrate housed therein, and attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls. And a delivery control board box 950. .

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board, and the peripheral control board, and the door main body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is a thing. The dispensing device 830 is controlled by the dispensing control substrate 951 accommodated in the dispensing control substrate box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the entire configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 to 135. FIG. 129 is a front view of the gaming board in which the panel board of the gaming panel is in an opaque state. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the gaming board in the state of FIG. 129 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the gaming board in the state of FIG. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 134 is a front view of the front unit of the game board, cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board in which the panel board of the game panel is in a transparent state.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape is substantially square in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. And a plate-like game panel 1100 to be partitioned. A plurality of obstacle nails in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge array (not shown) in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 which is to be in the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and to the rear face of the substrate holder 1200, and the game content is performed by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 212) for controlling the

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player Attached to the front of the game panel 1100, a peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, a main effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The main effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main effect display device 1600.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (here four) general winning openings 2001 constantly open to accept the game balls driven into the gaming area 5a and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 as the gaming area 5a. The first start port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball at different positions in the inside, the gate unit 2003 attached to the predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball, and the game ball By the second starting port 2004 which can receive the game ball according to the normal lottery result which is drawn by passing the gate part 2003, and the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the second start port 2004 A large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball can be received in any of the first special drawing results or the second special drawing results that are drawn, and the gaming balls accepted in the large drawing opening 2005 are distributed A receiving space 2006 of a predetermined size, and a first receiving port 2007 and the second receiving port 2008 for receiving the game ball receiving space 2006 either, a.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start opening unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and one general winning hole 2001. A side unit 2200 attached along the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the starting opening unit 2100 and having two general winning openings 2001, and a starting which becomes the lower right corner in the front view of the game area 5a One general winning opening 2001, gate part 2003, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, receiving space 2006, first receiving port 2007, and second receiving port are attached to the right side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100. The gaming area 5a is higher than the attacking unit 2400 having the 2008 and the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200. Includes the frame-shaped center won game 2500 is attached to the front view substantially central slightly above closer, the.

  The back unit 3000 is a box attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and open at the front, and has a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall, and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 and is main A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600, a panel relay substrate 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the rear surface of the back box 3010 A first effect drive substrate 3032 mounted on the right side of the panel relay substrate 3031 in a rear view, and a second effect drive substrate 3033 mounted on the right side of the first effect drive substrate 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010; Is equipped.

  Also, the back unit 3000 includes a back front decoration unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 and a back top movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the back side of the back front decoration unit 3100 above the opening. The back-to-back movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front of the back wall in the back box 3010 on the back side of the back-up movable effect unit 3200.

  The back-to-back movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back-to-back central movable effect unit 3350 mounted in the back box 3010 and back-to-back both sides of the swivel table 3380 of the back-to-back central movable effect unit 3350 A left movable effect unit 3400 and a back movable right effect unit 3500, a back movable upper effect unit 3600 attached to the upper part of the swing table 3380, and a back lower movable effect attached to the lower portion of the swing table 3380 And a unit 3700.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of the base 1001 and is in contact with the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction in the frame. The gaming ball guided backward by the out guiding unit 1003 is discharged to the back of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and an inner portion of the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, a lower portion of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. In each part, it has a crime prevention recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear projection 202 of the door frame 3 protruding to the rear of the security cover 200 is It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the state between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component member 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning projections that project rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning projections can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by inserting the positioning projections into the inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.

  Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses that project rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned between the panel holder (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is cut away from the lower end in the lower left corner in a front view. The notch 1011 corresponds to the notch 1123 of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the notch 1011 penetrates the notch 1011 and the lower full ball passage unit 860 The front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 face forward.

5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) which can be sufficiently retained even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached It is assumed. In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel board 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back and to attach the front unit 2000.

  Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection (not shown) projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and a substantially square outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a inside the holding step And a through hole 1122 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Moreover, the panel holder 1120 is provided with the notch part 1123 which is notched upward from the lower end in front view lower left corner. This notch portion 1123 coincides with the notch portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the notch portion 1011 is penetrated and a normal induction of the lower full ball passage unit 860 is made. The front end openings of the road 861 and the full induction channel 862 are designed to face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in the assembled state to the game board 5. Thus, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface It is possible to discharge downward from the discharged portion 1201.

5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 133) for controlling game contents and payout of game balls and the like, and a main control board box 1320 which accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is broken next to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310, through the panel relay board 3031, the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second start port sensor 2402, the special winning port sensor 2403, the first receiving sensor 2404, the second receiving sensor A start port solenoid 2412, an attachment solenoid 2414, a V winning port solenoid 2416, a general winning port sensor 3101, a first start port sensor 3102, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) are connected.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 129, the function display unit 1400 displays a state indicator 1401 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming state, and an ordinary lottery result which is drawn by passing the game ball against the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 consisting of two LEDs, a normal hold indicator 1403 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations for passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003, and the reception of the game ball to the first start opening 2002 The first special symbol indicator 1404 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the first special lottery result drawn by the second, and the second LED consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 One special reservation number display 1405 and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display 1406 consisting of LEDs, a second special number-of-retentions display 1407 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the reception of gaming balls to the second starting opening 2004, and the first special lottery When the result or the second special lottery result is "big hit", etc., or when the game ball accepted in the big winning opening 2005 is accepted in the first receiving port 2007, the number of repetitions of the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 ( A round indicator 1408 consisting of five LEDs for displaying the number of rounds) is mainly provided.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 and 133 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 controls peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 212) for controlling effects to be presented to the player based on control signals from main control board 1310, and peripheral control board housing peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

  The peripheral control substrate 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a main control substrate 1310, a rendering operation unit 400, various decoration substrates on the door frame 3 side, a main effect display device 1600, a first effect drive substrate 3032, a second effect drive substrate 3033, It is connected with etc.

[5-7. Main effect display device]
Next, the main effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133 and the like. The main effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Main effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the back box. The main effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5. The main effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The main effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board, and can display a predetermined still image or a moving image.

  The main effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in a front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in a front view. The main effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010 c opening on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b of the back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen directed to the front. The two left fixing pieces 1601 are inserted obliquely from the rear of the back box 3010, and then the right fixing piece 1602 is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133 and the like. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel board 1110 and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 And project rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of this embodiment is capable of receiving the game balls hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001. The first start port 2002, which is always open to accept game balls at different positions in the game area 5a, and the gate unit 2003 attached to the predetermined position in the game area 5a, detects passage of the game balls And the second start opening 2004 where the game balls can be received according to the result of the normal drawing selected by the game balls passing through the gate portion 2003, and the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 There is provided a special winning opening 2005 in which the game ball can be received in any of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving the game ball.

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. The first starting port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the lateral center of the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed near the lower end in the vertical direction near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003. The special winning opening 2005 is disposed at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 at the upper right of the general winning opening 2001 on the right of the center in the left-right direction.

  Furthermore, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out-port 1008 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001 and a first starting opening 2002; A side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the start opening unit 2100 and having two general winning openings 2001 and mounted on the right side in the front view of the start opening unit 2100 Attacker unit 2400 having one general winning opening 2001, gate unit 2003, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, receiving space 2006, first receiving port 2007, and second receiving port 2008, and a game And a frame-like center piece 2500 attached substantially at the center of the region 5a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, start port unit 2100 of front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 (a) is a front perspective view of the starting opening unit and the side unit in the front unit of the game board, and FIG. 137 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the rear. The starting opening unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1008 near the lower end in the middle in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. This starting opening unit 2100 is formed at a position directly above the out opening 1008 at the top, and is always open upward at a size that can accept only one game ball at a time. One general winning combination which is formed on the left in front view and below the opening 2002 and the first starting opening 2002, and which is always open upward in a size that can receive only one game ball at a time And a mouth 2001.

  In the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 and the portion excluding the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 are formed transparent, and the rear side (the transparent front panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 The unit 3100) can be viewed.

  When the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 project forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and then it is opened upward, and the first starting is started. A mouth 2002 is located directly below the center of the stage 2530 of the center work 2500 described later. Therefore, when the gaming ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, it is very likely to be received by the first starting opening 2002. The starting opening unit 2100 can guide the game balls received by the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are detected by the general winning opening sensor 3101 and the first starting opening sensor 3102 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 212). ).

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has two general winning openings 2001 arranged near the right end in a front view, and a right shelf 2201 arranged above the two general winning openings 2001 and inclined downward toward the right. And a left shelf portion 2202 which is disposed above the right shelf portion 2201 and near the left end in a front view and inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  In the two general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, one is opened toward the upper right at the lower right side of the right shelf 2201 and the other is left inclined at the lower left of the right shelf 2201. It opens upward. The two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are arranged side by side so as to face each other. In the side unit 2200, the two general winning openings 2001 (the right shelf 2201) and the left shelf 2202 except for the front are formed transparent, and the rear (the back of the game panel 1100 through the transparent panel plate 1110 The back front decoration unit 3100) of the unit 3000 can be visually recognized.

  By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front of the panel board 1110, the two general winning openings 2001, the right shelf 2201 and the left shelf 2202 project forward from the front of the panel board 1110, and the rightmost side The general winning opening 2001 is positioned slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100. Further, with the side unit 2200 attached to the panel plate 1110, the right shelf 2201 is lower than the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the left shelf 2202 is higher than the first starting opening 2002. It is in position. The left shelf 2202 of the side unit 2200 has a left end close to the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, and can guide the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 to the right.

  The side unit 2200 can guide the gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3101 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 212).

5-8 c. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. Fig. 138 (a) is a front perspective view of the attacker unit in the front unit, and Fig. 138 (b) is a rear perspective view of (a). Further, FIG. 139 is an explanatory view showing the flow path of the game ball in the attacker unit in a cross section. The attacker unit 2400 is disposed on the right in front view of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 has one general winning opening 2001 out of four general winning openings 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving opening 2007, and a second opening. A reception port 2008 is provided.

  The outer shape of the attacker unit 2400 in a front view is formed in an L shape in which the upper end on the right side extends substantially upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction. In this attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which gaming balls flow up and down (upper side) is disposed at the upper right corner, and a second starting opening 2004 which can be opened forward is disposed directly under the gate portion 2003. ing. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a large winning opening 2005 which can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and always always opens obliquely downward to the lower left of the large winning opening 2005. One general winning combination 2001 is arranged. Furthermore, in the attacking unit 2400, a receiving space 2006 of a predetermined size is disposed below the large winning opening 2005 and in which gaming balls received in the large winning opening 2005 are distributed. In addition, in the receiving space 2006, the first receiving port 2007 which can be opened upward is disposed, and the attacking unit 2400 has a first opening 2007 which is always open on the right side of the first receiving port 2007. A second entrance 2008 is arranged.

  In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 opens with a size slightly larger than the game ball, and the gate unit 2003 vertically penetrates with a size slightly larger than the game ball. In addition, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting opening 2004 is opened forward with a size slightly larger than the gaming ball, and the big winning opening 2005 is approximately four times the outer diameter of the gaming ball in the left-right direction. It is open upward with a width of 5 times.

  Attacker unit 2400 is received by gate sensor 2401 that detects gaming balls passing through gate portion 2003, second start opening sensor 2402 that detects gaming balls received by second start opening 2004, and large winning opening 2005 A large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting a game ball, a first reception sensor 2404 for detecting a game ball received at a first reception port 2007, and a game ball for detecting a game ball received at a second reception port 2008 And a second inlet sensor 2405.

  The attacking unit 2400 starts and opens the second starting opening door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening door 2411 in accordance with the result of the normal lottery where the game ball of the gate unit 2003 passes. The first special lottery that is drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 The attacker solenoid 2414 is opened and closed according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result, and the first receiving port 2007 is opened and closed (a game ball which is accepted by the large winning opening 2005 and circulates in the receiving space 2006 is the first receiving port 2007 Or to any of the second inlet 2008) V winning opening door 2415, V winning opening door 2415 the first starting opening 2002 or second starting opening And a, and V winning hole solenoid 2416 to open and close in response to the first special lottery result is the lottery or the second special lottery result by accepting game balls to 004.

  The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically at the upper right corner in a front view, and the gate section 2003 and the second start port 2004 are respectively disposed at the upper end and the lower end, and the gate passage 2421 through which game balls can flow A left side passage 2422 which extends vertically on the left side of the gate portion 2003 and through which game balls can flow, a right side passage 2423 which extends vertically and which can flow game balls on the right side of the gate portion 2003, a gate passage 2421, The attacker extends below the right side passage 2423 below the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 and below the right side passage 2423 so that the left end is lower and the game ball can circulate And a passage 2424.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 extends in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the second start port 2004 and forms a part of the gate passage 2421. The second start port left wall 2425 and the second start opening right wall 2426 And a left side passage bottom wall portion 2427 extending from the upper end of the second start opening left wall portion 2425 toward the upper left and forming the bottom wall of the left side passage 2422, and a height lower than the gate portion 2003 From the lower end of the right side passage right wall 2428 extending up and down to a height lower than the second start port 2004 and forming the right wall of the right side passage 2423 and from the lower end of the right side passage right wall 2428 Attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429 which extends leftward halfway to the left and right of big winning opening 2005 so that the left end side becomes lower, and forms the bottom wall of the attacking passage 2424; Left side from the left end of the is provided with a release ledge 2430 which extends to the left so as to be lower.

  In the gate passage 2421, as shown in FIG. 139, the game ball can communicate with the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 in a region between the gate portion 2003 and the second start opening 2004 respectively. . The second starting port 2004 is configured such that gaming balls are not directly received from the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 by the left and right second starting opening left wall 2425 and the second starting opening right wall 2426. There is. The left side passage 2422 has a downstream end joined to the gate passage 2421 on the upper side of the second start port 2004 by the left side passage bottom wall portion 2427. The attachment passage 2424 extends further to the left than the left side passage 2422. The right end of the large winning opening 2005, which is long in the left and right direction, is located almost directly below the second starting opening 2004, and a part of the upper side (opening) is covered by the attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429. There is.

  The second start opening door 2411 is capable of closing the second start opening 2004 opened forward from the front, and in the vicinity of the lower end of the second start opening 2004, the lower side is rotatable about an axis extending leftward and rightward It is attached. The second start opening door 2411 rotates (turns) so that the upper side moves forward by driving the start opening solenoid 2412, thereby opening the second start opening 2004 and closing the gate passage 2421. The gaming ball having flowed down in the gate passage 2421 or the left side passage 2422 can be guided to the second start opening 2004 side and received in the second start opening 2004. The second start opening door 2411 closes the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid 2412 is OFF (during non-energization), and opens the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid is ON (during power) Let

  The special winning opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape extending in the front and rear direction and extending left and right so that the left end is low, and opens and closes the large winning opening 2005 opened upward by advancing and retracting in the front and rear direction. It is possible. The big winning opening door 2413 closes the big winning opening 2005 by moving forward, and guides the gaming balls having circulated on the attack passage bottom wall portion 2429 of the attachment passage 2424 to the left and then releases the release shelf 2430. It can be handed over. In addition, the special winning opening door 2413 opens the special winning opening 2005 by moving backwards by driving the attacker solenoid 2414, and after passing through any of the gate passage 2421, the left side passage 2422, and the right side passage 2423, the attacker can The game ball released from the left end of the attack passage bottom wall portion 2429 of the passage 2424 can be received by the big winning opening 2005. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 when the attachment solenoid 2414 is OFF (during non-energization), and opens the special winning opening 2005 when the attachment solenoid 2414 is ON (during energization).

  V winning opening door 2415 is formed in a plate shape extending in the receiving space 2006 back and forth and extending right and left so that the right end is low, and is opened upward by moving back and forth. It is possible to open and close the first entrance 2007 (V winning opening). The V winning opening door 2415 closes the first receiving opening 2007 by moving forward, and guides the gaming ball received by the large winning opening 2005 rightward to always open the second receiving opening upward. May be accepted to 2008. Further, the V winning opening door 2415 is retracted by driving the V winning opening solenoid 2416 to open the first receiving port 2007, and the gaming ball received in the big winning port 2005 is highly likely to be the first receiving port. May be accepted in 2007. The V prize opening door 2415 closes the first inlet 2007 when the V prize opening solenoid 2416 is OFF (during non-energization), and the first inlet 2007 when the V prize opening solenoid 2416 is ON (during energization). Open 2007. In other words, the V winning opening door 2415 can distribute the gaming balls received by the big winning opening 2005 so as to be received by either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008.

  In the state attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, in the attacker unit 2400, the gate passage 2421 is located below the opening on the downstream side of the right guiding passage 2540 in the center part 2500 described later, and the gate The portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 are located above the stage 2530 of the center product 2500. Further, the special winning opening 2005 is located above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the general winning opening 2001 is located below the first starting opening 2002.

  Subsequently, the flow of gaming balls in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate unit 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2530 of the center character 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, the gate unit 2003 is held even if the game ball is released from the stage 2530. There is no passing through. Therefore, only the game balls having flowed down the right side of the center character 2500 (the right guiding path 2540) may pass through the gate portion 2003. On the downstream side of the right guiding passage 2540, the left side passage 2422, the gate passage 2421 and the right side passage 2423 are opened side by side from the left, and the gaming ball which has flowed down the right side of the center character 2500 is any of them. You will enter the The upper end opening of the gate passage 2421 in which the gate portion 2003 is disposed is opened upward below the opening on the downstream side of the right guiding passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500, so The game ball having flowed down on the right side enters the gate passage 2421 with high probability and passes through the gate section 2003.

  Then, the gaming ball having passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2421 to the attacker passage 2424 through the front of the second start opening door 2411 closing the second start opening 2004 immediately below. At this time, when the second start opening door 2411 is turned forward and is in the open position, the gaming ball having passed through the gate portion 2003 abuts on the back surface of the second start opening door 2411 and the second It is guided to the starting opening 2004 side and is accepted by the second starting opening 2004. The second starting opening door 2411 is based on the result of the normal lottery that is selected by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 (the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the normal lottery result is “normal hit” At the same time, the game ball itself that has drawn the “normal hit” is accepted by the second starting opening 2004 by appropriately setting the drawing time of the normal drawing result, the opening / closing timing of the second starting opening door 2411 and the like. be able to.

  The gaming balls received in the second starting opening 2004 are detected by the second starting opening sensor 2402 and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

  The gate passage 2421 communicates with the lower end of the left side passage 2422 on the left side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004, and thus enters the left side passage 2422 on the left side of the gate portion 2003. The game balls are distributed to the front side of the second start opening 2004 without passing through the gate portion 2003. Therefore, in a state where the second start opening door 2411 is moved to the open position and the second start opening 2004 can be received, the game ball passed through the gate portion 2003 or the game ball circulated through the left side passage 2422 Can be received to the second starting port 2004 with extremely high probability. In the gate passage 2421, since the right side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 communicates with the middle of the right side passage 2423, the right side passage 2423 on the right side of the gate portion 2003 is The game ball that has entered is likely to be accepted by the second start port 2004. On the other hand, the gaming ball passing through the gate portion 2003 or circulating through the left side passage 2422 may enter the right side passage 2423 through a portion communicating with the right side passage 2423 in the gate passage 2421, It does not necessarily pass the front of the second start opening 2004 (second start opening door 2411).

  If the gaming ball which has flowed down the right side of the center character 2500 is not received in the second start port 2004, it is released from the lower end of the gate passage 2421 or the right side passage 2423 into the attacker passage 2424.

  The game ball released to the attacking passage 2424 is guided to the left along the slope of the attacking passage bottom wall 2429 and closes the winning opening 2005 from the left end of the attacking passage bottom wall 2429. It is discharged downward from the left end of the release shelf 2430 via 2413. At this time, when the large winning opening door 2413 closing the large winning opening 2005 is retreated and the large winning opening 2005 is opened, the gaming ball released into the attack passage 2424 has a high probability of the high winning opening. Accepted in 2005 The game ball received by the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 and is then sent to the receiving space 2006, and either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 by the V winning port door 2415 Distributed to

  The gaming ball received in the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is detected by the first receiving port sensor 2404 or the second receiving port sensor 2405, and then the lower side of the gaming panel 1100 (substrate holder Discharged on the

  The gaming balls discharged downward from the discharge shelf 2430 may be received by one general winning opening 2001 disposed below. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 are guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 and then delivered to the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game balls not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 pass through the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a and are discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

[5-8 d. Center feature]
Next, the center product 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 140 (a) is a front perspective view of the center part in the front unit, and FIG. 140 (b) is a rear perspective view of (a). The center character 2500 is disposed slightly above the center of the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is done. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the main effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 are visually recognized from the front through the frame. Can.

  In the frame-shaped center character 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit into the game area 5a is in the frame It can not be invaded.

  The center character 2500 is capable of releasing the warp ball 2520 having the game ball in the game area 5a open to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view and the game ball having entered the warp ball 2520 within the frame. It has a warp outlet 2522 which is open, and a stage 2530 which can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the gaming ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction.

  The stage 2530 of the center character 2500 is a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed and corresponds to a position directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, that is, the center character 2500 is In the state of being attached to 1110), the substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape so as to be slightly higher than the left and right sides. The stage 2530 is inclined so that a portion (apex) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction and a lowermost portion (valleys) on both the left and right sides thereof become lower toward the front The game balls can be released into the game area 5a from those portions.

  The center portion 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, and the high part (top) of the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2530 is positioned directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100. As a result, when the gaming ball is released from the center of the stage 2530, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with extremely high probability.

  In addition, the center product 2500 includes a right guiding passage 2540 that guides the gaming ball, which has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side in a front view, to a slight left and then releases the gaming ball downward. The right guiding passage 2540 is formed such that the downstream end of the right guiding passage 2540 is located slightly to the left of the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 when the center product 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 There is.

  Furthermore, the center character 2500 is disposed at the top in the frame, and includes a logo decoration unit 2550 provided with a predetermined logo (not shown) along the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The logo decoration unit 2550 has a translucent logo decoration 2551 on which a predetermined logo is formed in a relief shape, and is attached to the back side of the logo decoration 2551 and can emit light forward. And a logo decoration substrate 2552 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. This logo decoration unit 2550 can make the logo decoration 2551 emit light and decorate appropriately by the LED of the logo decoration substrate 2552. The logo decoration unit 2550 is formed to be located above the main effect display device 1600 in a front view in a state in which the center character 2500 is assembled on the game board 5.

  The center accessory 2500 is formed such that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball from the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 in the assembled state to the gaming board 5. Therefore, when the gaming ball circulates on the right side of the center character 2500, it circulates along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center character 2500, and all gaming balls circulating on the right side of the center character 2500 are in the right guiding passage 2540. It is approached and guided. As a result, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so that the game ball circulates on the right side of the center character 2500 (so-called right-handed), the game ball can pass through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. At the same time, the game ball can be received with respect to the big winning opening 2005 which is open (opened) with high probability.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142 and the like. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the back unit in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the back unit in the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. A main effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is a box attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and open at the front, and has a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall, and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 and is main A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600, a panel relay substrate 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the rear surface of the back box 3010 A first effect drive substrate 3032 mounted on the right side of the panel relay substrate 3031 in a rear view, and a second effect drive substrate 3033 mounted on the right side of the first effect drive substrate 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010; Is equipped.

  Also, the back unit 3000 covers the back side of the second effect drive board 3033 and the first effect drive board cover 3034 attached to the back box 3010 so as to cover the back side of the first effect drive board 3032 And a second effect drive substrate cover 3035 attached to the back box 3010.

  Also, the back unit 3000 has a frame-like back front decoration unit 3100 attached along the outer peripheral edge at the front end of the back box 3010 and an opening 3010 a at the back side of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010. Also, a back-up movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the upper side and a back-back movable effect unit 3300 mounted on the front side of the back wall of the back box 3010 behind the back-up movable effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010 The back and left movable effect unit 3400 and the back and right movable effect unit 3500, which are mounted separately from each other on the swing table 3380 of the back and back center movable effect unit 3350 in the back and back movable effect unit 3300, are provided. .

  In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back-to-back movable effect unit 3600 attached to the front upper portion of the back-to-back central movable effect unit 3350 and a back-to-back lower movable effect unit attached to the lower front surface of the turn table. And 3700. The back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 is provided with a sub effect display device 3640 having a display screen smaller than that of the main effect display device 1600.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 (a) is a perspective view of the back box in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 145 (b) is a perspective view of the back box in the back unit as viewed from the back. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame which protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010 a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b, two fixing grooves 3010 c which are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the rear view right side in the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main effect display device 1600 is inserted And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the left side in a rear view of the attachment portion 3010b.

  The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the main effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted vertically on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back front decoration unit]
Next, the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 (a) is a perspective view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 (b) is a perspective view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. The back front decoration unit 3100 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 and is formed in a frame shape extending substantially the entire periphery of the back box 3010.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3101 for detecting a game ball received by the general winning opening 2001 provided in the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400 in the front unit 2000. A first starting opening sensor 3102 for detecting the game ball received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and a magnetic sensor 3103 capable of detecting an illegal magnetism externally applied to the inside of the game area 5a And.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 includes a back front left decoration unit 3110 formed in an L shape along the left side and the lower side of the front end of the back box 3010, and the right side and the top side of the front end of the back box 3010. And a back front right decoration unit 3130 formed in an inverted L-shape so as to be along.

  The back front left decoration unit 3110 is attached to the L-shaped left base 3111 having translucency attached along the left side and the lower side at the front end of the back box 3010 and to the front side of the left base 3111 Attached to the front of the left base 3111 behind the translucent front left decorative body 3112 having a relief-like decoration on the front of the cage and the vertically extending portion of the back front left decorative body 3112 The back front left decorative substrate 3113 is mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward on the front, and the back of the left front extending portion of the back front left decoration 3112 of the left base 3111 A back front lower decoration substrate 3114 mounted with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back side and capable of emitting light forward on the front side is provided.

  The back front left decoration unit 3110 can pass the game ball to a position behind the general winning opening 2001 and the first start opening 2002 of the front unit 2000 at a portion extending to the left and right of the back front left decoration 3112 An opening 3112 a is provided. The gaming ball having passed through the opening 3112 a is discharged downward through between the back front left decorative body 3112 and the left base 3111. At this time, the gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3101 attached to the left base 3111, and the gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002 is on the left base 3111. It is detected by the attached first start port sensor 3102. The magnetic sensor 3103 is attached to the left base 3111 at a position near the rear of the first start port 2002.

  The back front left decoration unit 3110 can cause the back front left decoration 3112 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front left decoration substrate 3113 and the back front lower decoration substrate 3114 .

  The back front right decoration unit 3130 is mounted on the front side of the right base 3131 and a translucent L-shaped right base 3131 attached along the right side and the upper side of the front end of the back box 3010. In the front of the right base 3131 behind the part of the back front right decoration 3132 having a relief-like decoration on the front and the vertically extending part of the back front right decoration 3132 A back front right decoration substrate 3133 mounted with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front and capable of emitting light forwardly, and a right base 3131 at the back side of the back front extending portion of the back front right decoration 3132 And a back front upper decoration substrate 3134 mounted with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the front side and capable of emitting light forward on the front side.

  The back right front decoration unit 3130 can cause the back front right decoration 3132 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front right decoration substrate 3133 and the back front upper decoration substrate 3134 .

  When the back front decoration unit 3100 is assembled on the game board 5, the back front left decoration body 3112 and the back front right decoration body 3132 are on the outside of the center character 2500 in the front view game area 5a. It can be viewed from the front (player side) through the transparent panel board 1110. Thereby, the back front decoration unit 3100 can decorate the rear side of the area where the game balls outside the center character 2500 flow down in the game area 5a.

[5-9c. Back-to-back movable production unit]
Next, the back-up movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the back up movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the back up movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back up lift unit of the back up movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front together with the back up movable main unit, and FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the back up lift unit of the back up movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from back with a back upper movable main body unit. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back movable main unit of the back movable presentation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear back view of the back movable presentation unit. It is a disassembled perspective view.

  The back-up movable effect unit 3200 is mounted on the back side of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010 above the opening 3010 a. The back-up movable presentation unit 3200 includes a back-up lifting unit 3210 mounted in the back box 3010 and a back-up movable main unit 3230 lifted and lowered by the back up-lifting unit 3210.

  The back up lift unit 3210 has a flat lift unit base 3211 mounted in the back box 3010, and a circle projecting forward from the lower right corner of the lift unit base 3211 for rotatably mounting the back up movable main body unit 3230. A back-up lift drive motor 3213 is mounted on a columnar lift support shaft 3212 and the rear surface of the lift unit base 3211, and the rotary shaft extends forward through the lift unit base 3211; A spur gear lift drive gear 3214 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3213, and a spur gear lift relay gear 3215 meshing with the lift drive gear 3214 and rotatably mounted to the lift unit base 3211 , The actuating gear portion 3216 a meshing with the elevating relay gear 3215 and the actuating gear portion 3216 a A radially outwardly extending extension portion 3216 b, a cylindrical drive pin 3216 c projecting forward from near the tip of the extension portion 3216 b, and a flat plate elevation formed at the tip of the extension portion 3216 b And a lifting link gear member 3216 rotatably mounted on the lifting unit base 3211.

  Also, the back-up lift unit 3210 penetrates back and forth on one end side, and the drive hole 3217a into which the drive pin 3216c of the lift link gear member 3216 is rotatably inserted, and on the other end side back and forth A rod-like lifting link member 3217 having an action hole 3217b which is penetrated and in which the action pin 3231b of the back top movable body base 3231 in the back top movable body unit 3230 is rotatably inserted A stopper member 3218 which restricts the rotational end of the elevation link gear member 3216 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and a stopper member 3218 is attached to the first effect drive substrate 3032 and the second effect drive substrate 3033 and back top rotation drive motor 3235 and back top mounting of movable main body unit 3230 A back upper relay board 3219 relaying the connection with the board 3234 and a back up and down detection sensor 3220 which is attached to the stopper member 3218 and can detect the up and down detection piece 3216 d of the up and down link gear member 3216 There is.

  The lifting unit base 3211 is formed of a metal plate. The lifting unit base 3211 is provided with a lower stopper portion 3211a extending vertically and longitudinally by being bent forward at a portion below and to the left of the portion where the elevating support shaft 3212 is attached. A plate-like impact absorbing material 3221 is attached to the surface of the lower stopper portion 3211 a facing the right. The lower stopper portion 3211 a is formed such that the back upper movable body base 3231 of the back upper movable body unit 3230 abuts via the shock absorbing material 3221, and in the direction of the clockwise view of the back upper movable body unit 3230. Of the free end (the lower moving end of the free end (right end in front view) of the back-up movable main unit 3230).

  The elevating drive gear 3214 and the elevating relay gear 3215 are formed to have the same diameter, and the actuating gear portion 3216 a of the elevating link gear member 3216 is formed to have a diameter larger than that of the elevating relay gear 3215. In the lifting link gear member 3216, an extending portion 3216b extends outward in a fan shape from the operating gear portion 3216a. The stopper member 3218 has a flat upper stopper portion 3218 a extending forward. The side surface of the extending portion 3216b of the elevating link gear member 3216 abuts on the downward facing surface of the upper stopper portion 3218a, thereby restricting the rotating end of the elevating link gear member 3216 in the counterclockwise direction. . In other words, the upper stopper portion 3218a restricts the rotation of the lifting link gear member 3216 in the counterclockwise direction, whereby the upper end of the back upper movable body unit 3230 via the lifting link gear member 3216 is directed upward. The moving end (rising end) is regulated.

  The back upper movable main body unit 3230 extends in a shallow box shape with an open rear side and extends left and right, and a front upper end near the left end is rotatably attached to the back upper elevating unit 3210; A disc-like back first rotation decorative body 3232 rotatably mounted around an axial center extending back and forth at a position from the right end of the base 3231 to the left and a front side of the back top first rotation decoration 3232 And the second rotating decorative body 3233 rotatably attached to the first rotating decorative body 3232 at a position eccentric to the axial center of the first rotating decorative body 3232; And a back-to-back decoration substrate 3234 attached to the back surface of the back-to-back movable main body base 3231 which is the back of the one rotation decoration body 3232 and the back-to-back second rotation decoration body 3233.

  Further, the back upper movable main body unit 3230 is attached to the front surface near the left end of the back upper movable main body base 3231, and the rotation axis projects through the back upper movable main body base 3231 and protrudes backward. 3235, a spur gear-like rotational drive gear 3236 attached to the rotary shaft of the back upper rotational drive motor 3235, a spur gear-like input gear portion 3237a meshing with the rotational drive gear 3236, and a rear side of the input gear portion 3237a The geared relay gear 3237, which has an output gear portion 3237b smaller in diameter than the input gear portion 3237a, and the output gear portion 3237b of the transmission relay gear 3237, is rotatably mounted on the back upper movable main body base 3231 The first relay gear 3238 in the spur gear shape and the first relay gear 3238 mesh with each other, and the back upper movable main body 3231 A spur gear third relay gear meshed with the second relay gear 3239 rotatably mounted in the spur gear shape and the second relay gear 3239 and rotatably mounted on the back upper movable main body base 3231 First rotating decorative body gear 3241 which meshes with 3240 and the third relay gear 3240 and rotates integrally with the back first rotating decorative body 3232, the back upper movable main body base 3231 and the back upper first rotating decoration 3232 A spur gear-like second rotary decorative gear 3242 which is disposed between the first and second rotary decorative members 3233 and is integrally rotated with the second rear rotary decorative member 3233 and rotates with the rotation of the first rear rotary decorative member 3232; Have.

  Furthermore, the back upper movable body unit 3230 is attached to the back upper movable body base 3231 and detects the rotational position of the back first rotating decorative body 3232; and the back first rotating decoration body An axial center which is disposed on the rear side of 3232 and extends in the front and rear direction on a circumference of a predetermined radius centering on the axial center of the back top first rotary decorative body 3232 on the front surface of the back upper movable body base 3231 A plurality of back-to-back inlay decoration bodies 3246 rotatably attached to the periphery and a back-on first back-to-back decoration body 3232 are attached and abut on back-to-back appearance decoration bodies 3246 The first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 which cause the decoration 3246 to rotate and partially protrude outside the back first rotation decoration 3232; and a plurality of back appearances and decorations 3246 S a plurality of return spring 3249 which is urged to rotate in a direction that does not protrude outward from the back on the first rotating decorative body 3232, and a.

  Also, the back upper movable main body unit 3230 has a base cover 3250 attached to the back side of the back upper movable main body base 3231 so as to cover the rotational drive gear 3236 and the speed change relay gear 3237 from the rear side, And a substrate cover 3251 attached to the rear side of the back movable main body base 3231 so as to cover the rear side.

  The back upper movable main body base 3231 has a right half extending to the left and right, and is formed in a disk shape having a diameter larger than that of the left side. The back movable main body base 3231 penetrates back and forth substantially at the center in the vertical direction at the left end, and is provided with a lifting shaft hole 3231a rotatably mounted on the elevating support shaft 3212 of the back lifting unit 3210; Of the action pin 3231b which is cylindrically projected forward in the vicinity of the lower end of the part and rotatably inserted into the action hole 3217b of the lift link member 3217, and cylindrically projected forward substantially at the center of the discoid portion on the right side Bosses 3231 c, a first rotation support hole 3231 d penetrating back and forth at the center of the boss portion 3231 c, and for mounting the back first rotation decorative body 3232 rotatably, and the same as the first rotation support hole 3231 d A spur gear-like fixed gear portion 32 formed on the core and formed on the outer periphery of the boss portion 3231 c near the front end and meshed with the second rotary decorative body gear 3242. Includes a 1e, the.

  In addition, the back movable main body base 3231 penetrates back and forth in the disk-shaped portion of the right half, and the plurality of openings 3231 f in which the first LED 3234 a of the back top decorative substrate 3234 faces forward and the outer periphery of the disk-shaped portion On the circumference of a predetermined radius centered on the first rotation support hole 3231d, a plurality of cylindrical members projecting forward from the equally spaced positions in the circumferential direction on the circumference of a predetermined radius are mounted rotatably Support pins 3231g and immersive stoppers 3231h projecting forward in the vicinity of the respective support pins 3231g and restricting the rotational end in the counterclockwise direction of the back-to-back decorative member 3246; and An appearance stopper 323 which protrudes forward in the vicinity and restricts a rotational end in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front as viewed from the front. It includes a i, a.

  The outer back surface first rotary decorative body 3232 is formed in a variable polygon shape, and is formed larger than the disk-shaped portion of the right upper half of the back upper movable main body base 3231. In addition, the back surface first rotary decorative body 3232 is decorated with an angular spiral shape, and is opaque by including a colored translucent translucent portion and a metallic luster plated layer And the site of The back top first rotary decorative body 3232 is cylindrically projecting rearward from the center of the back surface, and is rotatably inserted into the first rotation support hole 3231 d of the back top movable main body base 3231; And a second rotation support hole 3232b for rotatably attaching the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 which penetrates back and forth at a position eccentric to the uniaxial portion 3232a. The first rotating decorative body gear 3241 is attached to the rear end of the first shaft portion 3232a of the back top first rotating decorative body 3232. Further, in the second rotation support hole 3232 b, the second shaft portion 3233 a of the back upper second rotation decoration body 3233 is rotatably inserted.

  The outer back second rotary decorative body 3233 has a variable polygonal shape, and is formed smaller than the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232. More specifically, the back second rotation decorative body 3233 has a diameter approximately half that of the back top first rotation decoration 3232. In addition, the second back rotating decorative body 3233 is decorated with an angular spiral, and is opaque, consisting of a colored translucent translucent portion and a metallic luster plated layer And the site of The back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 cylindrically protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface, and is rotatably inserted into the second rotary support hole 3232 b of the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232. Have. The second rotating decorative body gear 3242 is attached to the rear end of the second shaft portion 3233 a of the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233.

  The back upper decorative substrate 3234 emits light in a direction away from the plurality of first LEDs 3234 a that can emit light forward and the bosses 3231 c (first rotation support holes 3231 d) in the back upper movable main body base 3231. A plurality of possible second LEDs 3234 b are provided. The plurality of first LEDs 3234 a and the plurality of second LEDs 3234 b are mounted on the front surface, respectively. Further, the back upper decoration substrate 3234 is provided with a flat cable 3234 c connected to the back upper relay substrate 3219 of the back up raising and lowering unit 3210. The flat cable 3234 c is sandwiched between the back top movable body base 3231 and the base cover 3250.

  The plurality of first LEDs 3234a of the back top decorative substrate 3234 are in a state of facing forward from the plurality of openings 3231f of the back top movable main body base 3231 in the state assembled to the back top movable main unit 3230 By the LED 3234a, light can be emitted from the back side of the back first first rotary decoration 3232 or the back second second rotary decoration 3233 to emit light.

  The plurality of second LEDs 3234b of the back top decorative substrate 3234 are assembled in the back top movable main body unit 3230, in the vicinity of the respective support pins 3231g in the back top movable main body base 3231 (centering around the first rotation support hole 3231d It is arranged two by two in the counterclockwise direction). The second LED 3234 b protrudes outward more than the first rotating decoration 3232 on the back of the rising and falling decoration 3246 b of the rising and falling decoration 3246 b by emitting light in a state in which the back and rising decoration 3246 partially protrudes. The light emission decoration can be made at the site where the

  The transmission relay gear 3237 has an input gear portion 3237a larger in diameter than the rotational drive gear 3236 and the second relay gear 3239, and an output gear portion 3237b smaller in diameter than the second relay gear 3239 and a rotational drive gear 3236 and It is formed in the same diameter. The first relay gear 3238 is formed to have the same diameter as the input gear portion 3237a of the transmission relay gear 3237. The second relay gear 3239 is formed to have the same diameter as the third relay gear 3240 and the first rotating decoration gear 3241.

  Each of the plurality of back-to-back inlay decorative bodies 3246 is formed in the same shape. The plurality of back-to-back appearance decorative bodies 3246 are provided with five of a first appearance-to-back appearance body 3246A, a second appearance-to-back appearance body 3246B, a third appearance-to-back appearance body 3246C, a fourth appearance-to-back appearance body 3246D, and a fifth appearance-to-back appearance body 3246E. ing. The back-and-out appearance decoration 3246 penetrates back and forth, and the base 3246a rotatably attached by the support pins 3231g of the back-side movable main body base 3231 being inserted, and extending outward from the base 3246a A projecting portion 3246b in which a type of decoration is formed, a projecting portion 3246c extending in a direction different from the projecting portion 3246b from the base 3246a, and a cylindrical shape projecting forward from the tip of the projecting portion 3246c And an abutting portion 3246d. The back surface appearance decoration 3246 is formed of a transparent member, and a part of the appearance appearance decoration 3246 b is decorated with a plated layer having metallic luster. In addition, on the back surface, the back-up appearance decoration body 3246 includes a lens portion 3246e which is formed in a triangular shape whose cross section protrudes backward and extends in an arc shape centering on the base 3246a and is formed in a plurality concentrically. There is.

  In the state where it is assembled to the back upper movable body unit 3230, the back up appearance recessed decoration body 3246 is assembled such that the appearance recessed decoration portion 3246 b is positioned between the immersion stopper 3231 h and the emergence stopper 3321 i in the back upper movable body base 3231. It is in a state of being in contact with the immersing stopper 3231 h of the back top movable main body base 3231 by the urging force in the counterclockwise direction of the front view by the return spring 3249 (see FIG. 155). In this state, most of the back-to-back appearance decoration 3246 is located directly behind the back-side first rotation decoration 3232 and is in a state where it can not be seen from the front (the state of the immersion position).

  The back-up projecting and retracting decorative body 3246 can be brought into contact with the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 attached to the rear side of the back-side first rotary decorative body 3232 with the contact portion 3246 d. By contacting the first cam member 3247 or the second cam member 3248 that has moved circumferentially by the rotation of the back top first rotary decorative body 3232, the base 3246 a (back top movable main body against the urging force of the return spring 3249 It will rotate clockwise around the support pin 3231g) of the base 3231, and the entire upside-down decoration 3246b will rotate clockwise when the whole upside-down decoration 3246b is rotated clockwise, and the upside-down decoration part 3246b is the back top first rotating decoration 3232 It moves to the outside more than it, and it will be in the state seen from the front (state of the appearance position). In the case where the back-to-back appearance decoration 3246 is vigorously rotated in the clockwise direction, the appearance-to-back decoration 3246b abuts against the appearance stopper 3231i of the back-to-back movable main body base 3231 to turn further clockwise. Is regulated. Then, when the contact between the contact portion 3246d and the first cam member 3247 or the second cam member 3248 is released, the back-up appearance decoration member 3246 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the biasing force of the return spring 3249. , Return to the state of the initial immersion position.

  In the state assembled to the back upper movable main body unit 3230, the back up appearance recessed decoration body 3246 is disposed in front of the back upper appearance decoration substrate 3234 and rotates about the base 3246 a to display the appearance recessed appearance part 3246 b. Is moved to the outside of the back top first rotary decoration 3232 in front view, the light from the corresponding second LED 3234 b of the back top decoration substrate 3234 is irradiated on the back surface of the appearance decoration portion 3246 b. ing. In detail, when the back-up appearance decoration 3246 is at the appearance position, the appearance decoration section 3246b is positioned forward of the light irradiation direction of the second LED 3234b in front view, and the rear surface (lens section of the appearance decoration section 3246b The light from the second LED 3234 b is irradiated obliquely to the rear of 3246 e). Then, the light irradiated from behind obliquely to the lens portion 3246e consisting of a plurality of triangular protrusions is refracted at the rear surface of the emergence and appearance decorative portion 3246b and enters the emergence and appearance decoration portion 3246b, and the planar front and rear surfaces are obtained. After being diffusely reflected, a part is emitted from the front to the front (see FIG. 159). Thus, when viewed from the front (player's side), the portion protruding outward beyond the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back of the appearing and falling decorative portion 3246b in the appearing on the back and appearing decorative body 3246 seems to be shining, The site can be decorated with light emission.

  The first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 rotate the appearance decoration portion 3246b of the back appearance appearance decoration body 3246 between an immersion position which can not be seen from the player side and an appearance position which can be seen from the player side It is a thing. The first cam member 3247 includes a flat plate-like rotation detection piece 3247 a extending rearward. The rotation detection piece 3247a is detected by the back-up rotation detection sensor 3245 attached to the back-up movable main body base 3231 so that the rotational position of the back-up first rotary decorative body 3232 can be detected. In the state where the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are assembled to the back upper movable main body unit 3230, a plurality of the back upper first rotary ornaments 3232 are rotated (in a counterclockwise direction in front view). The back-appearing decorative member 3246 can be rotated (in a clockwise direction in a front view) in contact with any of the contact portions 3246d of the back-emerging decorative member 3246.

  Further, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 have a predetermined angle (about 156 degrees) in the circumferential direction on the circumference of a predetermined radius centering on the first shaft portion 3232a of the back top first rotary decorative body 3232 ) Mounted separately. More specifically, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are spaced apart at an angle different from the angle (72 degrees) at which the plurality of (five) back-to-back decorative members 3246 are separated. It is attached to a one-turn decoration 3232. As a result, the timing at which the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 abut on the contact portion 3246 d of the back-up appearance decoration 3246 can be made different, and the two back appearance appearance decoration 3246 is different You can get in and out at timing.

  The back up lift unit 3210 is mounted on the upper right of the front view center above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 and to the left of the center in a front view, and is provided in the lower right corner of the back up lift unit 3210 The back movable main body unit 3230 is rotatably attached to the elevating support shaft 3212. More specifically, the lifting shaft hole 3231a on the left end side is rotatably attached to the lifting support shaft 3212 of the lifting mechanism unit 3210, and the lower side of the lifting shaft hole 3231a. The action pin 3231 b is connected to the drive pin 3216 c of the lifting link gear member 3216 in the back-up lifting unit 3210 through the lifting link member 3217.

  In the back upper movable main body unit 3230, the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotatably attached to the center of the disk-shaped portion of the right upper half of the back upper movable main body base 3231, and the back upper second rotation. A decorative body 3233 is rotatably attached to the back top first rotary decorative body 3232 at a position eccentric from its center. More specifically, the back-side first rotary decorative body 3232 has a first shaft portion 3232 a extending rearward, rotatably mounted in a first rotation support hole 3231 d of the back-side movable body base 3231. At the rear end of the first shaft portion 3232a, the rotation from the upper back rotation drive motor 3235 is the rotation drive gear 3236, the transmission relay gear 3237, the first relay gear 3238, the second relay gear 3239, and the third relay gear 3240. A first rotating decorative gear 3241 is attached, which is transmitted via

  On the other hand, in the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233, a second shaft portion 3233 a extending backward is rotatably attached to the second rotation support hole 3232 b of the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232. At the rear end of the second shaft portion 3233a, a second rotating decorative body gear 3242 which meshes with the fixed gear portion 3231e of the back upper movable body base 3231 is attached.

  Further, in the back movable main body unit 3230, the back protruding and recessed decorative body 3246 is rotatably attached to a plurality (five) of support pins 3231 g protruding forward in the back movable main body base 3231. The back decoration 3246 is urged by a return spring 3249 to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view.

[5-9c-1. Production by back-to-back movable production unit]
Next, effects using the back-up movable effect unit 3200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 153 to FIG. FIG. 153 (a) is a front view of the back-up movable effect unit showing the back-up movable body unit in the normal raised position, and FIG. 153 (b) is shown in the lowered position after rotating the back-up movable body unit. It is a front view of a back up movable presentation unit. FIG. 154 is a front view of the back upper movable main body unit schematically showing the rotation of the back top first rotary decoration and the revolution of the back top second rotary decoration. FIG. 155 is a front view of the back upper movable main body unit schematically showing the movements of the plurality of back up appearing and falling decorations and the LEDs of the back up decorative substrate. Fig. 156 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back second rotating decorative body and the back up appearing and falling decorative body in the back top movable main body unit according to the rotation angle of the back top first rotating decoration; It is an explanatory view showing movement of a back second rotating decorative body and a back facing appearing decoration body following 156 according to a rotation angle of a back top first rotating decoration. FIG. 158 (a) is a front view of the back movable main unit shown together with the LEDs of the back decoration substrate in a state in which the back first rotation decorative body is rotated 45 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state; (B) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the TT line | wire in (a). FIG. 159 is an explanatory drawing showing the relationship between the back-up appearance decoration and the second LED on the back-top decoration substrate at the appearance position by enlarging the part of arrow A in FIG.

  In the normal state, the back up movable main body unit 3230 in the normal state is a state where the back up movable main body unit 3230 extends left and right in the front view right side of the back up raising and lowering unit 3210. The back top second rotary decorative body 3233 is at the rising position moving upward. In the state of the raised position, the back first first rotating decoration 3232 and the back second second rotating decoration 3233 are located above the main effect display device 1600 in front view, and the frame of the center character 2500 It is located on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550 in the inside, and is visible from the player side (front) (see FIG. 129 and FIG. 135 etc.). In a normal state, the elevation detection piece 3216 d of the elevation link gear member 3216 is in a state detected by the back up and down elevation detection sensor 3220.

  In the normal (raised position) state in which the back upper movable main body unit 3230 extends substantially horizontally, the back upper first rotating decoration 3232 and the back upper second rotation attached to the right end side of the back upper movable main unit 3230 The weight (self weight) of the decorative body 3233 or the like exerts a force that causes the right end to rotate downward (clockwise in front view) about the lifting support shaft 3212 on the left end. . In the back movable main body unit 3230, the action pin 3231b attached to the lift link member 3217 of the back lift unit 3210 is disposed below the lift shaft hole 3231a (lift support shaft 3212). The force with which the back movable main body unit 3230 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction causes the action pin 3231 b to move to the left. As a result, the lifting link member 3217 attached to the action pin 3231b is pressed leftward via the action pin 3231b by the force that the back upper movable body unit 3230 tries to rotate clockwise. Force is working.

  In this raised position, the extension line connecting the center of each of the drive hole 3217a and the action hole 3217b of the lift link member 3217 passes the upper side of the center of the lift link gear member 3216. When the elevating link gear member 3216 is to be rotated in the direction (counterclockwise direction in front view) in which the drive pin 3216c inserted in the drive hole 3217a moves upward by the leftward force acting on the member 3217 It will be done. At this time, since the extension portion 3216 b of the elevating link gear member 3216 abuts on the upper stopper portion 3218 a of the stopper member 3218, the elevating link gear member 3216 can rotate further in the counterclockwise direction. As a result, the rotation of the lifting link gear member 3216 is restricted and maintained in the stopped state.

  As a result, the back movable main body unit 3230 is not rotated clockwise about the elevation support shaft 3212 by its own weight, and is maintained (locked) in the state of the raised position. Also, in this state, the force of the back movable main body unit 3230 to rotate by its own weight acts on the upper stopper portion 3218a of the stopper member 3218 via the extension portion 3216b of the elevation link gear member 3216, Since it does not act on the side of the elevating relay gear 3215 meshing with the actuating gear portion 3216a of the link gear member 3216, it also acts on the back up and down elevating drive motor 3213 through the elevating relay gear 3215 and the elevating drive gear 3214. There is nothing to do. Therefore, in the normal state (state of the raised position), it is not necessary to drive the back-up lift drive motor 3213, and the load applied to the back lift drive motor 3213 can be reduced.

  In the back upper movable main body unit 3230, the rotation detection piece 3247a of the first cam member 3247 attached to the back first rotation decorative body 3232 is in a state detected by the back upper rotation detection sensor 3245. The rotation of the back top first rotary decoration 3232 and the back top second rotary decoration 3233 is stopped. Furthermore, in a normal state, the first cam member 3247 and the plurality of (five) back-to-back appearance and appearance decorations 3246 in the back-to-back movable main body unit 3230 are attached to the back side of the back-to-top first rotary decoration 3232 and It is not in contact (contact) with any of the second cam members 3248. In this normal state, the plurality of back-to-back decorative units 3246 are in contact with the immersive stoppers 3231 h each regulating the rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in a front view by the biasing force of the return spring 3249. It is in the state of the immersion position which is directly behind the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back. Therefore, the plurality of back-to-back appearance decorative bodies 3246 are in a state in which they can not be seen from the player side (front). In addition, in the plurality of back-to-back decorative units 3246 in which each is in the immersive position, the first cam member 3247 and the first cam member 3247 on which the respective contact portions 3246 d are attached to the back-to-first rotary decorative unit 3232 It is located on the orbit of the second cam member 3248.

  In this normal state, when the lift link gear member 3216 is rotated clockwise in a front view by driving the back-up lift drive motor 3213, the drive pin 3216c revolves so as to move downward and to the left. Therefore, the elevation link member 3217 attached to the drive pin 3216c is pulled leftward by the revolution of the drive pin 3216c. The lifting link member 3217 is pulled leftward, so that the action pin 3231b of the back upper movable main body base 3231 in the back upper movable main body unit 3230 attached to the action hole 3217b of the lifting link member 3217 pulls leftward. As a result, the back-up movable main body unit 3230 rotates in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front centering on the elevating support shaft 3212.

  Then, when the back movable main body base 3231 in the back movable main body unit 3230 abuts on the lower stopper portion 3211 a of the lift unit base 3211, the drive of the back lift drive motor 3213 is stopped, and the clockwise direction is more Rotation is restricted. In this state, the back upper movable main body unit 3230 extends substantially vertically, and the back up first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decoration 3233 are in the state of the lowered position moved downward. (See FIG. 153 (b)).

  In addition, since the shock absorbing material 3221 is attached to the lower stopper portion 3211a, even if the back upper movable main body unit 3230 vigorously rotates (moves) from the raised position to the lowered position, the shock is alleviated and the back surface is reduced. Damage to the upper movable body unit 3230 can be avoided. Further, the shock absorbing material 3221 can suppress the back up movable main body unit 3230 from recoiling at the lower stopper portion 3211 a, and can be reliably stopped at the lowered position.

  With the back movable main body unit 3230 moved to the lowered position, the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decorative body 3233 are at the center of the front of the main effect display device 1600 (the game area 5 a in front view Center) (see FIG. 203). As a result, since the back first rotation decoration 3232 and the back second rotation decoration 3233 can be easily seen from the player side, the player's interest is on the back first rotation decoration 3232 and the back second rotation. The decorative body 3233 can be strongly attracted and, at the same time, the decoration and the movable effect to be described later can be enjoyed.

  When the back up rotation drive motor 3235 is driven to rotate the first rotation decorative body gear 3241 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view in this lowered position, the back up first via the first shaft portion 3232 a The rotating decoration 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction. When the back rotating first rotary decorative body 3232 rotates about the first shaft portion 3232 a (first rotation support hole 3231 d), the second rotating perforating the second shaft portion 3212 a in a position eccentric to the first shaft portion 3232 a The rotation support hole 3232b revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a. Since the second shaft portion 3233a of the back upper second rotary decoration 3323 is rotatably attached to the second rotation support hole 3232b, the back upper first rotation decoration 3232 is centered on the first shaft portion 3232a. When it is rotated, the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a via the second shaft portion 3233a.

  When the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a, the second rotary decorative body gear 3242 attached to the second shaft portion 3233 a of the back upper second rotary decoration 3233 is also the first It will revolve around the shaft 3232a. The second rotary decorative gear 2324 is engaged with the fixed gear portion 3231e of the back movable main body base 3231 coaxially formed with the first shaft portion 3232a. When the 3242 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a (the fixed gear portion 3231e), the second rotating decorative body gear 3242 rolls along the outer periphery of the fixed gear portion 3231e by meshing of the gears. The rotating decorative body gear 3242 rotates (rotates) about the second shaft 3233a (see FIG. 154). Therefore, when the back top first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back top rotational drive motor 3235, the back top second rotary decorative body 3233 rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the first shaft portion It will revolve around 3232a.

  In the back upper movable body unit 3230, since the two first cam members 3247 and the second cam members 3248 are attached to the back side of the back first rotation decorative body 3232, the back upper first rotation decoration 3232 is rotated. Then, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 also rotate (revolute around the first shaft portion 3232a). When the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are revolved, two out-of-back appearance and appearance decoration bodies on a diagonal of a plurality of (five) back appearance decoration bodies 3246 in the immersion position according to the rotation position. Abuts on the contact portion 3246d of 3246 and presses the contact portion 3246d against the urging force of the return spring 3249 to rotate the back and up appearance decoration 3246 around the support pin 3231g, and the appearance and appearance decoration portion 3246 b can be moved to the outer appearance position in front view than the back top first rotary decorative body 3232 (see FIG. 155 and the like).

  The outer circumferences of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are each formed in a rhombus shape, and the contact portion 3246 d slides along the rhombus outer periphery along with the rotation of the back top first rotary decorative body 3232. Move. Describing the movement of the contact portion 3246d with respect to the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248, first, the inner side in the rotational direction of the outer periphery of the diamond shape of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 It abuts near the front end of the side that is facing and slides backward along that side, and then turns around near the rear end of that side and slides forward. Then, after moving from the rotation direction front end of the rhombus outer periphery to the side facing outward, slide toward the back along the side facing outward, away from the rear end of the back side facing outward Move.

  The movement of the back-to-back decoration 3246 due to the rotation of the back-to-back first rotary decoration 3232 will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157. (A) to (c) of FIG. 156 and (d) to (f) of FIG. 157 show the first rotating decorative member 3232 on the back counterclockwise in a normal state (the state of FIG. 156 (a)) It shows a state where it is rotated by 15 degrees in the direction of. First, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 156 (a), the rotation detection piece 3247a of the first cam member 3247 is detected by the back-up rotation detection sensor 3245 to drive the back-up rotation drive motor 3235 (back up first The rotation of the single-turn decoration 3232 is stopped, and the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are separated from the contact portions 3246 d of the plurality of back-to-back appearance decoration 3246. In this state, the first cam member 3247 approaches the contact portion 3246d of the first appearance decorative member 3246A between the contact portions 3246d of the first appearance decorative member 3246A and the fifth appearance appearance decorative member 3246E. It is in position. In addition, the second cam member 3248 is substantially at the middle position between the contact portions 3246d of the third appearance decorative body 3246C and the fourth appearance appearance decorative body 3246D.

  When the back top first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction together with the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 from this normal state, first, the first cam member 3247 is subjected to the first appearance decoration The contact portion 3246d of the body 3246A is in contact with the contact portion 3246d, and then the second cam member 3248 is in contact with the contact portion 3246d of the fourth appearance decoration 3246D diagonally arranged with respect to the first appearance decoration 3246A. It will be in contact with you.

  In the state (the state shown in FIG. 156 (b)) when the first rotating decoration 3232 on the back side is rotated 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state (the state of FIG. 156 (b)) The contact portion 3246d is in contact with the contact portion 3246d of 3246A in advance so as to slide backward in the middle of the front side of the first cam member 3247 facing the inner side of the outer periphery of the rhombus . As a result, the first rising and falling decorative body 3246A rotates to some extent clockwise around the support pin 3231g from the sundown position against the biasing force of the return spring 3249, and the star-shaped rising and falling decoration portion 3246b A part protrudes outside the back top first rotating decorative body 3232. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 is in a state immediately after coming into contact with the contact portion 3246 d of the fourth appearance decorative member 3246 D, and slides backward in the vicinity of the front end of the front side facing the inner periphery of the rhombus The contact portion 3246d is in contact so as to move. As a result, the fourth appearance decorative member 3246D starts to rotate clockwise from the embedded position about the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249.

  In the first cam member 3247 in the state where the first back decorative member 3232 is further rotated 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state shown in FIG. 156 (b), the first cam member 3247 has a rhombus shape. The contact portion 3246d is in contact so as to slide backward on the front side of the outer periphery facing inward and then fold back and slide forward in the vicinity of the front end of that side. As a result, the first rising and falling decorative body 3246A is further rotated in the clockwise direction about the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249, and the half or more of the star-shaped rising and falling decoration portion 3246b Projects outward beyond the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 is in contact with the contact portion 3246d so as to slide rearward in the middle of the front side of the rhombic outer periphery facing inward. As a result, the fourth rising and falling decoration 3246D rotates to some extent clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249, and a part of the star-shaped rising and falling decoration 3246b It protrudes to the outside more than the back top 1st rotation decoration 3232.

  Subsequently, in the first cam member 3247 in the state where the back top first rotary decorative body 3232 is further rotated 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of FIG. 156 (c) (state of FIG. 157 (d)). The contact portion 3246 d is in contact with the outer periphery of the rhombus so as to slide rearward in the middle of the front side facing outward. As a result, the first appearance decorative member 3246A is further rotated in the clockwise direction about the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249, thereby causing the appearance stopper 3231i of the back upper movable main body base 3231. It is in the state of the appearance position where it abuts, and most of the star-shaped appearance decoration portion 3246 b protrudes outside the back top first rotation decoration body 3232. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 slides the front side of the rhombus toward the inner side and then turns it back so that the contact portion 3246d abuts so as to slide forward near the front end of that side. There is. As a result, the fourth rising and falling decoration 3246D is further rotated clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249, and most of the star-shaped rising and falling decoration 3246b is reverse. It protrudes to the outer side than the upper first rotating decorative body 3232.

  Furthermore, in the first cam member 3247 in the state where the first back decorative member 3232 is further rotated 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of FIG. 157 (d) (state of FIG. 157 (e)), The contact portion 3246 d is separated rearward from the outwardly facing side of the outer periphery of the rhombus. As a result, the first appearance decorative member 3246A rotates counterclockwise about the support pin 3231g by the biasing force of the return spring 3249 and abuts on the immersion stopper 3231h of the back movable main body base 3231. It is in the state of position, and the star-shaped in-and-out decoration part 3246b is located inside the back top first rotary decoration 3232. On the other hand, in the second cam member 3248, the contact portion 3246d is in contact so as to slide rearward in the middle of the side of the rhombic outer periphery facing the outer side. As a result, the fourth appearance decorative member 3246D is further rotated in the clockwise direction about the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and is brought into contact with the appearance stopper 3231i of the back upper movable main body base 3231. It is in the state of the appearance position in contact, and most of the star-shaped appearance decoration portion 3246 b protrudes outside the back top first rotation decoration body 3232.

  Further, in the state where the back top first rotary decorative body 3232 is further rotated by 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of FIG. 157 (e) (the state of FIG. 157 (f)), the first cam member 3247 is It is in contact with the contact portion 3246d of the second (appearingly arranged with respect to the fourth appearance decoration 3246D) the second appearance appearance decoration body 3246B, and is near the front end of the front side of the rhombic outer periphery facing inward. The abutment portion 3246d abuts so as to slide backward at the point. As a result, the second projecting and recessed decorative body 3246B starts to rotate in the clockwise direction about the support pin 3231g from the embedded position against the biasing force of the return spring 3249. On the other hand, in the second cam member 3248, the contact portion 3246d of the fourth appearance decoration 3246D is separated rearward from the side of the outer periphery of the rhombus facing the outside, and the fourth appearance decoration 3246D and the fifth appearance appearance decoration 3246E Of the contact portions 3246d, respectively. As a result, the fourth recessed decorative member 3246D rotates counterclockwise about the support pin 3231g by the biasing force of the return spring 3249, and abuts on the immersive stopper 3231h of the back movable main body base 3231. It is in the state of position, and the star-shaped in-and-out decoration part 3246b is located inside the back top first rotary decoration 3232.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 155, FIG. 158 and FIG. 159, since the back upper movable main body unit 3230 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3234 a that irradiate light toward the front on the back upper decoration substrate 3234 By appropriately emitting the first LED 3234a of the above, it is possible to emit and decorate the back top first rotary decoration 3232 and the back top second rotary decoration 3233. When the first LED 3234a of the back top decoration substrate 3234 is appropriately lit while the back top first rotation decoration 3232 and the back top second rotation decoration 3233 are rotated, the back top first rotation decoration 3232 and the back top are Give the player a twinkling, light-emitting decoration by the overlapping condition with the second rotary ornament 3233 or the opaque portion of the first upper rotary ornament 3232 and the second upper rotary ornament 3233 on the back surface, etc. I can show it.

  Further, the back upper decorative substrate 3234 is provided with a plurality of second light sources which radiate light outward in the radial direction centering on the first rotation support hole 3231 d in the vicinity of the respective support pins 3231 g in the back upper movable main body 3231 Since the LED 3234b is provided, as shown in FIG. 158, the back top first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, and the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 allow the back of the retracted position. When the second appearance member 3246 is moved to the appearance position, the second LED 3234b corresponding to the second appearance member 3246 emits light, whereby the second appearance member 3246 appears (the first appearance member 3246b). The light can be decorated.

  Specifically, when the second LED 3234b of the corresponding back top decoration substrate 3234 is caused to emit light with respect to the back surface appearance decoration 3246 of the appearance position, a part of the light diffused from the second LED 3234b appears and appearance decoration On the rear side of the portion 3246b, the plurality of ridges having a triangular cross-section can be reflected and refracted to the front side by the concentrically arranged lens portion 3246e, and the light entering the inside of the appearance decorative portion 3246b is diffusely reflected internally After that, a part can be emitted forward to emit light and decorate the star-shaped appearance decoration 3246 b (see FIGS. 158 (b) and 159). This makes it possible to emit light and decorate the appearance decoration part 3246b of the back appearance decoration 3246 located on the outer side than the back first rotation decoration body 3232 (back appearance decoration substrate 3234). Since the appearance decoration 3246 b in which the 3234 is not disposed is lighted and decorated, the player can be made to wonder, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, according to the back up movable rendering unit 3200, the back up and down drive motor 3213 moves the back up first rotating decoration 3232 and the back up second rotating decoration 3233 between the rising position and the lowering position. Therefore, by moving the back top first rotating decoration 3232 and the back top second rotating decoration 3233 to the lowered position at the center of the game area 5a, the player's interest is turned to the back top first rotating decoration. It can be made to be strongly attracted to the body 3232 and the back second rotation decoration 3323.

  Also, with the back top first rotary decoration 3232 and the back top second rotary decoration 3233 in the lowered position, the back top rotation drive motor 3235 turns the back top first rotary decoration 3232 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. When it is rotated, the back second rotating decorative body 3233 disposed on the front side of the back first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotated counterclockwise around the first shaft portion 3232 a while rotating in the counterclockwise direction. While being able to revolve in the direction, the plurality of back-to-back appearance and appearance decorative members 3246 (on-and-out appearance decoration portions 3246 b) disposed on the back side of the back-side first rotation decorative body 3232 can be reversely timed at different timings. It can be made to appear outside of 3232.

  More specifically, when the back top first rotary decoration 3232 is rotated by the back top rotation drive motor 3235, the back top second rotary decoration 3233 rotates on the front side of the rotating back top first rotary decoration 3232. However, since it revolves, it is possible to show the player a motion of feeling round and round by the back top first rotating decoration 3232 and the back top second rotating decoration 3233. In addition, when the back top first rotary decoration 3232 is rotated by the back top rotation drive motor 3235, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 rotate along with the back top first rotation decoration 3232, and the first cam member Since the distance from the center of rotation of the portion of the outer peripheral surface of each of the 3247 and the second cam member 3248 to which the contact portion 3246d of the back-out appearance decoration 3246 abuts changes, the first cam member 3247 and The second cam member 3248 guides the contact portion 3246d in a direction away from the center of rotation, whereby the back-up appearance decorative member 3246 resists the biasing force of the return spring 3249 via the contact portion 3246d. Can be moved to the outside appearance position of the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the front view and the back, and is rotating. It can show the movements as above the first rotary decorations plurality of back on infested ornamental body outside the 3232 3246 (retractable decorative portion 3246B) infested with Pyokopyoko the player.

  In addition, when the second LED 3234b of the back top decoration substrate 3234 is made to emit light in a state where the appearance decoration portion 3246b of the back top appearance decoration 3246b is positioned outside the back top first rotary decoration 3232, the light is oblique. It will irradiate the lens part 3246e of the appearance decoration body 3246 coming out from the back, and the light incident from the lens part 3246e diffuses and radiates inside of the appearance decoration part 3246b after diffused reflection in the inside, the game When viewed from the player side, the appearance decorative portion 3246b protruding to the outside of the back top first rotary decoration 3232 appears to be glowing, and the appearance decorative portion 3246b can be made to emit light and decorate, and the back surface to the player It can be made easy to notice the appearance of the appearance decoration 3246 (the appearance decoration part 3246b). On the other hand, when the first LED 3234a of the back top decorative substrate 3234 is made to emit light, the back top first rotary decorative body 3232 and the back top second rotary decorative body 3233 moving in a swirling feeling can be made to emit light.

  As a result, it is possible to show the player a moving effect such as swirling of stars as it swirls, and a strong impact can be given to the player, and something good for the player can be made. It can be made to think that there may be a thing, and it can make the expectation for a game increase and can control the fall of the interest.

  In addition, when the first LED 3234a and the second LED 3234b of the back surface decoration substrate 3234 are made to emit light, the appearance decorative portion 3246b is lighted from the glaring swirl created by the back surface second rotation decoration body 3233 and the back surface first rotation decoration body 3232. Since it is possible to show the player an effect (a movable effect and a light emission effect) that feels like jumping out while being displayed, it is possible to show the player the effect of the motion of plural decoration bodies and light, and the effect becomes monotonous Can make it difficult for the player to get bored, can give a strong impact to the player, and the player's expectation for the game (generation of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous) Can be changed with certainty, and the player can be greatly entertained to suppress the decline in interest.

  As described above, according to the back-up movable effect unit 3200, in the normal state, the back position of the back-up movable effect unit 3200 is at the rising position on the upper right side of the main effect display device 1600 near the periphery of the front view gaming area 5a. The back top first rotary decorative body 3232 rotatably mounted on the back top movable main body base 3231 of the top movable main unit 3230 is arranged in a state where its rotation is stopped. In this state, since the back second rotation decorative body 3233 is disposed on the front side of the back top first rotation decoration 3232, the back top second rotation decoration 3233 and the back top first rotation decoration 3232 are A plurality of (five) back-to-back decorative bodies 3246 are in the immersive position just behind the back-side first rotary decorative body 3232 by the biasing force of the return spring 3249. Can not be seen because it is blocked by the back first rotation decoration 3232 and only the decoration by the back second rotation decoration 3233 and the back first rotation decoration 3232 is made clear I can show it. In this state, when the first LED 3234a of the back surface decoration substrate 3234 is made to emit light, the plurality of back surface appearance decoration members 3246, the back surface first rotary decoration body 3232 and the back surface first located in front of the first LED 3234a. Since the two-rotation ornaments 3233 have translucency, respectively, the light from the first LED 3234a can be emitted to the player side through them, and the back second-rotation ornament seen from the player side The body 3233 and the back first rotation decoration 3232 can be lighted and decorated. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the decoration of the back second rotation decorative body 3233 and the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and at the same time as decoration of the periphery of the game area 5 a The appearance of the pachinko machine 1) can be improved.

  In addition, the back movable main body base 3231 to which the back top first rotating decoration 3232, back top second rotating decoration 3233, and a plurality of back protruding and sinking decorations 3246 are attached is placed on the back of the back top lifting unit 3210. When it is moved from the raised position to the lowered position by the lift drive motor 3213, the back first rotation decorative body 3232 is positioned at the center of the game area 5a. The second rotating ornament 3233 can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be attracted to the back of the first rotating ornament 3232 and the back of the second rotating ornament 3233. It can be made to think that there may be a good thing, and a feeling of expectation for the game can be enhanced to suppress a drop in interest.

  Furthermore, when the back top first rotary decoration 3232 is rotated by the back top rotation drive motor 3235 and the first LED 3234 a and the second LED 3234 b of the back top decoration substrate 3234 emit light, the back top second rotation decoration 3233 and the back An effect such as the appearance that the appearance decoration 3426b is absorbed while being sunk in with the glaring swirl coming out from the luminous gruling swirl with the upper first rotation decoration 3232 or the appearance of the appearance decoration 3426b is shining Effects and light emission effects) can be shown to the player. Thus, when rendering is performed using the back second rotation decorative body 3233, the back first rotation decorative body 3232, the plurality of back surface appearing decoration 3246, and the back upper decoration substrate 3234, in the conventional pachinko machine It is possible to show the player the effects of motions and light of a plurality of decorative bodies that can not be seen, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored by preventing the effects from becoming monotonous, and for the player A strong impact can be given, the sense of expectation of the player for the game (generation of the advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous) can be changed with certainty, and the player is greatly entertained to suppress the decline in interest It can be done.

  In addition, a plurality of light emitting decorated back and forth appear and appear by being emitted and decorated by a plurality of back up appearing and appearing decorative bodies 3246 (showing and appearing decorative portions 3246 b) appearing at different timings on the outside of the back first first rotating decoration 3232. Since the periphery of the back top first rotary decoration 3232 is brightened by the decoration 3246, the player can be made to surely notice that a plurality of back appearances and appearance decorations 3246 have appeared, and the above-described effects and effects can be obtained. While being able to be played reliably, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's expectation for the game can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the back top first rotary decoration 3232 and the back top second rotary decoration 3233 can be made to emit light and decorate, the back up appearance decoration 3246 is back on the back by the first LED 3234a when it is in the retracted position. By making the first rotary decorative body 3232 and the back second rotary decorative body 3233 emit light and decorate, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the first back rotary decorative body 3232 and the second back rotary decorative body 3233, In the state, by rotating the back top first rotary decoration 3232 with the back top rotation drive motor 3235, the back up appearance decoration 3246 appears and the second LED 3234b emits the appearance appearance decoration part 3246b of the back appearance appearance decoration 3246b By making the decoration possible, the player can be made to surely show the appearance of the back-and-out decoration 3246, and the above-mentioned effects can be surely exhibited. It is possible.

  In addition, as described above, since it is possible to emit light and decorate the plurality of back-to-back appearing and appearing decorative bodies 3246 appearing on the outside of the back-to-back first rotary decorating body 3232, the back-to-back appearing and appearing decorative body 3246 When the light emitting decoration of 3246 b) is made, the player looks back because the light emitting decoration of the rear appearance decoration 3246 emits light although the decoration substrate provided with the LED is not provided on the back side of the rear appearance appearance decoration 3246. The player's interest can be attracted to the back decoration 3246 to entertain the luminous decoration.

  Furthermore, from the second LED 3234b of the back top decoration substrate 3234 attached to the back top movable main body base 3231, light is emitted to the lens portion 3246e on the back surface of the projecting decoration portion 3246b protruding to the outside of the back top first rotary decoration 3232. To emit light and decorate the appearance decoration portion 3246b, and to move only the appearance appearance appearance body 3246 on the back side, the decoration substrate provided with the LED on the back side of the appearance appearance appearance body 3246 on the back side The weight to be moved can be lightened as compared with the case where a character is attached, and the moving speed (appearing and retreating speed) of the decoration member 3246 can be made relatively fast, and the member can be seen and held against the player. The movement (moving effect) of the decorative body 3246 can be enjoyed. In addition, since the back upper decoration substrate 3234 is not attached to the moving back upper appearance decorative body 3246, the wiring of the rear upper appearance base board 3234 is not repeatedly flexed and fatigued even if the rear upper appearance decorative body 3246 is moved. The disconnection can be prevented, and the decoration on the back surface can be reliably emitted and decorated, and the disconnection can prevent the game from being interrupted and giving the player an unpleasant feeling, It is possible to suppress a drop in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, when the back top first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated, the back top second rotary decorative body 3233 revolves while rotating on the front side of the rotating back top first rotary decorative body 3232, and A plurality of light emitting and appearing appearance decorative portions 3246 b of the plurality of back surface appearance appearing decoration elements 3246 b appear on the outside of the rotating appearance body 3232 so that a strong impact can be given to the player and the player's interest is strongly attracted It is possible to make the player think that something is good, and to increase the feeling of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, since the effect as described above is exhibited, a back rotation second rotary decoration body 3233 that can be suitably used for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in which an effect indicating a special lottery result is executed is performed. A presentation unit (back-up movable presentation unit 3200) can be provided that includes the first rotating decoration 3232, a plurality of back-to-back and appearance decorations 3246, and a back-to-back decoration substrate 3234.

  In addition, since the appearing and retreating decorative portion 3246b of the back and forth appearance decorative body 3246 is caused to appear and retreat by the rotation (revolution) of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248, the appearance and appearance on the back appearing and appearing decoration 3246 Since it is not necessary to separately provide drive means for driving the back of the first rotating decorative body 3232 separately, it is possible to secure a space for that amount, so the It is possible to make the rotating decoration 3232 and the back up appearance decoration 3246 large and make the back top first rotation decoration 3232 and the back appearance appearance decoration 3246 stand out so that the rendering effect can be sufficiently exhibited. Can. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide drive means for driving the back first rotation decoration 3232, the back second rotation decoration 3233, and the back appearance decoration 3246, the back first rotation decoration 3232 is provided. The load of control can be reduced for the movable effect using the back second second rotating decorative body 3233 and the back exposed decorative member 3246, and overload can be prevented and the movable effect can be surely enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the timing of the appearance of the appearance decoration units 3246b of the plurality of back appearance decoration bodies 3246 is made different by the outer peripheral surface of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248, the back top first rotary decoration body It is possible to reduce the occurrence of monotonous movement by adding a change to the movement by the plurality of in-and-out decoration parts 3246 b and 3232, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the back up and down decorative body 3246 is urged toward the retraction position by the return spring 3249, the outer peripheral surface of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 is backed by the urging force of the return spring 3249. The configuration can be simplified as compared with the case where the guide portion for guiding the contact portion 3246 d is a groove or a protrusion, since the contact portion 3246 d of the upper appearance decorative member 3246 can be in contact with the surface. As a result, the cost increase for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the space for the mechanism of the appearance of the decorative member 3246 can be reduced to make it easy to secure the space. The first rotating decoration 3232 on the back side and the decoration 3246 on the back side can be enlarged to make it easier to attract the player's attention.

  In addition, by rotating the base 3246a around the base 3246a, the base 3246a is made to appear and hide the base decorative part 3246b, and since the base decorative part 3246b appears as drawing a locus of a circular arc, Since the visible position of the appearance decoration portion 3246b appearing to the outside of the single rotation decoration body 3232 is changed, it is possible to show the player the locus of light extended in the arc by the appearance decoration portion 3246b which is light emission decoration. It is possible to make the movement of the back decoration appear 3D and make it easy for the player to notice the movement, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and the movement and appearance of the back rotation first rotary decoration 3232 A sense of unity can be imparted to the movement of the decorative portion 3246b, and a dynamic movement is achieved by the back-side first rotary decorative body 3232 and the plurality of projecting and recessed decorative portions 3246b. With the movable effect can be shown to the player who can give a strong impact to the player, to delight the player can be achieved reliably effects described above.

  Furthermore, since the appearance decoration portion 3246b of the back appearance appearance decoration body 3246 is made to appear and appear by rotating, compared to the case where the appearance appearance decoration body 3246 is slid, appearance appearance (sliding) Such resistance can be reduced. Therefore, when the back top first rotary decoration body 3232 is rotated by driving the back top rotation drive motor 3235, the appearance decoration part 3246b of the back up appearance decoration part 3246 can be reliably made to appear and retreat, and the effect by the movable effect Can be demonstrated with certainty. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the problem that the decoration 3246 does not move due to the resistance (sliding resistance), interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the problem can be prevented, and the player can It is possible to prevent discomfort from being felt and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, since the movement range of the back-and-top appearance decoration 3246 can be regulated by the immersion stopper 3231 h and the appearance stopper 3231 i provided in the back-side movable main body base 3231, the back appearance appearance decoration 3246 is made to appear and retreats quickly. Also, it does not move beyond the immersive position or the emergence position, and the back-up appearance decoration 3246 can be reliably moved between the immersion position and the emergence position.

  Furthermore, when the back first rotation decoration 3232 and the back second rotation decoration 3233 are respectively rotated, the respective outer circumferences are formed in a non-circular variable polygon shape, so that the player can receive them. Can be clearly recognized, and the player can be made to pay attention to the rotation (the movable effect) of the back top first turn decorative body 3232 and the back top second turn decorative body 3233. In addition, when the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decorative body 3233 are rotated, the respective axis cores (the first shaft portion 3232 a and the second shaft portion 3233 a) are eccentric to each other. Therefore, it can appear to the player as if they are spinning while rattling, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

[5-9 d. Back and back movable production unit]
Next, the back-to-back movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 160 to 168. FIG. 160 is a front view of the back-to-back movable effect unit in the back unit, FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the back-to-back movable effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 162 is a back-to-back movable effect unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear movable effect unit disassembled into the fixed side unit side and the turn table side and seen from the front, and FIG. 164 is a back rear movable effect unit as the fixed side unit side and the turn table side It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back. FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the back table of the back-side movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 166 is a perspective view of the back-side movable effect unit of the back side as viewed from the back. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the swivel table side of the back-to-back movable presentation unit disassembled into main components for each configuration, and FIG. 168 is a disassembled view of the back table of the back-to-back movable presentation unit according to main constructions And is an exploded perspective view seen from behind.

  The back-to-back movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the back wall in the back box 3010. The back-to-back movable effect unit 3300 includes a back-to-back central movable effect unit 3350 attached to the back box 3010, and a back-to-back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the swivel table 3380 of the back-to-back central movable effect unit 3350 A back movable right production unit 3500, a back rear movable presentation unit 3600 mounted on the upper side of the back rear left movable rendering unit 3400 and the back rear right movable rendering unit 3500 in the turning table 3380 of the back rear central movable rendering unit 3350; A back-rear lower movable effect unit 3700 mounted on the lower side of the back-rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back-right movable effect unit 3500 on the turn table 3380 of the back-rear central movable effect unit 3350 is provided. The back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 is provided with a sub effect display device 3640 having a display screen smaller than the display screen of the main effect display device 1600.

5-9 e. Back and center movable production unit]
Next, the back-to-back center movable effect unit 3350 in the back-to-back movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 160 to 172. FIG. 169 is an explanatory view showing a turning configuration of the turn table in the back-to-back central movable effect unit in the front view of the back-to-back movable effect unit. The back rear central movable effect unit 3350 is attached to the front side of the back wall in the back box 3010, and the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the back side of the back box 3010 passes through the frame from the front It is formed in a frame shape so as to be visible. The back-to-back central movable effect unit 3350 has a fixed side unit 3360 mounted in the back box 3010 and an annular swivel table rotatably mounted on the front side of the fixed side unit 3360 around an axis extending in the front and rear direction. And 3380. The back center movable effect unit 3350 has the back back left movable effect unit 3400, the back back right movable effect unit 3500, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600, and the back rear lower movable effect unit 3700 mounted on the turn table 3380 Then, they can be pivoted around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the game area 5a (main effect display device 1600).

  As shown in FIG. 163 and FIG. 164 etc., the fixed side unit 3360 of the back movable central movable effect unit 3350 has an annular table accommodation portion 3361 a for accommodating the turning table 3380 from the front, and a table accommodation portion A unit base 3361 having a square opening 3361b penetrating back and forth inside the 3361a and a forward movement of a turning table 3380 attached to the unit base 3361 and accommodated in the table accommodation portion 3361a A plurality of cylindrical table guides mounted so as to be separated in the circumferential direction along the outer periphery of the plurality of table supporters 3362 that are regulated and the table accommodation portion 3361a and projecting forward than the front end of the table accommodation portion 3361a Rotatable relative to pin 3363 and respective guide pin 3363 A plurality of guide bushes 3364 which can be brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the turning table 3380 housed in the table housing portion 3361 a and the outer periphery can be rotated on the outside of the lower end of the table housing portion 3361 a in the unit base 3361 And a pair of guide rollers 3365 attached to the outer peripheral surface of which the outer peripheral surface of the turning table 3380 is in contact.

  In addition, a plurality of fixed side units 3360 are attached to the unit base 3361, and a plurality of (here, three) turning detection sensors 3366 for detecting the turning position of the turning table 3380 and a table accommodating portion on the front surface of the unit base 3361 The first effect driving board 3032 and the second effect driving board 3033 and the back and left movable effect unit 3400, the back and back right movable effect unit 3500, the back and back upper movable effect unit 3600, and the back are attached to the outside of the 3361a. A drive motor and a decoration substrate provided in the lower movable effect unit 3700, and three table base relay substrates 3367 relaying the connection with the sub effect display device 3640 are provided.

  Furthermore, the stationary unit 3360 is a spur gear shaped drive attached to the back rotation drive motor 3370 attached to the front lower left corner of the front of the unit base 3361 and the back rotation drive motor 3370 A gear 3371, a large diameter spur gear input gear 3372a meshing with the drive gear 3371, and a spur gear output gear 3372b smaller in diameter than the input gear 3372a are integrally rotated with the input gear 3372a. The rotation transmission gear 3372 rotatably mounted on the unit base 3361 meshes with the output gear 3372 b of the rotation transmission gear 3372 and is accommodated in the table accommodation portion 3361 a of the unit base 3361. It meshes with the turning gear 3384 and can rotate to the unit base 3361 And in that the spur gear-like pivot pinion gear 3373 that is attached to, and a (see Figure 169, etc.).

  The unit base 3361 of the fixed side unit 3360 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape corresponds to the inside of the back box 3010, and is provided with an annular table housing portion 3361a so as to form the outer shape and contact four sides. There is. The table accommodation portion 3361a is configured of a rear wall portion formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width on the front surface of the general surface of the unit base 3361 and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion projecting forward from the outer periphery of the rear wall portion. ing. The table storage portion 3361a can store the swivel table 3380 inside the peripheral wall portion. The opening 3361 b of the unit base 3361 is formed to have a size corresponding to the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. As shown in FIG. 163 and the like, the unit base 3361 has a relief-like three-dimensional decoration formed on the front surface inside the table housing portion 3361 a.

  The table supporters 3362 are respectively provided on the upper side and the lower side with respect to the vertically extending axis passing through the center of the annular table housing portion 3361a in front view, and are provided two each on the left and right sides. ing. That is, six table supporters 3362 are provided, and are arranged near the apexes of the hexagon in contact with the table accommodating portion 3361 a.

  The guide pins 3363 project forward beyond the front end of the peripheral wall portion of the annular table housing portion 3361 a, and a plurality (eight in this case) are provided along the outer periphery of the table housing portion. The plurality of guide pins 3363 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the vertically extending axis passing through the center (turning center) of the table housing portion 3361 a. The four guide pins 3363 disposed on the right of the vertically extending axis passing through the pivot center are 35 degrees, 60 degrees, and 120 degrees clockwise from the upper vertex (upper end) of the table housing portion 3361 a. Each is equipped with a position of 142 degrees. More specifically, the guide pins 3363 at a 35 degree angle in the clockwise direction from the upper end of the table housing portion 3361a are separated from the guide pins 3363 adjacent in the clockwise direction at a 25 degree angle. The guide pins adjacent in the counterclockwise direction are separated at an angle of 70 degrees. The guide pins 3363 at a 60 degree angle clockwise from the upper end of the table housing portion 3361 a are opposite to the guide pins 3363 adjacent in the clockwise direction at a 60 degree angle Adjacent guide pins in a clockwise direction are separated by a 25 degree angle. Furthermore, the guide pin 3363 at an angle of 120 degrees in the clockwise direction from the upper end of the table housing portion 3361 a is opposite to the guide pin 3363 adjacent in the clockwise direction at an angle of 22 degrees and Adjacent guide pins in a clockwise direction are separated by a 60 degree angle. In addition, the guide pins 3363 at an angle of 142 degrees in the clockwise direction from the upper end of the table housing portion 3361 a are opposite to the guide pins 3363 adjacent in the clockwise direction at an angle of 76 degrees and Adjacent guide pins in the clockwise direction are separated at an angle of 22 degrees.

  In other words, the two uppermost guide pins 3363 on the left and right sides are separated by an angle of 70 degrees in the turning direction. Also, the two guide pins 3363 disposed on the upper and lower sides closest to the horizontally extending axis passing through the pivot center are spaced at an angle of 60 degrees in the pivot direction. Furthermore, the two lowermost guide pins 3363 on the left and right sides are separated by an angle of 76 degrees in the turning direction. The two guide pins 3363 obliquely on the left and right sides are separated at an angle of 25 degrees in the turning direction, and the two guide pins 3363 diagonally on the left and right sides are separated by an angle of 22 degrees in the turning direction. There is.

  These guide pins 3363 are formed so as to abut on the side of the slide frame 3630 when the slide frame 3630 of the back and rear upper movable presentation unit 3600 described later is in the retracted position, and the sub attached to the slide frame 3630 The movement of the effect display device 3640 in the turning direction can be restricted. If the angle between the two adjacent guide pins 3363 is 60 degrees or more, the slide frame 3630 of the back-rear upper movable presentation unit 3600 can be positioned between the two guide pins 3363. When the distance between the two guide pins 3363 is 60 degrees, the range of the pivotable angle of the slide frame 3630 (sub effect display device 3640) located therebetween is 0 degrees, and the distance between the two guide pins 3363 is 70. The range of the swing angle of the slide frame 3630 (sub effect display 3640) located between them is ± 5 degrees, and the interval between the two guide pins 3363 is 76 degrees between them. The range of the turning angle of the slide frame 3630 (sub effect display 3640) positioned is ± 8 degrees.

  On the other hand, when the angle between the two adjacent guide pins 3363 is smaller than 60 degrees, the outer side of the slide frame 3630 of the back-rear upper movable presentation unit 3600 abuts against the guide pin 3363 and the slide frame 3630 ( It is possible to restrict the movement of the sub effect display 3640) to the reverse position. Therefore, with the plurality of guide pins 3363, the back-up movable effect unit is positioned immediately above the pivot center (first pivot position), a position immediately to the right of the pivot center (second pivot position), and directly below the pivot center. The slide frame 3630 (sub effect display device 3640) is restricted to be able to move to the retracted position only at the position (third turning position), and the range of the turning angle in the turning direction is restricted at each position. can do.

  The pair of guide rollers 3365 are provided on the left and right sides of the table supporter 3362 disposed immediately below the turning center. The guide roller 3365 is a ball bearing.

  The turning detection sensor 3366 detects the turning position of the turning table 3380 by detecting the detection piece 3385 of the turning table 3380. The turning detection sensor 3366 is a first turning detection sensor 3366a for detecting that the turning table 3380 is at the first turning position, and a second for detecting that the turning table 3380 is at the second turning position. A turning detection sensor 3366 b and a third turning detection sensor 3366 c detecting that the turning table 3380 is at the third turning position are included.

  The swivel table 3380 of the back movable central movable effect unit 3350 has a circular, disc-like main body 3381 whose outer periphery is large enough to be accommodated in the table accommodation portion 3361 a of the unit base 3361 and the main body 3381 A through hole 3382 penetrating back and forth in the bottom wall in the front and back, and an annular flange 3383 projecting outward in a flat plate shape from the front end of the main body 3381 and having an outer diameter larger than that of the table housing 3361a; A rotating gear 3384 protruding forward from the front surface of the flange portion 3383 and facing radially outward gear teeth is arranged in an arc shape, and protruding outward from the flange portion 3383 and detected by a rotation detection sensor 3366 And a flat plate-like detection piece 3385.

  The swivel table 3380 is formed in an annular shape by the main body 3381, the through hole 3382 and the flange 3383, and the rear side of the flange 3383 is accommodated in the table accommodating portion 3361 a of the unit base 3361. In the swivel table 3380, the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 3383 abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the guide bush 3364 fitted in the guide pin 3363 and the outer peripheral surface of the guide roller 3365 to the stationary unit 3360. Is rotatably mounted about an axis extending in the back and forth direction. The swivel table 3380 is configured such that the table supporter 3362 slidably contacts the front surface of the flange portion 3383, and the front end of the table housing portion 3361a (peripheral wall portion) can slide on the rear surface of the flange portion 3383 It comes in contact. As a result, movement of the turning table 3380 in the front-rear direction with respect to the fixed unit 3360 is restricted.

  The pivoting gear 3384 of the pivoting table 3380 is clockwise from a position rotated approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the upper vertex with respect to the vertically extending axis passing through the center of the annular pivoting table 3380 It is formed to extend in an arc shape up to an angular position rotated approximately 280 degrees in the direction. When assembled in the back-to-back central movable effect unit 3350, the orbiting pinion gear 3373 is engaged with the orbiting gear 3384 from the outside, and the orbiting back drive motor 3370 orbits via the drive gear 3371 and the orbiting transmission gear 3372 When the pinion gear 3373 is rotated, the swivel table 3380 can be rotated via the swivel gear 3384.

  In addition, the swivel table 3380 is provided symmetrically on the upper surface of the main body 3381 above the through hole 3382 with the vertically extending axis passing through the center of the pivot being in the left-right direction, and extends linearly in the vertical direction A pair of fixed side rack gears 3386 and a plurality of guide bosses 3387 projecting cylindrically forward between the pair of fixed side rack gears 3386 on the front surface of the main body 3381 are provided. The pair of fixed side rack gears 3386 are in mesh with the slide gear 3620 attached to the slide plate 3610 of the back and rear upper movable effect unit 3600 described later, and the sub attached to the slide frame 3630 via the slide plate 3610 It is used to move the effect display device 3640 between the retracted position and the projecting position. In addition, a plurality of (four) guide bosses 3387 are provided symmetrically with respect to each other with the vertically extending axis passing through the center of rotation being two in number with a space between the upper and lower sides. The plurality of guide bosses 3387 are for movably attaching the slide plate 3610 of the back-rear upper movable presentation unit 3600 described later.

[5-9e-1. Back-to-back production by center movable production unit]
Next, effects using the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172. FIG. 170 is an explanatory view schematically showing the turning of the turn table in the counterclockwise direction in the back-rear center movable effect unit. FIG. 171 is an explanatory view schematically showing the turning of the turning table in the clockwise direction in the back movable center movable effect unit, and FIG. 172 schematically shows the turning of the turning table in the clockwise direction continued from FIG. FIG.

  In the back-to-back central movable effect unit 3350, in the normal state, the detection piece 3385 of the turning table 3380 is detected by the first turning detection sensor 3366a attached to the upper left in front view among the three turning detection sensors 3366 (See FIGS. 170 (a) and 171 (a)). That is, the turning table 3380 is in the state of the first turning position. In this normal state, when the orbiting pinion gear 3373 is rotated clockwise in a front view by the back-to-back orbiting drive motor 3370 via the drive gear 3371 and the orbiting transmission gear 3372, the orbiting table 3380 is counterclockwise. It can be rotated in the direction to a rotation angle of 80 degrees (see FIG. 170 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the turning pinion gear 3373 is rotated in the front counterclockwise direction by the back-to-back turning drive motor 3370 from the normal state, the turning table 3380 can be rotated in the clockwise direction. The swivel table 3380 can be brought into the state of the second swivel position by rotating the swivel table 3380 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (see FIG. 171 (b)). In the state of the second turning position, the detection piece 3385 of the turning table 3380 is detected by the second turning detection sensor 3366 b disposed at the upper right of the front view.

  When the swivel table 3380 is further rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the state of the second swivel position, the swivel table 3380 can be brought into the state of the third swivel position (see FIG. 172 (c)). In the state of the third turning position, the detection piece 3385 of the turning table 3380 is detected by the third turning detection sensor 3366c disposed at the lower right of the front view. The swivel table 3380 can be further rotated clockwise by 10 degrees from the state of the third swivel position (see FIG. 172 (d)).

  As described above, according to the back center movable effect unit 3350, the back back left movable effect unit 3400, the back back right movable effect unit 3500, the back back upper movable effect unit 3600, and the back back are attached to the turning table 3380. The lower movable effect unit 3700 is turned within a predetermined angle range (80 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to 190 degrees in the clockwise direction) centering on the turning center (the center of the main effect display device 1600) It can be done.

[5-9 f. Overall configuration of back-rear left movable effect unit and back-rear right movable effect unit]
Next, the back-rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back-rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. FIG. 173 is a perspective view of the back unit showing the back movable left production unit and the back movement movable unit from the front, and FIG. 174 is the rear unit showing the back movable back production unit and the back movable right playing unit It is the perspective view seen from. In FIG. 175, the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit are disassembled into the back rear left movable decoration unit, the back rear right movable decoration unit, the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit. Fig. 176 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front, and Fig. 176 shows a back-rear left movable effect unit and a back-rear right movable effect unit, a back-rear left movable decoration unit, a back-right movable decoration unit and a back-left slide unit, It is a disassembled perspective view disassembled into a back slide and a right slide unit and seen from the back.

  The back-to-back left movable effect unit 3400 and the back-to-back right movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 are attached to the front of the swivel table 3380 of the back-to-back center movable effect unit 3350 mounted in the back box 3010. The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 are respectively provided with a plurality of back back left rotating ornaments 3410 and back back right rotating ornaments 3510. It is attached to the front of the right movable decoration unit 3501 and the back of the back movable center movable presentation unit 3350 and is mounted on the front of the turning table 3380 so that the back left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back right movable decoration unit 3501 are away from the turning center. A back and left slide unit 3460 and a back and right slide unit 3560 are provided to move the separated position and the approach position closer to the pivot center.

  The back movable left movable effect unit 3400 and the back movable right movable effect unit 3500 back and left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back movable right movable decoration unit 3501 are parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (surface of the panel board 1110) A plurality of back-to-left and left-turn decorations 3410 and back-to-right and right-turn decorations 3510 are provided, which are rotatable about an axis along the surface. The back movable left movable effect unit 3400 and the back movable right movable effect unit 3500 back and left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back movable right decorative unit 3501 are back back left rotating decorative body 3410 and back back right rotating decorative body 3510 It is possible to change the decoration by changing the portion of the back and left rotation decorative body 3410 and the back and back right rotation decoration 3510 that can be seen from the player side (front side) by rotating.

  Also, on the front surface of the swing table 3380, the back movable left slide unit 3460 and the back movable right slide unit 3560 of the back movable left movable effect unit 3400 and the back movable right movable unit 3500 are vertically extending axis lines passing through the turning center. It is mounted symmetrically on the border. The back slide left slide unit 3460 and back back right slide unit 3560 move the back back left movable decoration unit 3401 and back back right movable decoration unit 3501 away from the center (turning center) of the turning table 3380 and the peripheral edge of the turning table 3380 A sliding movement can be made in a straight line between the separated position located near and the approaching position approaching the center of the turning table 3380.

  The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 rotate together with the turning table 3380 since the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 are attached to the turning table 3380 The back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 can turn about the turning center (about the center of the main effect display device 1600).

5-9 f-1. Back rear left movable decoration unit]
The back and rear left movable decoration unit 3401 in the back and rear left movable rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 177 is a front view of the back movable left display unit in the back unit and the back movable back decoration unit in the back movable right display unit, and FIG. 178 is a front view of the back movable back decoration unit in the back back FIG. 179 is a front perspective view of the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit in the back rear right movable effect unit, and FIG. 179 is a back view of the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit It is the perspective view which looked at back movable left decoration unit and back movable right decoration unit from back. FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 181 is a back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit Is an exploded perspective view as viewed from behind. FIG. 182 is an exploded perspective view of the back movable left decorative unit and the back movable right decorative unit disassembled from the back and the left rotating decorative unit and the back right rotating decorative unit and the rotary connecting mechanism Fig. 183 is an exploded perspective view of the back movable left decorative unit and the back movable right decorative unit disassembled from the back and left rotating decorative unit and the back right rotating decorative unit and the rotary connecting mechanism FIG. Fig. 184 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary connection mechanism in an assembled state, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rotary connection mechanism. FIG. 185 (a) is an explanatory view showing a movable member of the back movable left movable decoration unit in the back movable left movable effect unit from the left side, and FIG. 185 (b) is a back rear left movable decoration in the back movable left movable effect unit It is an explanatory view showing the movable member of a body unit from the front. FIG. 186 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back rear left rotation decoration in the back rear left movable decoration unit of the back rear left movable effect unit.

  As shown in the figure, the back movable left decoration unit 3401 of the back movable left movable effect unit 3400 includes a plurality of (here four) back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 to which a predetermined decoration is applied. The plurality of back left rotating ornaments 3410 are, from the bottom, a first back left rotating ornament 3410A, a second back left rotating ornament 3410B, a third back left rotating ornament 3410 C, and a fourth back It is considered to be a left-turning decorative body 3410D. Each of the back left rotating ornaments 3410 is formed in substantially the same shape.

  The back left rotational decoration 3410 is a semi-cylindrical bulging, and extends from the end of the first decorative portion 3411 a imitating the torso portion of the spotlight and the first decorative portion 3411 a in a disc shape diagonally A second decorative portion 3411 b imitating the lens portion of the lens, and a decorative body 3411 having a third decorative portion 3411 c extending flatly on the opposite side of the first decorative portion 3411 a and having a predetermined character, And a shaft portion 3412 protruding from two side surfaces intersecting with the end portion of the second decoration portion 3411 b in the decoration body 3411.

  The decoration main body 3411 of the back left rotational decoration 3410 is formed of a transparent member, and is partially decorated with a metallic luster. The decorative body 3411 is formed such that when the first decorative portion 3411 a is directed to the front, the second decorative portion 3411 b can be viewed in an oblique state. Although not shown, the third decorative portion 3411 c of the decorative body 3411 is decorated with a single character decoration that becomes one word by four back left rotating decorative bodies 3410.

  The four back-rear left-handed decorative members 3410 have their respective axis parts 3412 of a predetermined radius such that the respective second decorative parts 3411 b face the center side with the respective first decorative parts 3411 a facing the front. It is arranged along the arc.

  The back movable left decorative unit 3401 is attached to the front of a flat back rear left base 3420 extending in an arc shape with a predetermined width and the back rear left base 3420, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front The back rear left decoration substrate 3421 and the transparent back rear left base cover 3422 attached to the back rear left base 3420 so as to cover the front side of the back rear left decoration substrate 3421 are provided.

  The back left base 3420 is slidably inserted into the slide mounting portion 3420a slidably attached by the slide shaft 3462 of the back back left slide unit 3460 at the top and the slide guide 3463 of the back back left slide unit 3460 at the bottom. Cylindrical slide pin 3420b, and a pair of long slit-like slide slits 3420c which are vertically symmetrical near the left end in front view and are vertically vertically separated from the center in the vertical direction and extend vertically. And a detection piece 3420d which protrudes upward in a flat plate shape from the upper part and is detected by a slide detection sensor 3474 of the back rear left slide unit 3460. The slide pins 3465c of the slide arms 3465 of the back slide left slide unit 3460 are slidably inserted into the slide slits 3420c of the back base 3420.

  The back decoration left decoration board 3421 is mounted so that four LEDs correspond to one back rotation left rotation decoration 3410, and those four LEDs have the shaft portion 3412 of the back rotation left rotation decoration 3410. In between, two each are arranged. That is, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 are respectively disposed inside and outside of the arc in which the four back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 are arranged. The LEDs on the back left decorative substrate 3421 are full color LEDs.

  In addition, the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 is formed on the rear side of each of the upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back left rotation decoration 3410A and the lower shaft portion 3412 of the second back left rotation decoration 3410B. A bearing base 3423 rotatably supported and attached to the front of the back rear left base cover 3422, an upper shaft portion 3412 of the second back rear rotation decorative body 3410B and a third back rear rotation decorative body 3410 C A bearing base 3424 rotatably supported on the respective rear sides of the lower shaft portion 3412 and attached to the front surface of the back left base cover 3422, and an upper shaft portion 3412 of the third back left rotation decorative body 3410C. And a bearing base 3425 rotatably supported on the respective rear sides of the lower shaft portion 3412 on the lower side of the left rear decorative member 3410 D and attached to the front surface of the rear rear left base cover 3422. There.

  In addition, the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 rotatably supports the lower shaft portion 3412 of the first back back left rotation decoration 3410A and is attached to the front of the back rear left base cover 3422, The front side of the first bearing cover 3426 decorated and the shaft 3412 on the upper side of the first back-rear left rotating decoration 3410A and the lower shaft 3412 of the second back-left rotating decorative body 3410B A second bearing cover 3427 rotatably supported on the front of the bearing base 3423 and decorated on the front, and an upper shaft 3412 and a second back left rear decorative body 3410 B A third shaft that rotatably supports the front sides of the lower shaft portions 3412 on the lower side of the three rear left rotational decoration 3410 C and is attached to the front of the bearing base 3424 and is decorated on the front A support base rotatably supports front sides of a cover 3428, an upper shaft portion 3412 of the third back and left rotation decorative body 3410C, and a lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back and left rotation decorative body 3410D. The fourth bearing cover 3429 attached to the front of the top 3425 and decorated on the front, and the upper shaft 3412 of the fourth back rear left rotary decoration 3410 D are rotatably supported and the back rear left base And a fifth bearing cover 3430 attached to the front of the cover 3422 and decorated on the front.

  Furthermore, the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 is attached to the front of the back rear left base cover 3422 on the back side of the first bearing cover 3426, and the rotation axis is back back left base 3420 and back rear left base cover 3422 The rear back left drive motor 3431 protruding between them, the spur gear shaped drive gear 3432 attached to the rotation shaft of the back rear left drive motor 3431, and the drive gear 3432 mesh with the back rear left base 3420 A spur gear-like relay gear 3433 rotatably mounted on the upper and lower drive rack gears 3434a meshing with the relay gear 3433, an operation rack gear lower 3434b extending up and down above the drive rack gear 3434a, and The operating rack gear 3434c extends vertically above the lower operating rack gear 3434b. 3434b and actuating the rack gear on the 3434c is provided with a back left rear drive rack 3434 mounted slidably up and down by the back left rear base cover 3422 so as to be positioned on the front side of the back left rear base cover 3422.

  The back movable left decorative unit 3401 is a driven gear portion 3435a engaged with the lower operating rack gear 3434b of the back rear left drive rack 3434, and a cylindrical trunk portion 3435b protruding forward from the driven gear portion 3435a. And a transmission gear member having a bevel gear-like transmission gear portion 3435c formed at the front end of the body portion 3435b and rotatably mounted on a front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422 so as to extend back and forth Formed at the front end of the lower 3435 and the driven gear portion 3436a meshing with the actuating rack gear upper 3434c of the rear back left drive rack 3434, the cylindrical body portion 3436b projecting forward from the driven gear portion 3436a, and the body portion 3436b In the front of the rear base cover 3422, which has a bevel gear-like transmission gear portion 3436c A transmission gear member upper portion 3436 rotatably mounted about a rear-extending shaft, an upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back-rear left rotation decorative body 3410A, and an upper shaft portion of the third back-rear left rotation decorative body 3410C A bevel gear-shaped rotary gear 3437 is integrally rotatably attached to the 3412, and is in mesh with the transmission gear portion 3435c of the lower transmission gear member 3435 and the transmission gear portion 3436c of the upper transmission gear member 3436 respectively. And.

  Further, the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 has an arc-shaped gear portion 3438a meshing with the drive gear 3432, and a detection piece 3438b fanning out at a position different from the gear portion 3438a. The back of the left base 3420 is attached to the front of the back left base 3420 so as to detect the detection gear member 3438 rotatably attached to the front of the back left base 3420 and the detection piece 3438 b of the detection gear 3438 And a detection sensor 3439.

  In addition, the back movable left decorative unit 3401 includes a shaft portion 3412 on the upper side of the first back to back left rotating decorative member 3410A and a shaft portion 3412 on the lower side of the second back to back left rotating decorative member 3410B, and It has a rotary connection mechanism 3450 which connects the shaft portion 3412 on the upper side of the back left turn decorative body 3410 C and the lower shaft portion 3412 on the lower side of the fourth back left turn decorative body 3410 D so that they can transmit rotation. . The rotary connection mechanism 3450 includes two (a pair of) arm portions 3451 protruding from the tip of the shaft portion 3412 and a cross-shaped spider 3452 inserted between the arm portions 3451.

  More specifically, the two arm portions 3451 project from the end of the shaft portion 3412 in the circumferential direction at the same distance in the circumferential direction on the circumference separated from the center in the shaft portion 3412, Is formed narrower than the gap. In addition, the spider 3452 can be inserted into the four arms 3451 in a state in which one arm 3451 of the other shaft 3412 is inserted into the gap between the two arms 3451 in one shaft 3412. It has four cylindrical rod-like transmitting portions 3452a which project from the enclosed inside to between the arm portions 3451.

  When the back movable left decorative unit 3401 is assembled, the four back rear left rotating decorative members 3410 are vertically arrayed in a front view, and the second back rear rotating decorative member 3410 B and The respective shaft portions 3412 are arranged along a horizontal line passing between the three back and left rotating ornaments 3410 C and with respect to an arc centered on the right side thereof. In addition, the respective shaft portions 3412 of the four back and left rotation ornaments 3410 are disposed at the same position in the front-rear direction. That is, the respective shaft portions 3412 are arranged on the same plane parallel to the plane of the game area 5a. Furthermore, in the assembled state, the four back and left rotating ornaments 3410 are mounted immovably in the direction in which the shaft 3412 extends.

  Further, in the state assembled to the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401, the transmission gear portion 3435c of the transmission gear lower portion 3435 and the transmission gear portion 3436c of the transmission gear upper portion 3436 are the bearing lower portion 3423 and the bearing upper portion 3425, respectively. Each penetrates and is exposed forward. The shaft portions 3412 of the two back rear left-handed decorative bodies 3410 adjacent to each other in front of the transmission gear portion 3435c and the transmission gear portion 3436c of the transmission gear lower portion 3435 and the transmission gear upper portion 3436 are rotational coupling mechanisms 3450 Are each connected by

  Furthermore, in the state assembled to the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401, the front side of the back rear left drive motor 3431 is covered with the first bearing cover 3426, and the two rotary connection mechanisms 3450 are the second bearing cover 3427 and the second The four bearing covers 3429 cover them respectively to improve the appearance of the back movable left movable effect unit 3400.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186 and the like. In the normal state, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 of the back movable left movable effect unit 3400 has the four back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 move the first decorative portion 3411 a of the decorative body 3411 forward (front). It is in the state of being directed (the state of the first effect position). In this state, as shown in FIG. 185 and FIG. 186 (a), the back and rear left drive rack 3434 which slides up and down is located at the lower moving end. The relay gear 3433 is engaged near the upper end of the drive rack gear 3434a of the rear back left drive rack 3434, and the driven gear portion 3435a of the lower transmission gear member 3435 and near the upper ends of the lower working rack gear 3434b and the upper working rack gear 3434c. The driven gear portions 3436a of the transmission gear upper 3436 are in mesh with each other. In addition, the back-rear left rotation detection sensor 3439 detects a detection piece 3438 b of the detection gear member 3438.

  From this normal state, when the relay gear 3433 is rotated clockwise in a front view via the drive gear 3432 by the back drive left drive motor 3431, the drive rack gear 3434a engaged with the relay gear 3433 drives the back drive back. The left drive rack 3434 will slide upward. When the back driving left drive rack 3434 slides upward, the driven gear portion 3435a of the lower transmission gear member 3435 and the driven gear portion 3436a of the upper transmission gear member 3436 meshing with the lower operating rack gear 3434b and the upper operating rack gear 3434c, respectively. Lower transmission gear member 3435 and upper transmission gear member 3436 rotate in the counterclockwise direction at the same speed.

  When the lower transmission gear member 3435 and the upper transmission gear member 3436 are respectively rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the respective rotation gears 3437 meshing with the respective transmission gear portions 3435c and 3436c are counterclockwise in a bottom view It will rotate around. As a result, the first back-rear left rotating decorative body 3410A and the third back-rear left rotating decorative body 3410C through the shaft portion 3412 to which the rotating gear 3437 is attached, and the disk-shaped second decorative portion 3411b moves forward. As it moves, it will rotate about each shaft 3412.

  Then, the upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back left rotation decorative body 3410A is rotatably connected to the lower shaft portion 3412 of the second back left rotation decorative body 3410B by the rotation connection mechanism 3450. Since the upper shaft portion 3412 of the third back left rotation decorative body 3410 C is rotatably connected to the lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back left rotation decorative body 3410 D by the rotation connection mechanism 3450, The rotation of the first back-to-left rotation ornament 3410A and the third back-to-left rotation ornament 3410C are respectively rotated through the respective rotation connection mechanisms 3450 to the second back-to-left rotation ornament 3410B and the fourth back-to-left rotation It is transmitted to the decoration 3410D and the second back left rotation decoration 3410 B and the fourth back left rotation decoration 3410 D are the first back left rotation decoration 3410 A and the third back left rotation decoration 3410 C. Flip substantially so that the simultaneously rotated in the direction.

  The rotation transmission by the rotation connection mechanism 3450 will be described in detail by rotating the shaft 3412 on the side of the first back-rear left rotation decorative body 3410A and the third back-rear left rotation decoration 3410C through the rotation gear 3437. The transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 is in contact with the side surface of the arm portion 3451, and the transmission portion 3452a is the tip of the shaft portion 3412 on the second back left rotation decoration 3410B and the fourth back left rotation decoration 3410D. By being in contact with the side surface of the arm 3451, the second back-rear left rotating decorative body 3410B and the fourth back-rear left rotating decorative body 3410D side shaft portion 3412 is rotated.

  At this time, the first back and left rotation decorative body 3410A and the third back and left rotation decorative body 3410C side shaft portion 3412, and the second back and left rotation decoration 3410B and fourth back and left rotation decoration 3410 D Since the direction in which the shaft portions 3412 extend in the direction different from each other is different, the plane passing through the centers of the four transmission portions 3452 a of the cross-shaped spider 3452 is the central axis of the two shaft portions 3412 in different extending directions. The four transmitting portions 3452a slide relative to each other in the extending direction of the arm portion 3451 between the arm portions 3451 so as to be in agreement with the plane including the bisector of the corner of It becomes. Thereby, the rotation of the shaft portion 3412 on the side of the first back and back left rotation decoration 3410A and the third back and left rotation decoration 3410 C is transmitted smoothly, and the second back left rotation decoration 3410 B and fourth back The shaft portion 3412 on the left turn decorative body 3410D side can be rotated.

  In this manner, the first back-rear left rotation decorative body 3410A and the second back-rear left rotation decoration 3410B, and the third back-rear left rotation decoration 3410C and the Since the four back and left rotation ornaments 3410 D are respectively connected, the four back and left rotation ornaments 3410 can be simultaneously rotated in the same direction at the same speed by driving the back and left drive motor 3431.

  When the relay gear 3433 is rotated clockwise in a front view by the back drive left drive motor 3431 to slide the back drive left drive rack 3434 upward, the gear portion 3438 a engaged with the drive gear 3432 is As a result, the detection gear member 3438 rotates clockwise in a front view.

  Then, when the detection gear member 3438 rotates in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front and the detection piece 3438 b is in the non-detection state by the back rear left rotation detection sensor 3439, the drive of the back rear left drive motor 3431 is stopped. And the four back and left rotation decorative bodies 3410 are stopped in a state (the state of the second effect position rotated approximately 62 degrees from the normal state) with the respective second decoration portions 3411 b facing forward (front). (See FIG. 186 (b)). In this state, since the disk-shaped second decoration 3411 b, which simulates a spotlight lens, is facing forward, four round decorations are lined up, and a decoration different from the normal state is displayed. It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 189 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the back rear left drive rack 3434 is slid to the upper moving end via the drive gear 3432 and the relay gear 3433 by the back rear left drive motor 3431, the four back rear left rotating ornaments 3410 are respectively normal With respect to the state of (3), it is turned (reversed) by about 180 degrees around each shaft 3412 (the state of the third effect position) (see FIG. 186C). In this state, the third decorative portion 3411c with the character decoration is facing forward (front), and the player can be made to suggest the arrival of a chance by the words and phrases formed by the four character decoration In addition, it is possible to show the player a decoration different from the normal state (see FIG. 189 (c)).

  In the case where the plurality of back rear left rotating ornaments 3410 are returned to the normal state, the back back left drive motor 3431 can be returned to the normal state by rotating in the opposite direction to the above.

  Thus, the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 has its respective axes within an angle range of about 180 degrees which reverses the back rear left rotation decoration 3410 from the normal state by the back back left drive motor 3431. It can be simultaneously rotated in the same direction about the portion 3412. Thereby, the decoration pointing to the front can be changed (changed) in various ways. In addition, by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of the back rear left decorative substrate 3421, the four back rear left rotating ornaments 3410 are independently light emitting and decorated with various colors and brightness. be able to.

5-9 f-2. Back rear right movable decoration unit]
The back-to-back right movable decoration unit 3501 in the back-to-back right movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 177 to 184, FIG. 187 and FIG. FIG. 187 (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the movable member of the back movable right decoration unit in the back movable right moving effect unit, and FIG. 187 (b) is the back rear right movable decoration in the back rear right movable effect unit It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member of a unit from right side. FIG. 188 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back rear right rotation decoration in the back rear right movable decoration unit of the back rear right movable effect unit.

  As shown in the figure, the back movable right decorative unit 3501 of the back movable right movable effect unit 3500 includes a plurality of (here four) back rear right rotating decorative members 3510 to which a predetermined decoration is applied. The plurality of back right rotating ornaments 3510 are, from the bottom, first back right rotating ornament 3510 A, second back right rotating ornament 3510 B, third back right rotating ornament 3510 C, and fourth back It is considered to be a right turn decorative body 3510D. Each of the back right rotation ornaments 3510 is formed in substantially the same shape.

  Back-to-right rotating decorative body 3510 is a semi-cylindrical bulging, and extends from the end of the first decorative portion 3511 a imitating the torso portion of the spotlight and the first decorative portion 3511 a in a disc shape diagonally A second decorative portion 3511 b imitating the lens portion of the lens, and a decorative main body 3511 having a third decorative portion 3511 c extending flatly on the opposite side of the first decorative portion 3511 a and given a predetermined character; And a shaft 3512 protruding from two side surfaces intersecting with the end of the second decoration 3511 b in the decoration body 3511.

  The back body main body 3511 of the back right spin decoration 3510 is formed of a transparent member, and partially decorated with a metallic luster. The decorative body 3511 is formed such that when the first decorative portion 3511 a is directed to the front, the second decorative portion 3511 b can be viewed in an oblique state. Although not shown, the third decorative portion 3511 c of the decorative body 351 is decorated with one back of a letter by one of four back-right-turn decorative bodies 3510.

  In the four back right rotation ornaments 3510, the respective shaft portions 3512 have a predetermined radius so that the respective second decorative portions 3511b face the center side with the respective first decorative portions 3511a directed to the front. It is arranged along the arc.

  The back movable right decorative unit 3501 is attached to the front of the flat back rear right base 3520 extending in an arc shape with a predetermined width and the back rear right base 3520, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front The rear back right decoration substrate 3521 and the transparent back rear right base cover 3522 attached to the back rear right base 3520 so as to cover the front side of the back rear right decoration substrate 3521 are provided.

  The back right base 3520 is slidably inserted into the slide mounting portion 3520 a slidably mounted on the top by the slide shaft 3562 of the back slide right slide unit 3560 and the slide guide 3563 of the back back right slide unit 3560. Cylindrical slide pin 3520b, and a pair of long slit-like slide slits 3520c which are vertically symmetrical near the left end in front view and are vertically vertically separated from the center in the vertical direction and extend vertically. And a detection piece 3520 d which protrudes upward in a flat plate shape from the upper part and is detected by the slide detection sensor 3574 of the rear right slide unit 3560. The respective slide pins 3565c of the pair of slide arms 3565 of the back right slide unit 3560 are slidably inserted into the pair of slide slits 3520c of the back right base 3520, respectively.

  The back decoration right decoration board 3521 is mounted so that four LEDs correspond to one back rotation right rotation decoration 3510, and the four LEDs back the axis part 3512 of the back rotation right rotation decoration 3510 In between, two each are arranged. That is, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear right decoration substrate 3521 are respectively disposed on the inside and the outside of the arc in which the four back rear rotating ornaments 3510 are arranged. In addition, LED of the back decoration right decoration board | substrate 3521 is taken as full color LED.

  In addition, the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 is formed by the respective rear sides of the upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back rear rotation decoration member 3510A and the lower shaft portion 3512 of the second back rear rotation rotation member 3510B. The lower bearing base 3523 rotatably supported and attached to the front of the rear right base cover 3522, the upper shaft portion 3512 of the second rear right rotating decoration 3510B and the third rear right rotating decoration 3510C The back of the lower shaft 3512 is rotatably supported and the back of the bearing base 3524 is attached to the front of the right base cover 3522 and the upper shaft 3512 of the third back right rotation decoration 3510 C. And a bearing base 3525 rotatably supported on the respective rear sides of the lower shaft portion 3512 on the lower side of the right-turn decorative body 3510 D and mounted on the front surface of the rear right base cover 3522. There.

  In addition, the back rear movable decorative unit 3501 rotatably supports the lower shaft portion 3512 of the first back rear rotating decorative member 3510A and is attached to the front of the back rear right base cover 3522 and is mounted on the front. The front side of the first bearing cover 3526 decorated and the shaft 3512 on the upper side of the first back-right rotation decoration 3510A and the lower shaft 3512 of the second back-right rotation decoration 3510B And a second bearing cover 3527 attached to the front surface of the lower bearing base 3523 so as to rotatably support the second bearing cover 3527 and decorated on the front surface thereof; A third shaft that rotatably supports the front side of each of the lower shaft portions 3512 on the lower side of the right-turn decorative body 3510C and is attached to the front of the bearing base 3524 and decorated on the front. The front side of the cover 3528 and the shaft 3512 on the upper side of the third back-right rotating ornament 3510 C and the lower shaft 3512 of the fourth back right-rotating ornament 3510 D are rotatably supported and bearing stands The fourth bearing cover 3529 attached to the front of the upper 3525 and decorated on the front, and the upper shaft 3512 of the fourth rear right rotating ornament 3510 D are rotatably supported and the rear right base And a fifth bearing cover 3530 attached to the front of the cover 3522 and decorated on the front.

  Furthermore, the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 is attached to the front of the back rear right base cover 3522 at the back side of the first bearing cover 3526, and the rotation axis is back back right base 3520 and the back rear right base cover 3522 The rear back right drive motor 3531 protruding between them, the spur gear shaped drive gear 3532 attached to the rotation shaft of the back rear right drive motor 3531, and the drive gear 3532 mesh with the back rear right base 3520 Gear-like relay gear 3533 rotatably mounted on the upper and lower drive rack gears 3534a meshing with the relay gear 3533; lower working rack gear 3534b extending up and down above the drive rack gear 3534a; The operating rack gear 3534c extends up and down above the lower operating rack gear 3534b. 3534b and actuating the rack gear on the 3534c is provided with a back right rear drive rack 3534 mounted slidably up and down by the back right after the base cover 3522 so as to be positioned on the front side of the back right after the base cover 3522.

  The back movable right decorative unit 3501 is a driven gear portion 3535a engaged with the lower operation rack gear 3534b of the back rear right drive rack 3534, and a cylindrical trunk 3535b protruding forward from the driven gear portion 3535a. And a transmission gear member having a bevel gear-like transmission gear portion 3535c formed at the front end of the body portion 3535b and rotatably mounted on a front surface of the back rear right base cover 3522 so as to extend back and forth Formed at the front end of the lower 3535 and the driven gear portion 3536a meshing with the working rack gear upper 3534c of the back rear right drive rack 3534, the cylindrical body 3536b protruding forward from the driven gear 3536a, and the body 3536b And has a bevel gear-like transmission gear portion 3536c, and the back is on the front of the right base cover 3522 A transmission gear member upper 3536 rotatably mounted about a rear-extending shaft, an upper shaft 3512 of the first back-rear right rotation ornament 3510A, and an upper shaft of the third back-right rotation ornament 3510C A bevel gear-shaped rotary gear 3537 is mounted integrally with the 3512 so as to be integrally rotatable, and is engaged with the transmission gear portion 3535 c of the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the transmission gear portion 3536 c of the upper transmission gear member 3536. And.

  Furthermore, the back movable right decorative unit 3501 has an arc-shaped gear portion 3538a meshing with the drive gear 3532, and a detection piece 3538b fanned out at a position different from the gear portion 3538a. The back of the right base 3520 is mounted on the front of the back right base 3520 so as to detect the detection gear member 3538 rotatably mounted on the front of the back right base 3520 and the detection piece 3538 b of the detection gear 3538 And a detection sensor 3539.

  In addition, the back movable right decorative unit 3501 includes the first shaft 3512 on the upper side of the first back-right rotating decoration 3510A and the lower shaft 3512 of the second back-right rotating decoration 3510B, and It has a rotary connection mechanism 3450 which connects the shaft portion 3512 on the upper side of the back right rotating ornament 3510C and the lower shaft portion 3512 on the lower side of the fourth back right rotating ornament 3510 D so as to transmit rotation. . The rotary connection mechanism 3450 has the same configuration as the rotary connection mechanism 3450 of the back-rear left movable effect unit 3400, and the detailed description is omitted here.

  When the back movable right decorative unit 3501 is assembled, the four back right rotating decorative members 3510 are vertically arranged in a row in front view, and the second back right rotating decorative member 3510 B and The respective shaft portions 3512 are arranged along a horizontal line passing between the third back and the right rotating ornament 3510 C, and with respect to an arc centered on the left side thereof. In addition, the respective shaft portions 3512 of the four back right rotation ornaments 3510 are disposed at the same position in the front-rear direction. That is, the respective shaft portions 3512 are arranged on the same plane parallel to the plane of the game area 5a. Furthermore, in the assembled state, the four back right rotating ornaments 3510 are mounted immovably in the direction in which the shaft 3512 extends.

  When assembled in the back movable right decorative unit 3501, the transmission gear portion 3535c of the transmission gear lower portion 3535 and the transmission gear portion 3536c of the transmission gear upper portion 3536 are respectively the bearing lower portion 3523 and the bearing upper portion 3525. Each penetrates and is exposed forward. At the front of the transmission gear portion 3535c and the transmission gear portion 3536c of the transmission gear lower 3535 and the transmission gear upper 3536, shaft portions 3512 of two adjacent back rear right rotating ornaments 3510 are connected by a rotary connection mechanism 3450. Are each connected by

  Furthermore, in the state assembled to the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501, the front side of the back rear right drive motor 3531 is covered with the first bearing cover 3526, and the two rotary connection mechanisms 3450 are the second bearing cover 3527 and the second The four bearing covers 3529 cover them respectively to improve the appearance of the back movable right effect unit 3500.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. In the normal condition, the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 of the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 has four back right rotation decorations 3510 move the first decoration 3511 a of the decoration main body 3511 forward (front). It is in the state of being directed (the state of the first effect position). In this state, as shown in FIG. 187 and FIG. 188 (a), the back and rear right drive rack 3534 which slides up and down is located at the lower moving end. The relay gear 3533 is engaged near the upper end of the drive rack gear 3534a of the rear right drive rack 3534, and the driven gear portion 3535a of the lower transmission gear member 3535 near the upper ends of the lower working rack gear 3534b and the upper working rack gear 3534c. The driven gear portions 3536a of the transmission gear upper 3536 are in mesh with each other. The back right rotation detection sensor 3539 detects a detection piece 3538 b of the detection gear member 3538.

  From this normal state, when the relay gear 3533 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view through the drive gear 3532 by the back-right drive motor 3531, the back of the drive rack gear 3534a engaged with the relay gear 3533 The rear right drive rack 3534 slides upward. When the rear right drive rack 3534 slides upward, the driven gear portion 3535a of the transmission gear lower 3535 and the driven gear portion 3536a of the transmission gear upper 3536 meshing with the lower operation rack gear 3534b and the upper operation rack gear 3534c, respectively. Lower transmission gear member 3535 and upper transmission gear member 3536 rotate at the same speed in the clockwise direction.

  When the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the upper transmission gear member 3536 rotate in the clockwise direction, the respective rotation gears 3537 meshing with the respective transmission gear portions 3535c and 3536c are clockwise in a bottom view. It will rotate in the direction. Thus, the first back-right rotation decorative body 3510A and the third back-right rotation decorative body 3510C are pivoted forward of the disk-shaped second decoration 3511b through the shaft portion 3512 to which the rotation gear 3537 is attached. As it moves, it rotates around each shaft 3512.

  Then, the upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back-right rotation decorative body 3510A is rotatably coupled to the lower shaft portion 3512 of the second back-right rotation decorative body 3510B by the rotation connection mechanism 3450. Since the upper shaft portion 3512 of the third back right rotation decorative body 3510 C is rotatably connected to the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back right rotation decorative body 3510 D by the rotation connection mechanism 3450, The rotation of the first back-to-right rotation ornament 3510A and the third back-to-right rotation ornament 3510C are respectively rotated through the respective rotation connection mechanisms 3450, the second back-to-right rotation ornament 3510B and the fourth back-to-right rotation The second back rear right rotating decoration 3510 B and the fourth back rear right rotating decoration 3510 D are transmitted to the decoration 3510 D, and the first back rear rotating right decoration 3510 A and the third back right rotating decoration 3510 C Flip substantially so that the simultaneously rotated in the direction.

  The rotation transmission by the rotation connection mechanism 3450 will be described in detail by rotating the shaft portion 3512 on the side of the first back-right rotation decorative body 3510A and the third back-right rotation decoration body 3510C through the rotation gear 3537. The transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 is in contact with the side surface of the arm portion 3451, and the transmission portion 3452a is the tip of the shaft 3512 on the second back right rotation decoration 3510B and the fourth back right rotation decoration 3510D. By being in contact with the side surface of the arm portion 3451, the second back rear right rotating decorative body 3510B and the fourth back rear right rotating decorative body 3510D side shaft portion 3512 is rotated.

  At this time, the first back-right rotation decoration 3510A and the third back-right rotation decoration 3510C side shaft portion 3512, the second back-right rotation decoration 3510B and the fourth back-right rotation decoration 3510D The central axis of the two axial parts 3512 in the extending direction of the plane passing through the centers of the four transmission parts 3452a of the cross-shaped spider 3452 is different from the case where the axial parts 3512 of the two extend in different directions. The four transmitting portions 3452a slide relative to each other in the extending direction of the arm portion 3451 between the arm portions 3451 so as to be in agreement with the plane including the bisector of the corner of It becomes. Thereby, the rotation of the shaft portion 3512 on the side of the first back-to-right rotation decoration 3510A and the third back-to-right rotation decoration 3510C is transmitted smoothly, and the second back-to-right rotation decoration 3510B and the fourth back The shaft 3512 on the side of the right turn decorative body 3510D can be rotated.

  In this manner, the first back-rear right rotation ornament 3510A and the second back-right rotation ornament 3510B, and the third back-right rotation ornament 3510C and Since the four back right rotating ornaments 3510 D are respectively connected, the four back right rotating ornaments 3510 can be simultaneously rotated in the same direction at the same speed by driving the back right drive motor 3531.

  When the relay gear 3533 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the rear right drive motor 3531 in order to slide the rear right drive rack 3534 upward, the gear portion 3538a meshing with the drive gear 3532 The detection gear member 3538 rotates counterclockwise in a front view.

  Then, when the detection gear member 3538 rotates in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and the detection piece 3538 b is in the non-detection state by the back-right rotation detection sensor 3539, the driving of the back-right drive motor 3531 is stopped. Then, the four back right rotating ornaments 3510 stop in a state (the state of the second effect position rotated approximately 62 degrees from the normal state) with the respective second decorative portions 3511b facing forward (front). (See FIG. 188 (b)). In this state, since the disk-shaped second decorative portion 3511b, which simulates the lens of the spotlight, faces forward, four round decorations are lined up, and a decoration different from the normal state is displayed. It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 189 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the back rear right drive rack 3534 is slid to the upper moving end via the drive gear 3532 and the relay gear 3533 by the back rear right drive motor 3531, the four back rear right rotating ornaments 3510 are each normal With respect to the state of (1), the state is turned (reversed) by about 180 degrees around the respective shaft portions 3512 (the state of the third effect position) (see FIG. 188 (c)). In this state, the third decorative portion 3511c with the character decoration is facing forward (front), and the word formed by the decoration of the four characters can make the player suggest the arrival of a chance In addition, it is possible to show the player a decoration different from the normal state (see FIG. 189 (c)).

  In the case where the plurality of back right rotating ornaments 3510 are returned to the normal state, the back back right drive motor 3531 can be returned to the normal state by rotating in the opposite direction to the above.

  In this manner, the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 has its respective axes within an angle range of about 180 degrees which reverses the back rear right rotation decoration 3510 from the normal state by the back rear right drive motor 3531. It can be simultaneously rotated in the same direction about the portion 3512. Thereby, the decoration pointing to the front can be changed (changed) in various ways. In addition, by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of the back rear right decoration substrate 3521, the four back rear rotating ornaments 3510 are independently light emitting and decorated with various colors and brightness. be able to.

5-9 f-3. Effects by back-rear left movable decoration unit and back-right movable decoration unit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the movable rendering using the back-rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back-right movable decoration unit 3501 in the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 will be mainly referred to Explain. Fig. 189 (a) shows the back rear left rotation decoration and the back rear right rotation decoration in the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit. It is a front view shown in the state of a normal 1st presentation position, (b) is a front view showing a back rotation left rotation decoration body and a back rotation right rotation decoration body in a state rotated to the 2nd presentation position, c) is a front view showing the back and left rotation ornament and the back and right rotation ornament and rotated to the third effect position.

  The back movable left movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 and the back movable left decorative unit 3401 and the back movable right decorative unit 3501 in the back movable right moving unit 3500 are disposed to be separated left and right. The main effect display device 1600 faces forward from between (see FIG. 135 and the like). As shown in FIG. 189 (a), the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 are, as shown in FIG. Also, the back right rotation decorative body 3510 is in a state of a first effect position in which the first decorative portion 3411 a and the first decorative portion 3511 a are directed forward. In this state, the back rear left decoration substrate 3421 and the back rear right decoration substrate 3521 emit light by emitting four LEDs corresponding to the back rear left rotation decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration 3510. The whole of the back left turn decoration 3410 and the back right turn decoration 3510 can be made to emit light in various colors.

  From this normal state, the back rear left rotation decoration 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration 3510 are respectively directed by the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 in the direction in which the respective inner end faces forward. When it is rotated about 62 degrees around the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512, the second back decoration portion 3411b and the second decoration portion 3511b in the back back left rotation decoration 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration 3510 are forward It will be in the state of the 2nd production position which turned. In this state, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which four round second decoration portions 3411 b and second decoration portions 3511 b are arranged along the circumference. When the LEDs on the inner side of the back rear left decoration substrate 3421 and the back rear right decoration substrate 3521 are made to emit light in the state of the second effect position, the disk shape in the back rear left rotation decoration 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration 3510 The second decorative portion 3411 b and the second decorative portion 3511 b can be made to emit light and be decorated, and a light emission effect can be shown to the player that light is emitted from the spotlight.

  From the state of the second effect position, by the back-rear left drive motor 3431 and the back-right drive motor 3531, the back-rear left-turn decoration 3410 and the back-right rotation decoration 3510 are directed to the front of each second decoration The portion 3411 b and the second decorative portion 3511 b extend around the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 in a direction to face the outside of the arc in which the back rear left rotation decoration 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration 3510 are arranged. When it is rotated by 180 degrees from the state of the first effect position, the third decorative portion 3511c to which the decoration of the character in the back rear left rotation decoration 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration 3510 is directed forward It will be in the state of the third effect position. In this state, it is possible to show the player a word or phrase formed by the decoration of each of the four characters, and the word can make the player indicate the arrival of a chance. Also, in the state of the third effect position, in the back rear left decoration substrate 3421 and the back rear right decoration substrate 3521, four LEDs corresponding to the back rear left rotation decoration 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration 3510 By emitting light, the third decorative portion 3411 c and the third decorative portion 3511 c of each of the back-and-left rotation ornament 3410 and the back-right rotation ornament 3510 can be illuminated and decorated in various colors.

  In the back-rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back-right movable decoration unit 3501, the back-rear left rotation decoration 3410 and the back-right rotation decoration 3510 can be separately rotated, respectively. By appropriately combining the rotation and the light emission decoration, a variety of effects can be shown to the player.

  Thus, according to the back movable left movable effect unit 3400 and the back movable right movable effect unit 3500, according to the back movable left decorative unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative unit 3501, the adjacent back rear left rotating decoration A plurality of backs in which the body 3410, the back 34, and the shafts 3512 of the back right spin decoration 3510 extend in mutually different directions, and the respective shafts 3412 and 3512 are disposed on the same plane. A back left rotation decoration 3410 and a back rotation right rotation decoration 3510 are provided, and the shaft 3412 and the shafts 3512 of the back back left rotation decoration 3410 and the back right rotation decoration 3510 are adjacent to each other from the universal shaft joint The first back and left rotation decorative body 3410 is connected by the back and left drive motor 3431 and the back and back right drive motor 3531. When the shaft 3412 and the shaft 3512 of the third back left rotation decoration 3410 C, the first back back right rotation decoration 3510 A, and the third back right rotation decoration 3510 C are rotated, through the rotation connection mechanism 3450 On the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the other second back left rotation decoration 3410 B and the fourth back left rotation decoration 3410 D and the second back right rotation decoration 3510 B and fourth back right rotation decoration 3510 D The rotation is transmitted, and the plurality of back and left rotation ornaments 3410 and the back and right rotation ornaments 3510 can be simultaneously rotated.

  This makes it possible to reduce the number of back-to-back left drive motors 3431 and back-to-back right drive motors 3531 to the back-to-back left-turn decorative body 3410 and back-to-back right-turn decoration 3510 as much as possible. The space required for the left drive motor 3431 and the back right drive motor 3531 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the space required for the plurality of back left rotation decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration 3510 is relative It can be made wide. Therefore, it is possible to widen the space of the back and left rotation decorative body 3410 and the back and back right rotation decoration 3510, so the rotation range of the back and back left rotation decoration 3410 and the back and right rotation decoration 3510 is large. To make the movement more enjoyable, to make the back-to-left rotation ornament 3410 or the back-to-right rotation ornament 3510 larger and stand out, or to make the back-to-left rotation ornament 3410 or back-to-right rotation decoration Since the impact when rotating by increasing the number of bodies 3510 can be enhanced, the rendering effect by the movement or decoration of the plurality of back rear left rotating ornaments 3410 and the back rear right rotating ornament 3510 is further enhanced. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, the first back-to-left rotation ornament 3410A and the third back-to-left rotation ornament 3410C and the first back-to-right rotation ornament 3510A and the third back-to-right rotation ornament 3510C are back-to-back left drive motor 3431 or back When it is rotated by the rear right drive motor 3531, a plurality of back rear left rotating ornaments 3410 and back rear right rotating ornaments 3510 in which the respective shaft portions 3412 and shaft portions 3512 extend in different directions via the rotary connection mechanism 3450 Since it is possible to rotate at the same time, it is possible to show the player a motion (a movable effect) having a sense of unity while feeling that the motions of the plurality of back rear left rotating ornaments 3410 and the back rear right rotating ornaments 3510 are disturbed. It is possible to further enhance the rendering effect by the plurality of back-and-back left-turn decorative bodies 3410 and the back-and-back right-turn decorative bodies 3510. At this time, since the plurality of back-and-left rotating ornaments 3410 and the respective shafts 3412 and shafts 3512 of the back-right rotating ornament 3510 are arranged on the same plane, the plurality of players It is possible to make it easy to recognize that the back-to-left rotation ornament 3410 or the back-to-right rotation ornament 3510 belongs to the same group, and a plurality of back-to-left rotation ornaments 3410 or back-to-right rotation ornaments Even when the 3510 rotates at the same time, the player does not give a sense of incongruity, and enjoys the movement (the movable effect) of the plurality of back-to-left and left-turn decorative bodies 3410 and back-to-right rotating decorative bodies 3510 that rotate simultaneously. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Furthermore, two (pair) arm parts 3451 are made to project from the tips of the shaft parts 3412 and the shaft parts 3512 of the two back-to-back left rotating ornaments 3410 and the back-to-right rotating ornaments 3510 that are adjacent to each other. Since the number of arm portions 3451 is minimized, the circumferential gap between the arm portions 3451 can be made as wide as possible without inserting the outer diameter of the arm portions 3451. The transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 can be made thick enough. Therefore, since the damage of the spider 3452 can be reduced by making the transmission part 3452a of the spider 3452 as thick as possible, the game is interrupted due to the damage during the game and the player feels uncomfortable. Can be avoided, and a drop in interest for the player's game can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to suppress the enlargement of the rotary connection mechanism 3450 (universal shaft joint), the space for the back rear left rotary decoration 3410 and the back rear right rotary decoration 3510 is set relative The back rotation rotation body 3410 or the back rotation rotation body 3510 can be enlarged to make the movement more enjoyable, or the back rotation body 3410 or back rotation. It is possible to make the back right rotation decorative body 3510 larger in size and stand out, or to increase the impact when rotating the back left rotation decoration 3410 or the back right rotation decoration 3510 by increasing the number of rotations. A plurality of back-to-left and left-turn decorations 3410 and back-to-right and right-turn decorations 3510 can further enhance the presentation effect by the movement and decoration, etc. It can be suppressed lower.

  Furthermore, since the rotation is transmitted through the spider 3452, the time lag of the rotation transmission due to the expansion and contraction (spring constant) of the rubber and the spring as compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted using the rubber and the spring. Can be simultaneously removed, and the plurality of back-and-left rotating ornaments 3410 and the back-and-right rotating ornaments 3510 can be simultaneously rotated. Therefore, when the back rear left rotation decoration 3410 or the back rear right rotation decoration 3510 is rotated by the back rear left drive motor 3431 or the back rear right drive motor 3531, the plurality of back rear left rotation decorations 3410 or the back Since the back right rotation decoration 3510 is simultaneously rotated, the plurality of back back left rotation decoration 3410 and the back back rotation right rotation decoration 3510 are delayed in turn, resulting in an unnatural feeling, and the player is opposed to the player. It is possible to avoid giving a sense of incongruity, and enjoy the movement of a plurality of back-to-left and left-turn ornaments 3410 and back-to-right and right-turn ornaments 3510 having a sense of unity to the player to suppress a decrease in interest. be able to.

  In addition, the transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 is comprised of a first back-to-left rotation ornament 3410A, a third back-to-left rotation ornament 3410C, a first back-to-right rotation ornament 3510A, and a third back-to-right rotation ornament 3510C. The shaft 3412 and the side surface of the arm 3451 of the shaft 3512, and the second back left rotation ornament 3410B and the fourth back left rotation ornament 3410 D and the second back right rotation ornament 3510 B and fourth back right A universal joint (rotational connection mechanism 3450) that transmits rotation between two shaft parts 3412 and shaft parts 3512 simply by sandwiching with the shaft part 3412 of the rotary decorative body 3510D and the side surface of the arm part 3451 of the shaft part 3512 Can be assembled, so the number of parts can be reduced or assembled compared to the case where a universal joint or constant velocity joint is adopted as a universal joint. Cal effort to be able to or facilitate an increase in costs for the gaming machine can be suppressed.

5-9 f-4. Back and left slide unit]
Next, the back and rear left slide unit 3460 in the back and rear left movable effect unit 3400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. Fig. 190 (a) is a perspective view of the back-rear left slide unit and the back-back right slide unit in the back-rear left movable effect unit and the back-back right movable effect unit as viewed from the front; It is the perspective view which looked at the unit and the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit in the back rear right movable presentation unit from back. Fig. 191 is an exploded perspective view of a back slide left slide unit and a back back right slide unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Fig. 192 is a back back left slide unit and a back slide right slide unit disassembled and viewed from the back It is a disassembled perspective view. FIG. 193 is an illustration showing the movement of the back and left movable decoration unit and the back and right movable decoration unit by the back and left slide unit and the back and right slide unit in the back and left movable effect unit and the back and back right movable effect unit. FIG.

  The back-to-back left slide unit 3460 of the back-to-back left movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the turning table 3380 in the back-to-back center movable effect unit 3350, and the back-to-back left movable decorative unit 3401 is the center of the turning table 3380 (Sliding) linearly between the separated position away from the center and the close position approached. The back slide left slide unit 3460 has left and right direction end portions attached to the front upper portion of the frame back return left unit base 3461 attached to the swivel table 3380 and the back back left unit base 3461 as illustrated. And a box-like slide guide 3463 attached to the lower front of the rear unit unit 3461 and opened at the upper side.

  The back left unit base 3461 of the back slide left slide unit 3460 extends in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the swivel table 3380 from near the top to the bottom, and the top is straighter to the right than the bottom It is formed in a C shape that extends to the A slide shaft 3462 is attached to the upper linearly extending portion of the back unit left unit base 3461. The back unit left unit base 3461 is vertically symmetrical with respect to the height (height of the center of the arc) of the leftmost projecting portion of the left side surface formed in the arc shape, And a circular through hole 3461 a penetrating therethrough. The base portions 3465a (gear portions 3465d) of the pair of slide arms 3465 described later are inserted into the two through holes 3461a arranged vertically.

  The slide shaft 3462 is slidably attached to the slide mounting portion 3420 a of the back rear left base 3420 in the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401. In the slide guide 3463, the slide pin 3420 b of the back rear left base 3420 in the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 is slidably inserted.

  Also, the back-rear left slide unit 3460 is attached to the back side of the back-rear left unit base 3461 and projects forward of the front surface of the back-rear left unit base 3461 coaxially with the two through holes 3461 a The arm mounting member 3464 having a pair of cylindrical mounting shafts 3464a and the pair of mounting shafts 3464a in the arm mounting member 3464 are rotatably mounted from the front respectively and can be turned back and back by rotating. And a pair of slide arms 3465 for sliding the body unit 3401 between the separated position and the approximated position.

  The slide arm 3465 has a base 3465a rotatably attached to the attachment shaft 3464a of the arm attachment member 3464, and an arm 3465b extending outward from the front end of the base 3465a along the front of the back unit unit 3461a. A slide pin 3465c projecting cylindrically from the tip of the arm portion 3465b and slidably inserted into the slide slit 3420c of the back rear left base 3420 in the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401; And a spur gear-like gear portion 3465 d formed on the outer periphery of 3465 a. The lower slide arm 3465 of the pair of slide arms 3465 is provided with a pulley portion 3465e around which the second belt 3471 is wound around the rear end of the base 3465a.

  Also, the back-rear left slide unit 3460 is attached below the slide guide 3463 at the lower front of the back-rear left unit base 3461 and the rotation axis passes through the back-rear left unit base 3461 and protrudes backward A back slide left slide drive motor 3466, a back gear drive gear 3467 attached to the rotation shaft of the back slide left slide drive motor 3466, and a spur gear driven gear portion 3468a meshing with the drive gear 3467 A drive pulley 3468 having a driven gear portion 3468a and a pulley portion 3468b integrally rotating, and rotatably mounted on the rear side of the back rear left unit base 3461; and a drive pulley on the rear side of the rear rear left unit base 3461 It is rotatably mounted at an intermediate position between the 3468 and the lower slide arm 3465. An endless annular first belt 3470 wound around a relay pulley 3469 having two pulleys 3469a arranged side by side, a pulley portion 3468b of the drive pulley 3468 and a pulley portion 3469a on the rear side of the relay pulley 3469 And an endless annular second belt 3471 wound around a pulley portion 3469a on the front side of the relay pulley 3469 and a pulley portion 3465e of the lower slide arm 3465.

  Furthermore, the back left slide unit 3460 is rotatably mounted on the back side of the back rear left unit base 3461 and is a spur gear shaped first transmission gear meshing with the gear portion 3465 d of the lower slide arm 3465 A second transmission gear 3473 engaged with the first transmission gear 3472 and in mesh with the gear portion 3465 d of the upper slide arm 3465 and rotatably mounted on the rear side of the rear unit base 3461. And a slide detection sensor 3474 attached to the front upper portion of the back rear left unit base 3461 and detecting the slide position of the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401. The first transmission gear 3472 and the second transmission gear 3473 have the same size. The slide detection sensor 3474 detects a detection piece 3420 d of the back rear left base 3420 in the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401.

  Subsequently, the slide (movement) of the back and left movable decoration unit 3401 by the back and back left slide unit 3460 will be described in detail. The back slide left slide unit 3460 in the back move left movable effect unit 3400 inserts the slide pin 3420 b of the back move left base 3420 in the back move left movable decoration unit 3401 in the slide guide 3463 and then the slide shaft 3462. Attach the slide mounting portion 3420a of the back left base 3420. At this time, the slide pins 3465c at the ends of the pair of slide arms 3465 arranged vertically are respectively inserted into slide slits 3420c lined up and down in the back rear left base 3420. Thus, the back rear left slide unit 3460 can move the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 in the left-right direction without swinging in the front-rear direction by the slide shaft 3462 and the slide guide 3463.

  In the back-to-back left slide unit 3460, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), the pair of slide arms 3465 extend horizontally from the base 3465a to the left with the arm portion 3465b. . In this state, the slide pin 3465c of the slide arm 3465 is in the state of being closest to the arc-shaped left side surface of the back rear left unit base 3461. That is, the slide pins 3465c of the pair of slide arms 3465 are most distant from the center (turning center) of the arc forming the left side surface.

  Since the respective slide pins 3465c of the pair of slide arms 3465 are respectively inserted into the pair of slide slits 3420c of the back rear left base 3420, the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 is in the normal state, It is in the state of the separated position farthest from the turning center. In this normal state, the back-rear left movable decoration unit 3401 is located directly in front of the back-rear left unit base 3461. Further, in the normal state, the slide detection sensor 3474 detects the detection piece 3420 d of the back rear left base 3420 in the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401.

  From this normal state, when the drive gear 3467 is rotated clockwise in a front view by the back slide left slide drive motor 3466, the drive pulley 3468 is counterclockwise rotated by the driven gear portion 3468a meshing with the drive gear 3467. It will rotate in the direction. Then, as the drive pulley 3468 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the relay pulley 3469 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the first belt 3470 wound around the pulley portion 3468 b of the drive pulley 3468. Furthermore, the pulley portion 3465e of the lower slide arm 3465 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction via the second belt 3471 wound around the relay pulley 3469, and the lower slide arm 3465 is its own base It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction about the axis of 3465a.

  When the lower slide arm 3465 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the first transmission gear 3472 engaged with the gear portion 3465 d of the lower slide arm 3465 rotates in the clockwise direction, and this first transmission is transmitted. The second transmission gear 3473 meshing with the gear 3472 will rotate counterclockwise, and the upper slide arm 3465 through the gear portion 3465 d of the upper slide arm 3465 meshing with the second transmission gear 3473. Rotates in the clockwise direction about the axis of its own base 3465a. Accordingly, the lower slide arm 3465 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the upper slide arm 3465 rotates in the clockwise direction, at the same time and in opposite directions, at the same time.

  When the pair of slide arms 3465 rotate in opposite directions, each slide pin 3465c revolves around the axis of its own base 3465a at a predetermined radius (the radius of the length of the arm 3465b). The positions of the slide pins 3465c in the left-right direction move to the right. As the slide pin 3465c of the slide arm 3465 revolves, the slide pin 3465c slides in the slide slit 3420c of the rear back left base 3420 and presses the back rear left base 3420 to the right via the slide slit 3420c. The entire back movable left decorative unit 3401 moves (slides) to the right. Then, the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 moves to the right while the pair of slide arms 3465 rotate 180 degrees respectively from the normal state.

  When the pair of slide arms 3465 rotate 180 degrees from the normal state, the drive of the back slide left slide drive motor 3466 is stopped, and the movement of the back move left movable decoration unit 3401 to the right is stopped. In this state, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is at the position farthest to the right from the arc-shaped left side surface of the back rear left unit base 3461 (see FIG. 193 (b)). In other words, the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 is in a state (approach position) closest to the center of the arc of the left side surface of the back rear left unit base 3461 (the center of the turning table 3380). In this approach position, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 is located inside the back rear left unit base 3461 formed in a C-shape. In addition, in the state of the approach position, the slide detection sensor 3474 is in the non-detection state.

  When the back movable left decorative unit 3401 is moved to the separated position, the back movable left slide driving motor 3466 is driven in the opposite direction to the back movable rear decorative unit 3401. Can be moved to the left from the approach position, and then, when the slide detection sensor 3474 detects the detection piece 3420d of the back rear left base 3420, the back rear left drive motor 3466 is stopped to move the back rear left The decoration unit 3401 can be returned to the separated position.

  Also, with the back movable left movable decorative body unit 3401 moved to the separated position or the approaching position, the sliding pins 3465 c at the tips of the pair of slide arms 3465 move closer to each other by the back movable left slide drive motor 3466. The respective slide arms 3465 are rotated so that the respective slide pins 3465c are brought into contact with the end portions of the slide slits 3420c on the back side of the left base 3420 that are close to each other. As a result, movement to the right in the separated position is restricted (locked) in movement to the left in the approaching position, and the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 can not slide in the separated position or the approaching position. It can be locked.

  Thus, by driving the back slide left slide drive motor 3466, the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 can be moved between the separated position and the approach position, and stopped at an arbitrary position between them. Can.

5-9 f-5. Back slide right slide unit]
Next, the back-to-back right slide unit 3560 in the back-to-back right movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 190 to 193. The back rear right slide unit 3560 of the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the turning table 3380 in the back rear central movable effect unit 3350, and the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 is the center of the turning table 3380 (Sliding) linearly between the separated position away from the center and the close position approached. The back right slide unit 3560 has left and right direction end portions attached to the front upper portion of the frame back rear right unit base 3561 attached to the swivel table 3380 and the back rear right unit base 3561 as illustrated. And a box-like slide guide 3563 attached to the lower front of the right rear unit base 3561 and opened at the upper side.

  Back to back The right back surface of the right slide unit 3560 extends from the vicinity of the top to the bottom of the right unit base 3561 along the outer periphery of the swivel table 3380 from the vicinity of the top to the bottom. It is formed in the shape of a letter that extends to the A slide shaft 3562 is attached to the upper linearly extending portion of the rear right unit base 3561. The back right unit base 3561 is vertically symmetrical with respect to the height (height of the center of the arc) of the rightmost projecting portion of the right side surface formed in the arc shape, And a circular through hole 3561a penetrating therethrough. The base portions 3565a (gear portions 3565d) of the pair of slide arms 3565 described later are inserted into the two through holes 3561a arranged vertically.

  In the slide shaft 3562, the slide mounting portion 3520 a of the back rear right base 3520 in the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 is slidably attached. In the slide guide 3563, the slide pin 3520b of the back rear right base 3520 in the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 is slidably inserted.

  Also, the back right slide unit 3560 is attached to the back side of the back right unit base 3561 and protrudes forward relative to the front side of the back right unit base 3561 at a position coaxial with the two through holes 3561 a. The arm mounting member 3564 having a pair of cylindrical mounting shafts 3564a and the pair of mounting shafts 3564a in the arm mounting member 3564 are rotatably mounted from the front respectively and can be turned back by rotating. And a pair of slide arms 3565 for sliding the body unit 3501 between the separated position and the approximated position.

  The slide arm 3565 has a base 3565a rotatably attached to the attachment shaft 3564a of the arm attachment member 3564, and an arm 3565b extending outward from the front end of the base 3565a along the front of the back right unit base 3561 And a slide pin 3565c projecting cylindrically from the tip of the arm 3565b and slidably inserted in the slide slit 3520c of the back base of the back movable right decorative unit 3501; And a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3565d formed on the outer periphery of 3565a. Further, the lower slide arm 3565 of the pair of slide arms 3565 is provided with a pulley portion 3565e around which the second belt 3571 is wound around the rear end of the base 3565a.

  In addition, the back right slide unit 3560 is mounted below the slide guide 3563 at the lower front of the back right unit base 3561 and the rotation shaft protrudes back through the back right unit base 3561 A back slide right slide drive motor 3566, a back gear drive gear 3567 attached to the rotation shaft of the back slide right slide drive motor 3566, and a spur gear driven gear portion 3568a meshing with the drive gear 3567, A drive pulley 3568 having a driven gear portion 3568a and a pulley portion 3568b integrally rotating, and rotatably mounted on the rear side of the back rear right unit base 3561, and a drive pulley on the rear side of the rear back right unit base 3561 It is rotatably mounted at an intermediate position between the 3568 and the lower slide arm 3565. An endless annular first belt 3570 wound around a relay pulley 3569 having two pulleys 3569a arranged side by side, a pulley portion 3568b of a drive pulley 3568 and a pulley portion 3569a on the rear side of the relay pulley 3569 And an endless annular second belt 3571 wound around a front pulley 3569a of the relay pulley 3569 and a pulley 3565e of the lower slide arm 3565.

  Furthermore, the back right slide unit 3560 is rotatably mounted on the back side of the back right unit base 3561 and is a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear meshing with the gear portion 3565 d of the lower slide arm 3565. A second transmission gear 3573 engaged with the first transmission gear 3572 and in mesh with the gear portion 3565 d of the upper slide arm 3565 and rotatably mounted on the rear side of the rear right unit base 3561. And a slide detection sensor 3574 attached to the front upper portion of the back rear right unit base 3561 and detecting the slide position of the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501. The first transmission gear 3572 and the second transmission gear 3573 have the same size. The slide detection sensor 3574 detects a detection piece 3520 d of the back rear right base 3520 in the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501.

  Subsequently, the slide (movement) of the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 by the back rear right slide unit 3560 will be described in detail. The back rear right slide unit 3560 in the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 inserts the slide pin 3520b of the back rear right base 3520 in the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 into the slide guide 3563 and then the slide shaft 3562 Attach the slide mounting portion 3520a of the back right base 3520. At this time, slide pins 3565c at the ends of a pair of slide arms 3565 arranged vertically are respectively inserted into slide slits 3520c lined up and down in the rear right base 3520. Thus, the back right slide unit 3560 can be moved by the slide shaft 3562 and the slide guide 3563 in the left / right direction without swinging the back right movable decoration unit 3501 in the front / rear direction.

  In the rear right slide unit 3560, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), in the normal state, a pair of slide arms 3565 extend horizontally from the base 3565a to the right with the arm portion 3565b. . In this state, the slide pin 3565c of the slide arm 3565 is in the state of being closest to the arc-shaped right side surface of the rear right unit base 3561. That is, the slide pins 3565c of the pair of slide arms 3565 are most distant from the center (the center of rotation) of the arc forming the right side surface.

  Since the respective slide pins 3565c of the pair of slide arms 3565 are respectively inserted into the pair of slide slits 3520c of the rear right base 3520, the rear rear right movable decoration unit 3501 is in the normal state, It is in the state of the separated position farthest from the turning center. In this normal state, the back-rear right movable decoration unit 3501 is located directly in front of the back-rear right unit base 3561. Further, in the normal state, the slide detection sensor 3574 detects the detection piece 3520 d of the back rear right base 3520 in the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501.

  From this normal state, when the drive gear 3567 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view counterclockwise by the back slide right slide drive motor 3566, the drive pulley 3568 is rotated clockwise by the driven gear portion 3568a engaged with the drive gear 3567. It will rotate in the direction. Then, as the drive pulley 3568 rotates in the clockwise direction, the relay pulley 3569 rotates in the clockwise direction via the first belt 3570 wound around the pulley portion 3568 b of the drive pulley 3568, and further, The pulley portion 3565e of the lower slide arm 3565 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the second belt 3571 wound around the relay pulley 3569, and the lower slide arm 3565 is an axis of its own base 3565a. It will rotate clockwise around the core.

  When the lower slide arm 3565 rotates in the clockwise direction, the first transmission gear 3572 meshing with the gear portion 3565 d of the lower slide arm 3565 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and this first transmission is performed. The second transmission gear 3573 meshing with the gear 3572 is rotated clockwise, and the upper slide arm 3565 is rotated via the gear portion 3565 d of the upper slide arm 3565 meshing with the second transmission gear 3573. It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction around the axis of its own base 3565a. Accordingly, the lower slide arm 3565 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the upper slide arm 3565 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, simultaneously in the opposite directions to each other at the same speed.

  When the pair of slide arms 3565 rotate in opposite directions, each slide pin 3565c revolves around the axis of its own base 3565a at a predetermined radius (the radius of the length of the arm 3565b). The positions of the respective slide pins 3565c in the left and right direction move to the left. As the slide pin 3565c of the slide arm 3565 revolves, the slide pin 3565c slides behind and slides in the slide slit 3520c of the right base 3520 and presses the back right base 3520 to the left via the slide slit 3520c. The back movable right decorative unit 3501 moves (slides) to the left. Then, the back movable right decorative unit 3501 moves leftward while the pair of slide arms 3565 rotate 180 degrees respectively from the normal state.

  When the pair of slide arms 3565 rotate 180 degrees from the normal state, the drive of the back slide right slide drive motor 3566 is stopped, and the movement of the back movable right decorative unit 3501 to the left is stopped. In this state, the back rear movable decorative unit 3501 is at a position farthest to the left from the arc-shaped right side surface of the back rear right unit base 3561 (see FIG. 193 (b)). In other words, the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 is in a state (approach position) closest to the center of the arc of the right side surface of the back rear right unit base 3561 (the center of the turning table 3380). In the approach position, the back rear movable decorative unit 3501 is located inside the back rear right unit base 3561 formed in a U-shape. In addition, in the state of the approach position, the slide detection sensor 3574 is in the non-detection state.

  When moving the rear movable right decoration unit 3501 to the separating position, the rear rear right movable decoration unit 3501 is driven by driving the rear rear right slide drive motor 3566 in the opposite direction to the above. Can be moved to the right from the approach position, and then, when the slide detection sensor 3574 detects the detection piece 3520d of the back rear right base 3520, the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 is stopped to move the back rear right The decoration unit 3501 can be returned to the separated position.

  Also, with the back movable right decorative unit 3501 moved to the separated position or the approaching position, the slide pins 3565 c at the tips of the pair of slide arms 3565 are moved closer to each other by the back movable right slide drive motor 3566. The respective slide arms 3565 are rotated so that the respective slide pins 3565c are brought into contact with the end portions of the slide slits 3520c of the right base 3520 that are close to each other. As a result, movement to the left in the separated position is restricted (locked) movement to the right in the approaching position, and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 can not slide in the separated position or the approaching position. It can be locked.

  In this manner, by driving the back right slide drive motor 3566, the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 can be moved between the separated position and the close position, and stopped at an arbitrary position between them. Can.

5-9 f-6. Back-rear left slide unit and back-right slide unit effect]
Next, the movable effects using the back-rear left slide unit 3460 and the back-right slide unit 3560 in the back-rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back-rear right movable effect unit 3500 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. Fig. 194 (a) is a front view showing the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit in the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit in a normal separated position state, b) Move the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit to the approach position by the back rear left movable unit and the back rear right slide unit by the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit. It is a front view shown in the closed state.

  The back-to-back left movable effect unit 3400 and the back-to-back right movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the vertically extending axis. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 are back movable to the left by the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 The decoration unit 3401 and the back rear movable decoration unit 3501 are in the separated position.

  In the normal state, since the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 are respectively located at the separated position by the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560, The rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 are separated from each other, and the display of the main effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side between them. The screen forms a square space facing forward (see FIG. 135 and the like).

  In this normal state, the back-rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back-right movable decoration unit 3501, and the back-left slide unit 3460 and the back-right slide unit 3560 are overlapped in the front and back direction. Through the inside of the frame formed by the back rear left unit base 3461 and the back rear right unit base 3561, in a good state the effect image of the main effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side (the player side The main effect display device 1600 can be decorated with the back and left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back and right movable decoration unit 3501 to improve the appearance.

  From the normal state, by driving the back-rear left slide drive motor 3466 and back-back right slide drive motor 3566 in the back-back left slide unit 3460 and back-back right slide unit 3560, back-back left movable decorative unit 3401 and back back right When the movable decoration unit 3501 is moved from the separating position to the approaching position, the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 are brought close to each other (see FIG. 194 (b)).

  When the back and left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back and back right movable decoration unit 3501 are moved to the approach position, a plurality of back and left rotation decorative bodies 3410 and back and back right rotation decoration 3510 respectively provided are provided. However, on the front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, it becomes a state of being lined up on the circumference of the same radius, and blocking the effect image of the main effect display device 1600 It can be attracted to the body 3410 and the back right rotating ornament 3510.

[5-9 g. Back and up movable production unit]
Next, the back-to-back movable presentation unit 3600 in the back-to-back movable presentation unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 195 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-to-back movable presentation unit in the back-to-back movable presentation unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front together with the turn table. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back-rear upper movable presentation unit in a unit by main structure, and was seen from the back with a turntable.

  The back-to-back upper movable presentation unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front upper part of the back-to-back center movable presentation unit 3350 of the back-to-back movable presentation unit 3300. The back-to-back upper movable presentation unit 3600 is a flat slide plate 3610 vertically movably mounted between the pair of fixed rack gears 3386 above the through hole 3382 in the front of the main body 3381 of the turning table 3380. And a pair of spur gear-like slide gears 3620 rotatably mounted near the left and right ends of the rear surface of the slide plate 3610 and respectively meshing with the pair of fixed rack gears 3386 of the turning table 3380; A slide frame 3630 having a pair of vertically extending movable side rack gears 3631 meshing with the slide gear 3620 and movably mounted on the front surface of the slide plate 3610, and the slide frame 3630 Attached and show effect image Pair of back rear and upper slide drive units which are attached to the outer sides of the pair of fixed rack gears 3386 on the front surface of the main body 3381 of the turning table 3380 and the movable sub effect display 3640 and the slide plate 3610 vertically. And 3650.

  The slide plate 3610 is disposed at a distance from side to side, penetrates back and forth, extends vertically, and has a pair of plate-side guide slits 3611 into which the guide boss 3387 of the turning table 3380 is slidably inserted. A plurality of (four) guide pins 3612 projecting cylindrically forward from positions vertically separated at both outer sides in the left-right direction of the plate-side guide slit 3611 and upper and lower in the left-right direction both outer sides of the plurality of guide pins 3612 And a flat plate-like detection piece 3614 projecting leftward from the drive rack gear 3613 on the left side in a front view. The slide plate 3610 is slidably attached to the pivot table 3380 in the vertical direction by inserting the guide boss 3387 of the pivot table 3380 into the plate-side guide slit 3611. The drive rack gear 3613 is formed such that the gear teeth project forward.

  The slide plate 3610 is bent in a crank shape in plan view such that the portion of the drive rack gear 3613 protrudes forward. In the slide plate 3610, the slide gear 3620 is extended in the front and back of a portion where a part is bent in a crank shape at the rear surface portion of the drive rack gear 3613 that protrudes forward than the inner general surface. It is rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and backward so that it is exposed to the front side (inward) from the broken part.

  The slide frame 3630 is formed near the left and right ends of the rear surface, and extends longitudinally in the left and right direction of the pair of movable side rack gears 3631 extending in the vertical direction and meshed with the slide gear 3620 and the pair of movable side rack gears 3631. And a frame-side guide slit 3632 that extends up and down and into which the guide pin 3612 of the slide plate 3610 is slidably inserted. The slide frame 3630 is formed in a box shape that accommodates the sub effect display device 3640, and has an opening 3633 on which the display screen of the sub effect display 3640 faces the front, and a transparency that adorns the outer periphery of the opening 3633. A back rear upper frame shape decorative body 3634 having light property, and a back rear upper decoration substrate 3635 disposed on the back side of the back rear upper frame shape decorative body 3634 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface ing.

  The pair of movable side rack gears 3631 of the slide frame 3630 are formed such that the gear teeth project outward in the left-right direction. The pair of movable side rack gears 3631 are formed so as to face the fixed side rack gear 3386 of the turning table 3380 in the assembled state, and mesh with a portion of the slide gear 3620 exposed on the front side of the slide plate 3610 Do. The slide frame 3630 is slidably attached to the slide plate 3610 in the vertical direction by inserting the guide pins 3612 of the slide plate 3610 into the frame side guide slit 3632.

  The sub effect display device 3640 is a 7-inch full-color liquid crystal display device whose display screen is smaller than the main effect display device 1600.

  The back slide upper slide drive unit 3650 is a motor bracket 3651 attached to the left and right sides of the pair of fixed rack gears 3386 on the front surface of the main body 3381 of the turning table 3380, and a side surface of the motor bracket 3651 facing to the left and right. The rotary shaft attached to the left and right direction is attached to the rotary shaft of the back-rear upper drive motor 3652 and the back-rear upper drive motor 3652, which project inward through the motor bracket 3651 and the slide plate 3610 The drive gear 3653 in mesh with the drive rack gear 3613, and a motor cover 3554 attached to the front of the swivel table 3380 so as to cover the front side of the motor bracket 3651 and the back rear upper drive motor 3652.

  Further, of the pair of back and rear upper slide drive units 3650, the back and rear upper slide drive unit 3650 on the left side in a front view includes a slide detection sensor 3655 for detecting the detection piece 3614 of the slide plate 3610. The slide detection sensor 3655 is attached to the motor bracket 3651. By detecting the detection piece 3614 of the slide plate 3610 by the slide detection sensor 3655, the slide position of the sub effect display device 3640 attached to the slide frame 3630 can be detected.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back-rear upper movable presentation unit 3600 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. Fig. 196 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state in which the sub effect display device in the back and rear upper movable effect unit is at the retracted position farthest from the turning center, and (b) is capable of rotating the sub effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state made into a position by schematic structure, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the state by which the protrusion position which approached the sub production | presentation display apparatus closest to the turning center most by schematic structure. FIG. 197 (a) is a front view of the turning table side in the back movable showable unit showing the sub effect display unit of the back movable upper moveable unit in the normal backward position, and FIG. 197 (b) is the sub effect display It is a front view by the side of a turntable in a back rear movable presentation unit which shows the state which made it a projection position.

  In the normal state, the back-to-back upper movable presentation unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is in the retracted position where the sub presentation display device 3640 is most raised (farthest from the turning center of the turning table 3380) (FIG. 196). (A) and FIG. 197 (a) etc.). In the retracted position, the drive gear 3653 of the back-rear upper slide drive unit 3650 is engaged near the lower ends of the pair of drive rack gears 3613 of the slide plate 3610. Further, in this state, the pair of slide gears 3620 rotatably attached to the slide plate 3610 are in the vicinity of the upper end of the fixed rack gear 3386 in the turning table 3380 and in the vicinity of the lower end of the movable rack gear 3631 in the slide frame 3630. , Each meshed.

  Further, in the state of the retracted position, the detection piece 3614 of the slide plate 3610 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3655 provided in the back rear upper slide drive unit 3650 on the left side. In the state of the retracted position, as illustrated, a part of the sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) protrudes outward beyond the outer periphery of the turning table 3380 in a front view.

  Furthermore, in the retracted position, the guide boss 3387 of the swivel table 3380 is in contact with the lower end of the plate-side guide slit 3611 in the slide plate 3610 and the frame-side guide slit 3632 in the slide frame 3630 is below. At the side end, the guide pin 3612 of the slide plate 3610 abuts. As a result, the further slide (movement) to the upper side of the slide plate 3610 and the slide frame 3630 (sub effect display device 3640) is restricted.

  When the drive gear 3653 is rotated clockwise in the right side view by the pair of back and rear upper drive motors 3652 in this retracted position, the slide plate 3610 is rotated by the drive rack gear 3613 engaged with the drive gear 3653. Slide downward (in the direction approaching the center of the swivel table 3380). When the slide plate 3610 slides downward, the pair of slide gears 3620 attached to the slide plate 3610 also slide downward (move) together. At this time, since the fixed rack gear 3386 of the turning table 3380 is engaged with the pair of slide gears 3620 from the outside in the left and right direction respectively, when the center of the slide gear 3620 slides downward, the engaged fixed side By the rack gear 3386, the slide gears 3620 are respectively rotated (the slide gear 3620 on the left side in the front view is rotated clockwise, and the slide gear 3620 on the right side in the front view is rotated counterclockwise).

  In each of the pair of slide gears 3620, the movable side rack gear 3631 of the slide frame 3630 is engaged with the fixed side rack gear 3386 from the side opposite to the stationary side rack gear 3386. When the slide gear 3620 rotates in the clockwise direction and the slide gear 3620 on the right side in a front view rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the slide frame 3630 is moved by the movable side rack gear 3631 meshing with the respective slide gears 3620, It slides downward at twice the speed with respect to the slide plate 3610. In other words, the slide frame 3630 slides downward by twice the distance of the slide distance of the slide plate 3610. Since the sub effect display 3640 is attached to the slide frame 3630, the sub effect display 3640 slides downward (on the side of the turning center of the turning table 3380) together with the slide frame 3630.

  When the slide frame 3630 slides downward through the slide plate 3610 by the pair of back-rear upper drive motors 3652, in front view, the portion located outside the outer periphery of the swivel table 3380 is the outer periphery of the swivel table 3380 The slide frame 3630 (sub effect display 3640) slides inward into the through hole 3382 of the turning table 3380 in a front view (see FIG. 196B).

  Then, when the slide frame 3630 (sub effect display device 3640) is at the lowermost position (approaching to the turning center of the turning table 3380), the drive of the back rear upper driving motor 3652 is stopped ( See FIG. 196 (c) and FIG. 197 (b)). In this projecting position, substantially the entire display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 attached to the slide frame 3630 is located in the through hole 3382 of the turning table 3380 in a front view. In the projection position, the guide boss 3387 of the turning table 3380 is in contact with the upper end of the plate-side guide slit 3611 in the slide plate 3610 and the upper end of the frame-side guide slit 3632 in the slide frame 3630 The guide pin 3612 of the slide plate 3610 is in contact with the portion. Thereby, the further slide (movement) below the slide plate 3610 and the slide frame 3630 (sub effect display device 3640) is restricted.

  In order to return from the state of the projecting position to the state of the retracted position, the slide frame is made via the slide plate 3610 by rotating the respective drive gears 3653 in the opposite direction to the above by the pair of back and rear upper drive motors 3652. 3630 (sub effect display device 3640) can be slid upward, and by stopping the driving of the pair of back rear upper drive motors 3652 based on the detection of the detection piece 3641 of the slide plate 3610 by the slide detection sensor 3655, It is possible to return to the state of the retracted position.

  Note that the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600 can stop the sub-effect display device 3640 at an arbitrary position between the retracted position and the protruding position by the pair of back-rear upper drive motors 3652.

  In this manner, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 approaches the retracted position and the turning center away from the center (turning center) of the turning table 3380 with the sub effect display 3640 having a display screen smaller than the main effect display device 1600. It is possible to slide between the projecting positions. In other words, the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600 has the sub effect display device 3640 between the position (retracted position) outside the main effect display device 1600 and the front side (projected position) of the main effect display device 1600. Therefore, depending on the slide position of the sub effect display device 3640, the effect image (main effect image) by the main effect display device 1600 may be highlighted, or the effect image by the sub effect display device 3640 (sub effect image Can be made to stand out, and the player can enjoy the main effect image and the sub effect image.

[5-9 g-1. Effects by back-rear center movable effect unit and back-rear upper moveable effect unit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 198 to FIG. 201, the effects (movable effects) using the back-to-back central movable effect unit 3350 and the back-to-back upper movable effect unit 3600 in the back-to-back movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 are mainly referred to. Will be described in detail. FIG. 198 is a front view of the back-to-back movable effect unit schematically showing a state in which the sub effect display device is turned at the first turn position. FIG. 199 is a front view of the back-to-back movable effect unit schematically showing the movable range of the sub effect display device at the first turning position. FIG. 200 is a front view of the back-rear movable effect unit schematically showing the movable range of the sub effect display device at the second turning position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the back-rear movable effect unit schematically showing the movable range of the sub effect display device in the third turning position.

  The sub effect display device 3640 of the back move back movable effect unit 3600 in the back move movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the turn table 3380 of the back move center movable effect unit 3350, and on the straight line passing the turning center, the turn table 3380 It is made slidable between a retracted position away from the center (the pivoting center) of and a projecting position close to the pivoting center. When the sub effect display device 3640 is in the retracted position, part of the slide frame 3630 to which the sub effect display device 3640 is attached is located outside the outer periphery of the turning table 3380 in front view. When the sub effect display device 3640 is in the projecting position, the entire slide frame 3630 to which the sub effect display device 3640 is attached is located inside the outer periphery of the turning table 3380 in front view, and the sub effect display device 3640 is located inside the opening 3361 b of the unit base 3361.

  The range between the back-to-back central movable effect unit 3350 and the position where the slide frame 3630 of the back-to-back movable effect unit 3600 is the same as the position where the outer periphery coincides with the outer periphery of the turning table 3380 in front view ), The swivel range of swivel table 3380 is restricted (see FIG. 198). The back turning center movable effect unit 3350 is a first turning position in which the turning position at which the turning range of the turning table 3380 is restricted is directly above the turning center, the back turning upper movable effect unit 3600 (sub effect display device 3640) The second turning position (the position turned at an angle of 90 degrees from the first turning position clockwise in a front view clockwise direction) where the sub effect display device 3640 is located right on the right of the turning center, and the sub effect directly below the turning center Three turning positions are provided at a third turning position where the display device 3640 is located (a position turned at an angle of 90 degrees in a clockwise direction in a front view from the second turning position). The sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) can slide to the retracted position (within the turning restriction range) only when the sub table 3380 is positioned at any of the three turning positions by turning of the turning table 3380.

  Also, when the back-to-back central movable effect unit 3350 is in a range (a pivotable range) between a position where the outer periphery of the slide frame 3630 matches the outer periphery of the turning table 3380 in front view , The restriction of the turning range of the turning table 3380 is released, and the turning table 3380 (sub effect display 3640) can freely turn between the first turning position, the second turning position, and the third turning position. Yes (see Figure 198).

  In the normal state, the back-to-back upper movable presentation unit 3600 is located at the first turning position immediately above the turning center of the turning table 3380 by the back-to-back center movable presentation unit 3350, and the sub effect display device 3640 is The back slide is positioned at the retracted position away from the center of rotation by the slide drive unit 3650 (see FIG. 169 and the like).

  In this normal state, since the slide frame 3630 is located within the turning restriction range, the turning range of the sub effect display device 3640 (turning table 3380) is ±± with the slide frame 3630 by the pair of guide pins 3363. It is pivotally restricted only within the range of a five degree pivot angle (see FIG. 199). In addition, in the state of the first turning position, the sub effect display device 3640 can be slid up and down between the retracted position and the protruding position. In the state of the first turning position, when the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the projecting position, the upper half of the opening 3361 b (main effect display device 1600) can be covered, and the sub effect display device 3640 The player can enjoy the effect image displayed on the screen.

  In the second turning position where the first turning position is turned clockwise at a turning angle of 90 degrees, as shown in FIG. 200, the sub effect display device 3640 is positioned right of the turning center, and the opening portion It extends vertically on the right side of 3361 b (main effect display device 1600). At the second turning position, when the slide frame 3630 is slid into the turning restriction range on the backward position side, the sub effect display device 3640 (turning table 3380) turns via the slide frame 3630 by the pair of guide pins 3363. It becomes impossible state. In the state of the second turning position, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be expanded to the right by the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 by setting the sub effect display device 3640 to the state of the backward position. The player can be entertained with the effect image on the wide screen.

  In the third turning position which is turned at a turning angle of 90 degrees clockwise from the second turning position, as shown in FIG. 201, the sub effect display device 3640 is located directly below the turning center, and the display The screen extends to the left and right. When the slide frame 3630 is slid into the swing restriction range on the backward position side at the third swing position, the sub effect display 3640 (turn table 3380) is moved by the pair of guide pins 3363 via the slide frame 3630. It is restricted to be able to turn only within the range of a turn angle of ± 7 degrees. By turning the turning table 3380 back and forth within this turnable angle range, the sub effect display device 3640 can be swung to the left and right, and the player can enjoy the physically swinging effect image. it can. In addition, in the state of the third turning position, when the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the projecting position, the lower half of the opening 3361 b (main effect display device 1600) can be covered, and the sub effect display device The player can enjoy the effect image displayed on the 3640.

  Thus, the sub effect display device 3640 can be moved to various positions around the turning center of the turning table 3380 by the back rear central movable effect unit 3350 and the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600, The player can enjoy the movement of the effect display device 3640.

[5-9 h. Back and bottom movable production unit]
Next, the back-to-back lower movable effect unit 3700 in the back-to-back movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 202 (a) is a perspective view of the back-to-back movable effect unit in the back-to-back movable effect unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 202 (b) is the back-to-back lower movable effect unit in the back-to-back movable effect unit Is a perspective view seen from behind. The back-rear lower movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the lower front of the swivel table 3380 in the back-rear central movable effect unit 3350 of the back-rear movable effect unit 3300.

  The back-rear lower movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the lower front of the swivel table 3380, and has a unit main body 3701 on the front of which a light-transmitting geometric pattern decoration is formed, and a horizontal center of the unit main body 3701 The rotary shaft is mounted on the rear surface, and the rotary shaft is mounted on the rotary shaft of the back-rear lower drive motor 3702 which protrudes forward through the unit body 3701 and the rear-back lower drive motor 3702. The back rear lower rotating decorative body 3703 formed on the back of the unit main body 3701 is mounted on the front of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front back lower decorative substrate 3704 and the back rear lower decorative substrate 3704 And a substrate cover 3705 attached to the unit body 3701 so as to cover the rear side of the central portion in the left-right direction.

  The unit main body 3701 of the back-rear lower movable effect unit 3700 has an outer shape formed by an arc along the outer periphery of the turning table 3380 and a chord connecting both ends of the arc. The unit body 3701 has a circularly recessed decoration at the center in the left-right direction, and star-shaped decorations are formed on the left and right sides and near the left and right ends. The back-rear lower rotating ornament 3703 is accommodated in the central circular recessed interior of the unit body 3701 and is rotated by the back-rear lower drive motor 3702 around an axis extending back and forth passing through the center thereof.

  The back rear lower decorative substrate 3704 can emit light and decorate the front surface of the unit main body 3701 and the back rear lower rotary decorative body 3703 by appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  According to the back-rear lower movable effect unit 3700, the back-back lower rotating decoration 3703 can be rotated by the back-back lower drive motor 3702. At this time, when the LED of the back rear lower decoration substrate 3704 is appropriately illuminated, the outer shape of the back rear lower rotation decoration body 3703 is formed in a gear shape, so that the light from the rear is blocked by the teeth of the gear. By turning it over, it can be made to appear to be blinking, and the player's attention can be drawn to the back and back turning ornament 3703.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 206 to FIG. FIG. 203 is a front view of the game board showing the back first rotation decorative body and the back top second rotary decoration of the back-up movable presentation unit in the back unit in a state of being moved to the lowered position. FIG. 204 shows the back and left movable decoration unit and the back movable left decoration unit and the back movable back and right movable decoration in the back and left movable effect unit and the back and rear right movable effect unit with the back table in the back and back movable and movable unit in the first pivot position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the body unit to the approach position from the separation position. FIG. 205 shows the back table of the back unit in the third embodiment of the back-to-back movable effect unit and the back movable left decoration unit and the back movable right decorative unit and the back movable right decoration unit in the third turning position It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the body unit to the approach position from the separation position. FIG. 206 is a front view of the game board showing the sub-effects display device in the back-to-back movable effect unit of the back unit moved to the projecting position at the normal first turning position. FIG. 207 is a front view of the game board showing the sub effect display device in the back and rear movable effect unit of the back unit in a state in which it is pivoted from the first pivoting position to the second pivoting position in the projecting position. FIG. 208 is a front view of the game board shown in the state of moving the sub effect display device to the reverse position from the state of FIG.

  FIG. 209 is a front view of the game board showing the sub effect display device in the back rear movable effect unit of the back unit moved from the second turning position to the third turning position in the protruding position. FIG. 210 is a front view of the game board shown in the state of moving the sub effect display device to the reverse position from the state of FIG. FIG. 211 shows a back rear left rotation decoration and a back rear right rotation in the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit in the state of FIG. 205 from the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit While the decoration is in the state of the third effect position, the back of the first rotating decoration on the back and the second rotating decoration on the back are moved to the lowered position to back the first rotating decoration and back. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which is rotating the upper second rotation decoration.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 129 and FIG. 135, etc., the game board 5 has the back front decoration of the back unit 3000 through the transparent game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) outside the frame-shaped center character 2500. The decoration of unit 3100 is visible. Further, in the frame (inside) of the center character 2500, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 can be favorably viewed from the player side (forward).

  Further, in the normal state, the back top movable main body unit 3230 in the back top movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is in the state of the rising position, and the upper side of the main effect display device 1600 within the center character 2500 frame. In the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550, the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decoration 3233 of the back upper movable main body unit 3230 in the back upper movable rendering unit 3200 are visible.

  Further, in the normal state, the swivel table 3380 of the back-to-back central movable effect unit 3350 in the back-to-back movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is in the first pivot position, and the back-to-back left movable effect unit 3400 and The back and left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back and right movable decoration unit 3501 of the back movable right effect unit 3500 are respectively in the separated position away from the turning center of the turning table 3380. Therefore, a plurality of back and left turning decorative bodies 3410 of the back and back left movable effect unit 3400 are visible on the left side of the main effect display device 1600 through the frame of the center role 2500 and the right side of the main effect display device 1600 In addition, a plurality of back right rotating ornaments 3510 of the back right movable effect unit 3500 are visible. A plurality of back and left rotating ornaments 3410 and a back right rotating ornament 3510 of the back left movable effect unit 3400 and the back right movable effect unit 3500 respectively front the first decoration 3411 a and the first decoration 3511 a. It is in the state of the first production position towards.

  Furthermore, in a normal state, the back and back movable presentation unit 3700 located behind the stage 2530 is visible through the transparent center character 2500 and the transparent panel plate 1110. In this normal state, the sub effect display 3640 in the back and back upper movable effect unit 3600 of the back and back movable effect unit 3300 is located at the retracted position, and the logo decoration unit of the center character 2500 located on the front side 2550 is hidden and invisible.

  The game board 5 is the back front decoration unit of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by receiving game balls in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004. 3100, back-to-back movable effect unit 3200, back-to-back movable effect unit 3300 is equipped with back-to-back center movable effect unit 3350, back-to-back left movable effect unit 3400, back-to-back right movable effect unit 3500, back-to-back movable effect unit 3600 and the back-and-back lower movable presentation unit 3700 perform predetermined presentation (a movable presentation and a light emission presentation).

  Specifically, as effects using back-up movable effect unit 3200 of back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 129 and FIG. 135 etc., back-up first rotation decoration 3232 and back-up second rotation decoration While 3233 is positioned on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550 of the center character 2500, the first LED 3234a of the back top decoration substrate 3234 is appropriately lit to make the back top first rotation decoration 3232 and the back second rotation decoration The light emitting decoration of the body 3233 makes it possible to attract the player's interest strongly to the first rotating decoration 3232 and the second rotating decoration 3233 on the back, and the first rotating decoration 3232 on the back and the back The upper right corner of the game area 5a where the second rotating decorative body 3233 is located can be noticed. This makes the player think that something may be good in the right area in the game area 5a, and the game ball is distributed such that the game ball flows on the right side of the center character 2500. The loading operation (so-called right hitting) can be promoted, and the hitting operation of the game ball can be enjoyed.

  Also, as an effect using the back-up movable presentation unit 3200, the back-up movable main body unit 3230 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front by driving the back-up lifting drive motor 3213, and the back up first rotating decorative body 3232 The second rotating decorative body 3233 is moved from the rising position on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550 above the main effect display device 1600 to the lowering position on the front surface of the main effect display device 1600 at the center of the game area 5a ( See Figure 203). As a result, the back-to-back first rotary decorative body 3232 and back-to-back second rotary decorative body 3233 whose outer peripheries are variable polygon shapes are positioned substantially at the center of the front side of the main effect display device 1600, and the main effect display device 1600 Since the effect image displayed on the screen is blocked, it can be made to stand out from the player side, and effects can be made to attract the player's interest strongly.

  Then, in this state, when the back top first rotary decoration 3232 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the back top rotation drive motor 3235, the back top disposed on the front side of the back top first rotation decoration 3232 The second rotary decorative body 3233 rotates in the counterclockwise direction and revolves in the counterclockwise direction centering on the first shaft portion 3232a, and is disposed on the back side of the back first rotary decorative body 3232. A plurality of back-to-back out-and-out decorative bodies 3246 can exhibit a movable effect such that they protrude and appear to the outside of the back-to-back first rotary decorative body 3232 at different timings. As a result, it is possible to show the player a moving effect such as swirling of stars as it swirls, and a strong impact can be given to the player, and something good for the player can be made. It can be made to think that there may be a thing, and it can make the expectation for a game increase and can control the fall of the interest.

  At this time, by appropriately emitting the first LED 3234a and the second LED 3234b of the back surface decoration substrate 3234, the back surface first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back surface second rotation decoration body 3233 are twinkling, and the appearance on the back surface appears It is possible to show such an effect that the body 3246 (appearing and appearing decorative part 3246b) scatters while being lit, and the above-described effects can be further exhibited.

  Subsequently, as effects using the back-rear central movable effect unit 3350 and the back-rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back-right movable effect unit 3500 in the back-back movable effect unit 3300, for example, in the normal state, back-back left The back movable left decoration unit by back slide left slide drive motor 3466 and back back right slide drive motor 3566 in back turn left slide unit 3460 and back back right slide unit 3560 in back move back movable right play effect unit 3400 When the unit 3401 and the back right movable decoration unit 3501 are respectively moved to the approach position approaching the turning center of the turning table 3380, as shown in FIG. 204, the back back left movable decoration formed in an arc shape respectively. Body unit 3401 and back rear movable ornament unit 3501 are main Out a state located on the front side in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the display device 1600, it is possible to show the effect to cover the left and right of the main effect display device 1600 to the player.

  In this state, in the front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, the player plays a decoration in which a part of a ring is formed by the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501. The player can be made to look at the back movable left decorative unit 3401 and the back movable right decorative unit 3501. Moreover, in this state, the central portion of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is facing forward in a circular shape from between the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501, and the back back The effect image rounded in a circle by the left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back right movable decoration unit 3501 can be enjoyed.

  Moreover, in this state, although not shown, a plurality of back turn counterclockwise rotations are performed by the back back left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3431 in the back back left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back back right movable decoration unit 3501. The second decorative portion 3411 b and the second decorative portion 3511 b are arranged from the first effect position where the decorative body 3410 and the back-right rotating decorative body 3510 are directed to the first decorative portion 3411 a and the first decorative portion 3511 a forward. Is appropriately rotated to the second effect position directed to the front, or the third effect position directed to the front, of the third decorative portion 3411c and the third decorative portion 3511c (see FIG. 189). As a result, since the decoration modes of the back-rear left turn decorative body 3410 and the back-right turn decorative body 3510 change, it is possible to show various effects to the player and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  Also, as effects using the back movable center movable effect unit 3350, back back left movable effect unit 3400 and back back right movable effect unit 3500, the turning table 3380 is set as the third turning position, and the back moved upper moving effect With the sub effect display device 3640 of the unit 3600 in the retracted position, the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 are moved to the approach position closer to the turning center of the turning table 3380 (See Figure 205). In this state, the display screen of the sub effect display 3640 is below the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 covering the left and right sides of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. positioned. Thereby, even if the left and right sides of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 are covered by the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501, the sub effect display arranged on the lower side thereof The reduction of the display area can be compensated by the display screen of the device 3640, and the decoration of the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 and the effects of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 It is possible to show the player the effect by the image and to entertain the player.

  Even in the state shown in FIG. 205, the player changes the decoration by rotating the plurality of back rear left turn decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right turn decorative bodies 3510 by the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 Can be entertained.

  Furthermore, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the back back left movable effect unit 3400 and the back back right movable effect unit 3500, although illustration is omitted, the back back left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back back By moving only one of the right movable decorative unit 3501 from the separated position to the approaching position, it is possible to show the player the effect of covering only one side in the left and right direction of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. . Thus, by appropriately selecting the back-rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back-right movable decoration unit 3501 to be moved between the separating position and the approaching position, a variety of effects can be presented to the player. It is possible to make the player less bored and enjoy the game.

  Subsequently, as an effect using the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back-back upper movable effect unit 3600 in the back-back movable effect unit 3300, for example, the turning table 3380 is set as the first turning position and the sub effect display device In a normal state where the 3640 is in the reverse position, each drive gear 3653 is provided on the right side by the back-rear upper drive motor 3652, which is respectively provided in the pair of back-rear upper slide drive units 3650 in the back-rear upper movable presentation unit 3600. When the slide frame 3630 is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed to slide the slide frame 3630 from the retracted position away from the pivoting center of the pivot table 3380 to the projecting position closer to the pivoting center, The sub effect display device 3640 protrudes together So that the downward movement).

  At this time, the sub effect display device 3640 hidden behind the logo decoration unit 2550 of the center character 2500 at the retreat position moves downward from the lower end of the logo decoration unit 2550, and thus the player side gradually By stopping at the projecting position, the upper half of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side is covered (see FIG. 206). As a result, the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 can be viewed from the player side, and the player's interest in the effect image (sub effect image) displayed on the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 An effect that can be attracted can be performed.

  As a result, the appearance of the sub effect display device 3640 different from the main effect display device 1600 causes the player to think that an important effect image is displayed on the sub effect display device 3640. The effect image displayed on the display screen of the sub effect display 3640 can be enjoyed. Further, by the appearance of the sub effect display device 3640, it is possible to cause the player to suggest the arrival of a chance, and it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  When the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the retracted position to the projecting position or moved to the projecting position at the first pivoting position, the back-to-back pivoting drive motor 3370 of the fixed unit 3360 in the back-rear central movable rendering unit 3350 The swing table 3380 may be turned back and forth within the range of a predetermined swing angle. As a result, the sub effect display device 3640, which can be seen from the player side, swings back and forth by turning back and forth, and the effect image displayed on the sub effect display device 3640 physically swings. It is possible to show the player the effect. As a result, since the sub effect display device 3640 is shaking with the effect image being displayed, the movement of the sub effect display device 3640 can be enjoyed. At this time, it is possible to further entertain the player by swinging the sub effect display device 3640 so as to be associated with the effect image displayed on the main effect display device 1600, thereby reducing the interest for the game. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an effect using the back and center movable effect unit 3350 and the back and back upper movable effect unit 3600, the slide frame 3630 to which the sub effect display device 3640 is attached is turned by the pair of back and rear upper drive motors 3652. While being positioned within the possible range, the back table turning drive motor 3370 rotates the turning table 3380 90 degrees clockwise in a front view to the second turning position (see FIG. 207). As a result, the sub effect display device 3640 seen below the logo decoration unit 2550 of the center character 2500 turns around the center of the main effect display device 1600 (the turning center of the turning table 3380). Can be shown to the player.

  By turning the sub effect display device 3640 located within the turnable range from the first turning position to the second turning position, the horizontally long sub effect display device 3640 becomes in the vertically long state, and the main effect display device 1600 Since the right half of the display screen is covered, the player can enjoy the change in the orientation of the sub effect display device 3640. At this time, when the sub effect display device 3640 is turned in a state where, for example, a predetermined character is displayed as the effect image on the display screen of the sub effect display means, the character moves together with the sub effect display device 3640 ) Can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. In addition, the movement (turning) of the character (sub effect display device 3640) makes it possible for the player to seem to move the game state to another stage (for example, to develop from normal reach effect). The expectation to the next state can be increased to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  After the sub effect display device 3640 is turned to the second turning position, the sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) positioned within the turnable range is moved to the retracted position by the pair of back rear upper drive motors 3652. The sub effect display device 3640 is arranged on the right side of the main effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 208). This makes it possible to show the player an effect using the entire display screen of the main effect display device 1600 and the entire display screen of the sub effect display device 3640. For example, by displaying different effect images on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, it is possible to provide the player with a lot of information on the game, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. . Alternatively, by causing the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 to respectively display effect images constituting one image, an effect image as if the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is expanded to the right Can be shown to the player, and a wide-screen extended from side to side can be used to enjoy a powerful effect image.

  Further, in the state where the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the second swing position and to the backward position, as shown in FIG. 208, the sub effect display device 3640 is located near the right end of the game area 5a. The sub effect display device 3640 can be suitably used for displaying the effect image for prompting the game ball to be hit so that the game ball is distributed on the right side of the bonus 2500, and the game ball can be hit by the player. Can entertain you.

  Furthermore, as effects using the back-rear central movable effect unit 3350 and the back-rear upper movable effect unit 3600, in the state of the second turning position, the sub-effect display device 3640 is attached by the pair of back-rear upper drive motors 3652. With the slide frame 3630 being positioned within the pivotable range, the back swing drive motor 3370 rotates the swing table 3380 90 degrees clockwise in a front view to the third swing position (see FIG. 209). ). Thus, the sub effect display device 3640 covering the right side of the main effect display device 1600 shows the effect that the player turns around the center of the main effect display device 1600 (the turning center of the turning table 3380). be able to.

  By turning the sub effect display device 3640 located within the turnable range from the second turning position to the third turning position, the vertically elongated sub effect display device 3640 becomes horizontally long, and the main effect display device 1600 Since the lower half of the display screen is covered, the player can enjoy the change in the orientation of the sub effect display 3640. At this time, when the sub effect display device 3640 is turned in a state where, for example, a predetermined character is displayed as the effect image on the display screen of the sub effect display means, the character moves together with the sub effect display device 3640 ) Can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. In addition, the movement (turning) of the character (sub effect display device 3640) makes it possible for the player to seem to move the game state to another stage (for example, to develop from normal reach effect). The expectation to the next state can be increased to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  After the sub effect display device 3640 is turned to the third turning position, the sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) located within the turnable range is moved to the retracted position by the pair of back rear upper drive motors 3652. The sub effect display devices 3640 are arranged below the main effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 210). This makes it possible to show the player an effect using the entire display screen of the main effect display device 1600 and the entire display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 arranged vertically. For example, by displaying different effect images on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, it is possible to provide the player with a lot of information on the game, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. . Alternatively, by displaying the effect images constituting one image by the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, respectively, the effect image as if the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is expanded downward is displayed. It can be shown to the player, and a portrait screen extended vertically can enjoy a powerful effect image.

  When the sub effect display device 3640 is in the third turning position and in the reverse position, as shown in FIG. 210, the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 is behind the stage 2530 through the transparent center character 2500 and the panel plate 1110. It looks to the side. Therefore, according to the gaming state, by displaying an effect image that points the stage 2530 and the first starting opening 2002 on the sub effect display device 3640, the player can aim the first starting opening 2002 at the game ball. A driving operation can be promoted to entertain the driving operation of the game ball.

  Further, at the third turning position, the turning table 3380 may be reciprocated in the range of a predetermined turning angle by the back and back turning drive motor 3370 of the fixed unit 3360 in the back and back central movable effect unit 3350. As a result, the sub effect display device 3640 seen below the main effect display device 1600 swings to the left and right by turning back and forth, and the effect image displayed on the sub effect display device 3640 physically swings. Can be shown to the player. As a result, since the sub effect display 3640 swings together with the effect image being displayed, the movement of the sub effect display 3640 can be enjoyed, and the sub effect display 3640 is positioned on the front side. A player's attention can be directed to one starting opening 2002. At this time, it is possible to further entertain the player by swinging the sub effect display device 3640 so as to be associated with the effect image displayed on the main effect display device 1600, thereby reducing the interest for the game. It can be suppressed.

  Although the illustration is omitted as the effect using the back movable central production effect unit 3350 and the back movable back production effect unit 3600, in addition to the above, from the first turning position to the third turning position in the second turning position The sub effect display device 3640 may be turned without stopping. Alternatively, the sub effect display device 3640 may be appropriately pivoted between any of the first pivot position, the second pivot position, and the third pivot position, or the sub effect display device 3640 may be pivoted at any position. You may make it move suitably between the retracted position away from the center, and the protrusion position which approached the turning center. In this manner, by using the back-rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back-back upper movable effect unit 3600, the sub effect display device 3640 can be moved to various positions or moved variously. A variety of effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  Subsequently, as effects using the back-rear central movable effect unit 3350 and the back-back lower movable effect unit 3700, for example, with the turning table 3380 at the first turning position, the back of the back-back lower movable effect unit 3700 When the back rear lower rotary ornament 3703 is rotated by the rear lower drive motor 3702, the player plays an effect that the back rear lower rotary ornament 3703 can be seen behind the stage 2530 through the transparent center character 2500 and the panel plate 1110. (See Figure 206 etc.). As a result, the player can be attracted to the back-and-bottom rotating ornament 3703 in which the player's interest is turning, so the player can see the stage 2530 and the first starting opening 2002 of the center character 2500 visible on the front side. Thus, the player can be encouraged to perform the game ball hitting operation aiming at the first starting opening 2002, and the player can enjoy the game ball hitting operation.

  Also, with the turning table 3380 in the second turning position, when the back rear lower rotating decorative body 3703 is rotated by the back rear lower driving motor 3702 of the back rear lower movable presentation unit 3700, within the frame of the center character 2500, And, it is possible to show the player the effect that the back and bottom turning ornament 3703 looks on the upper side of the warp entrance 2520 through the transparent center character 2500 and the panel board 1110 (see FIGS. 207 and 208). This allows the player to attract the player's interest to the left side of the center character 2500 because the player can be attracted to the back and bottom turning ornament 3703 in which the player's interest is rotating. On the other hand, the game ball can urge to hit the left side passing the left side of the center character 2500, and the operation of hitting the game ball can be enjoyed.

  Subsequently, as effects using the back-up movable effect unit 3200 and the back-back movable effect unit 3300, for example, the sub effect display device of the back-up upper movable effect unit 3600 at the third turning position of the turn table 3380 With the 3640 in the retracted position, the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 are moved to the approach position approaching the turning center of the turning table 3380, respectively, and then the back rear left moving A plurality of back-rear-left-turn decorations 3410 and a back-right-rotation ornament 3510 of the decoration unit 3401 and the back-right movable decorations unit 3501 with the third decoration 3411 c and the third decoration 3511 c facing forward, respectively While rotating to the state of three effect positions, the back upper movable main body unit 3230 of the back upper movable effect unit 3200 from the raised position Is moved to the descending position rotates the second rotating decorative body 3233 first rotating decorative body 3232 and on the back on the back with (see Figure 211).

  As a result, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is the back of the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back of the movable effect unit 3200 on the back, the back movable left effect unit 3400, and the back movable back movable right unit 3500 While being covered by the decoration unit 3401 and the back movable rear decoration unit 3501, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the center of the game area 5a, and the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is displayed. By covering, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good (for example, the start of the “big hit” game), and the sense of expectation for the game can be heightened.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 211, of the back top first rotary decoration 3232 covering the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, the back rear left movable decoration unit 3401, and the back rear right movable decoration unit 3501. Since the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 is facing forward on the lower side, the effect image of the sub effect display device 3640 can be shown even if the effect image of the main effect display device 1600 can not be seen. Can also entertain the player.

  As effects using the back-to-back movable effect unit 3200 and the back-to-back movable effect unit 3300, in FIG. However, it may be in the state of the first effect position or in the state of being rotated to the second effect position, and the back rear left rotation decoration 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration 3510 may be rotated. By appropriately selecting the position, effects of various patterns can be presented to the player.

  Also, as effects using the back-up movable effect unit 3200 and the back-back movable effect unit 3300, FIG. 211 shows the state of the turning table 3380 at the third turning position, but the first turning position or the second turning position The state of the turning position can also be set, and effects of various patterns can be shown to the player.

  As described above, in the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 in the back front decoration unit 3100, the back top movable effect unit 3200, and the back back movable effect unit 3300, It is possible to perform light-emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., using back-right movable effect unit 3500, back-upper upper movable effect unit 3600, and back-back lower movable effect unit 3700 as appropriate. By appropriately combining the effects of various patterns can be presented to the player, it is possible to make the player hard to get bored, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and for the player's game It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 and a payout control board 951 attached to the main frame 4, as shown in FIG. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and the door frame side effect display device 460 based on the commands from the peripheral control unit 1511 and main effects A display device 1600 and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the sub effect display device 3640 are provided. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of gaming balls and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls firing of the gaming balls by the rotation operation of the handle 302.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. An MPU, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first starting opening sensor 3102 that detects gaming balls received in the first starting opening 2002, and a second starting opening sensor that detects gaming balls received in the second starting opening 2004. 2402, general winning opening sensor 3101 for detecting gaming balls received in the general winning opening 2001, gate sensor 2401 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate portion 2003, large for detecting gaming balls received in the special winning opening 2005 A winning opening sensor 2403, a first receiving sensor 2404 for detecting gaming balls received by the first receiving port 2007 after being detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403, a second receiving opening after being detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 The second entrance sensor 2405 which detects the game ball accepted in 2008, and the magnetism which detects the illegitimate magnetism inside the game territory 5a Capacitors 3103, the detection signal from the like are input via the respective main control I / O ports.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs control signals from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby enabling the starter port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the V winning port solenoid 2416. Drive signal output, main control I / O port status indicator 1401 of function display unit 1400, normal symbol indicator 1402, normal hold indicator 1403, first special symbol indicator 1404, first special hold number indicator A drive signal is output to the unit 1405, the second special symbol display 1406, the second special hold number display 1407, the round display 1408, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3102, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the first receiving sensor 2404, and the second receiving sensor 2405 do not While a contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3101. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first starting opening sensor 3102 and the second starting opening sensor 2402, Also, the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2401 frequently occurs. Therefore, as the first starting opening sensor 3102, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the gaming ball frequently enters, so the big winning opening sensor 2403, the first reception Detection of gaming balls by the entrance sensor 2404 and the second entrance sensor 2405 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with high durability and long life are also used for the special winning opening sensor 2403, the first inlet sensor 2404, and the second inlet sensor 2405. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3101 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2001 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3101.

  In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 951 and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. To Furthermore, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Note that the main control MPU, as described in detail later, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, shapes these various commands, and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  As described in detail later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply substrate for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Provided). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

  In addition, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate, and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. This blackout notice signal is input not only to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, but also to a payout control board 951 or the like.

6-2. Disbursement control board]
The payout control board 951 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming balls is not shown in detail, but performs payout control by the payout control unit 952 for performing various control related to payout and the firing control by the firing solenoid 682 A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that clears an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a ball removing switch for discharging the gaming balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball removing operation.

6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 for performing various controls on the payout in the payout control board 951 is a micro not shown in detail but incorporating a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or the main control board 1310 In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and are input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. Ru.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 of the far cover unit 270 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 in serial mode via the payout control I / O port. Or, the number of balls of the gaming balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board through the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951), and when the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball is out Based on the detection signal from detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no gaming ball in payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that "the ball is seen" (specifically, the blade Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade 839 engages with the gaming ball in the payout passage 831d and the payout passage 832d of the payout device 830 to notify that the payout blade 839 is difficult to rotate) "3" is displayed When it is detected, it indicates that it is a “counting switch error” (specifically, it indicates that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number “5” is displayed. If it is, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, it indicates that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and if the number "6" is displayed, "full (In detail, it is informed that the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 270 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279), and the number "7" is displayed. If it has been set, it will notify that it is "CR not connected" (indicated that the electric connection is disconnected anywhere from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit) and the number "9" will be displayed. (Specifically, yet that the ball number of game balls no payout has reached a predetermined number spheres) message indicating "stock" when there are informed.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of gaming balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial method, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU Be done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of lent gaming balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the ball rental return display unit 330, and this signal Is input to the ball loan return display unit 330 and displayed.

6-2 b. Launch control unit]
The emission control unit 953 performing emission control by the emission solenoid 682 and ball transmission control by the ball transmission solenoid 255 is not shown in detail, but a emission control input to which detection signals from various detection switches regarding emission are input. A circuit, an oscillating circuit for outputting a clock signal at fixed time intervals, a firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the clock signal, and the firing reference pulse And a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit for outputting a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 255 on the basis of the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls per minute are shot toward the gaming area 5a and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse is generated by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number, and is output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 300, the handle touch sensor 310 detects whether the palm or finger touches the handle 302, and a single-shot button detects whether the player is forced to stop the launch of the game ball according to the intention of the player. The detection signal from the operation sensor 312 is input to the emission control circuit after being input to the emission control input circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the emission control input circuit and input to the emission timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength of striking the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 302 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit receives, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, a drive current for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a at a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 302, and a firing reference pulse is input. At the same time, it outputs to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit is triggered by the input of the ball feed reference pulse, and outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 so that the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 are When one ball is received in the sending unit 250 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is finished, the received gaming ball is sent to the ball emitting device 680 by stopping the output of the constant current. As described above, while the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 255 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply substrate for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control substrate 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control substrate 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

6-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 212, is a door frame side effect based on the peripheral control unit 1511 which performs effect control based on a command from the main control substrate 1310, and the control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. A display 460, a main effect display 1600, and an effect display controller 1512 for performing drawing control of the sub effect display 3640.

6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although the peripheral control unit 1511 for effect control in the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects to which the sound source IC refers are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decoration board of the game board 5 is selected based on the various commands. A game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided from a lamp drive board serial I / O port to a first effect drive board 3032 and a second effect drive The game board side drive data for transmitting to the substrate 3033 or outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various rendering units provided in the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board The driving signal is sent to an electric driving source such as a vibration motor 424 provided in the door frame 3 or transmitted to the first effect driving substrate 3032 and the second effect driving substrate 3033. And a door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal. A screen to transmit door-side drive light emission data from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side, or to display the door frame-side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 In addition to transmitting control data (display command) representing the signal to the effect display control unit 1512 from the serial I / O port for display control unit, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is Output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of various movable effect units provided on the game board 5 are a first effect drive board 3032 and a second effect drive board 3033 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010. It is input to the peripheral control MPU via A detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 440 of the effect operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives, from the effect display control unit 1512, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the peripheral display MPU of the effect display control unit 1512 I am monitoring the operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and various effects are produced from the upper speaker 573, the speaker 921 and the like provided on the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the like. Control is performed so that the combined music and sound effects flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In this embodiment, sound signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or the like as sound information to the upper speaker 573 on the door frame 3 side and the bass speaker 921 of the main body frame 4) By sending (4.1 ch surround signal etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound presentation) than ever before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is a built-in WDT and an external In conjunction with the WDT, it diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 km (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is used. k) BPPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, game board side lighting blink command, which are outputted from the peripheral control MPU to the first effect driving substrate 3032 and the second effect driving substrate 3033 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the movable body drive command and the display command, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The first effect driving substrate 3032 and the second effect driving substrate 3033 output the lighting signal or the blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command to the LED of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 or And outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting blink command to the LED of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 or the like.

  In addition, the first effect drive substrate 3032 and the second effect drive substrate 3033 drive signals based on the received drive command, the vibration motor 424 provided in the door frame 3, and each drive motor provided in the game board 5 Output to etc.

6-4. Effect display control section]
Next, the effect display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 in the peripheral control board 1510 is a microprocessor, although detailed illustration is omitted. Display control MPU as a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, a door frame side effect display device 460, a main effect display device 1600, and a VDP (sub-display control device 3640) An image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, and stored in the image ROM Image RAM to be transferred and copied , And a.

  This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to display a door frame side effect display device The drawing control of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes control data from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the sub effect display device 3640. A plurality of schedule data corresponding to the command, a plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command), and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 Is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the image ROM in time series when transferring the various data to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data is a non-resident area of the image ROM to the image RAM in advance in advance of screen data drawn on the door frame side effect display 460, the main effect display 1600, and the sub effect display 3640 as the schedule data progresses. The order of transferring various data is defined.

  The display control MPU extracts the screen data at the top of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the screen data at the top It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the top screen data one by one from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, The drawing data to be displayed on the sub effect display device 3640 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. In addition, when VDP receives no screen data from display control MPU, door frame side effect display 460, main effect display 1600, and sub effect display 3640 displays an in-progress signal to that effect. Output to A line buffer method is adopted as VDP. With this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right direction of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 is held in the line buffer. The drawing data for one line held in the buffer is output to the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640.

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and the capacity thereof is large. As the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, as the number of sprites drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 increases, the access speed of the image ROM can not be ignored. It affects the speed drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit integrated on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, data for drawing each person is referred to as "sprite". Call. Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, a plurality of sprites will be used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. In these sprites, the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as the "order of superposition of sprites") are set, and the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect It is drawn on the display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 × 3 Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front It is driven by a main scan and a sub-scan that repeatedly performs the main scan in the direction intersecting with the one direction. The door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, when the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the door frame side effect as main scanning When viewed from the front of the display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, they are sequentially output to pixels of one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 shift to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly draw data for the next line. Is input, the main scanning is performed based on the drawing data for the next line, as viewed from the front of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, from left to right It sequentially outputs to the pixels for one line.

[7. Game content]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, so that the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 , The space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 is driven into the upper part in the game area 5a, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the driving strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls in one minute continuously, that is, , The game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge array at an appropriate position, and the game balls are obstacle nails. By the contact, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the gaming ball, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at a suitable position.

  The gaming ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 contacts a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) when entering the left side in a front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, The area to the left of the center character 2500 will flow down. Then, when the gaming ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll on the stage 2530 and move back and forth, and are discharged forward from either the top at the center in the left-right direction or the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top. Be done. When the gaming ball is released into the game area 5a from the central top of the stage 2530, the top is positioned immediately above the first starting opening 2002, so it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  When the game balls rolling on the stage 2530 are discharged from the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top into the game area 5 a, they flow downward toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a are the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 of the start opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and the attack unit 2400 There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general prize winning opening 2001 and the like.

  By the way, when the gaming ball which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2520, it is brought closer to the center in the left-right direction by the left shelf 2202 of the side unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, it may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, and the like. Then, when the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right strike), It is discharged from the right guide passage 2540 of the center work 2500 to the top of the attacker unit 2400. Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540, the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are provided, and pass through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

  Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the second lottery opening that is closed when the lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "normal hit". Is open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004. Then, when a game ball is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also commonly referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed. As the normal fluctuation time is shorter, the game ball for which the “normal hit” is drawn at the gate unit 2003 is accepted by the second start port 2004.

  It should be noted that if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result can not be started, so the normal lottery The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous regular lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results has an upper limit of up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", " Medium hit, small hit, probability change (probable variation), reduced time (short time), and per character (V winning hole (first entrance 2007) can receive game balls) The lottery of the special lottery result is performed to generate "). Then, the selected special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, in the special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, “lost”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “5 15R big hit "," per probability change (probability change) "," time reduction (time shortening) per "," probability change time per hit "," probability change time short loss "," second big hit (for example, per character) ", etc. is there.

  In the case of the special lottery result that the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 causes the advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game ball in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball is received in the big winning hole 2005 when the big winning hole 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of games from the payout device 830 by the main control board and the payout control board 951 A ball is dispensed onto the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 can receive the game ball, by causing the large winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball, many game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 becomes open state which can receive the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) The opening and closing pattern to be closed is repeated several times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 becomes open capable of accepting gaming balls, or to the big winning opening 2005. If any of the predetermined number of (for example, 10) game ball acceptance conditions is satisfied, the open / close pattern (one open / close pattern is referred to as one round) for closing the game ball in an unacceptable closed state is predetermined Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R big hit" is repeated for two rounds, "5R big hit" for 5 rounds, and "15R big hit" for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, change the probability that "special hit" such as "big hit" will be drawn ("perhaps"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result There is a hit that you do ("time hit").

  If the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is "per prize", the first winning opening 2007 for a predetermined time after the large winning opening 2005 can receive the game ball in a predetermined pattern. When it is possible to receive the game ball to (V prize winning opening) and the game ball is received in the first receiving port 2007, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is to maintain a definite change or a short time during a predetermined number of predetermined changes.

  In this embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 are until the special drawing result drawn from the start of the special drawing is suggested by the reception of the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Since the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started when the game ball is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Ru. The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being put on hold. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the main effect display device 1600 (or the sub effect display device 3640). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the main effect display device 1600 (sub effect display device 3640), based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and suggestion of a special lottery result is performed as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the main effect display device 1600 is a pattern in which each pattern row is varied and varied and displayed in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. The columns are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol columns are stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three symbol columns displayed in the stopped state become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the main effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)), and the time which suggests the special lottery result in the main effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the decision image The time until the is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by main effect display device 1600, peripheral operation control board 1510 performs effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the selected special lottery result. And the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the decoration rotary unit 530, etc.), the back unit 3000, and the like. Back in front decoration unit 3100, back on movable effect unit 3200, back in back movable effect unit 3300, back on back center movable effect unit 3350, back on back left movable effect unit 3400, back on back right movable effect unit 3500, back on back movable effect Using the unit 3600 and the back and bottom movable presentation unit 3700 as appropriate, a light emission presentation and a movable presentation , It is possible to perform the display effect, and the like, also can entertain a player with various effects of interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The main effect display device 1600 in the present embodiment is the main effect display means of the present invention, and the plurality of guide pins 3363 of the fixed side unit 3360 in the back and center movable effect unit 3350 of the back and back movable effect unit 3300 are the turn restrictions of the present invention. In the means, the sub effect display devices 3640 of the back upper movable effect unit 3600 attached to the back table 3380 of the center movable effect unit 3350 respectively correspond to the sub effect display means of the present invention. Further, the first turning position, the second turning position, and the third turning position of the turning table 3380 in the present embodiment correspond to the specific turning position of the present invention.

[9. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front view gaming area 5a is rotated by rotating the swivel table 3380 of the back movable center movable effect unit 3350 in the back movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000. The sub effect display device 3640 of the back and rear upper movable effect unit 3600 can be turned around centering on the center of the main effect display device 1600 located at the center of the main effect display device 1600. The sub effect display device 3640 can be arranged at various places with respect to the main effect display device 1600 because the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 can be used. Can be presented.

  More specifically, in the turning direction of the sub effect display device 3640 (turning table 3380), a plurality of specific turning positions (here, the first turning position, the second turning position, the third turning position) by the plurality of guide pins 3363 projecting forward from the unit base 3361. Two turning positions and three turning positions of the third turning position) are provided, and the sub effect display 3640 can be moved to the retracted position farthest from the turning center only at any one of the specific turning positions. In the state where the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the backward position, the sub effect display device 3640 is farthest from the center of the main effect display device 1600, so the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is displayed by the sub effect display device 3640. There is almost no obstruction, and the entire display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be seen from the player side, so that the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be made conspicuous, and the effect image is displayed on a large display screen. Can entertain the player. In this state, since the sub effect display device 3640 is positioned adjacent to the main effect display device 1600, an effect image in which one screen is configured by the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640. Is displayed, it is possible to show the player a large effect image in which the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 are combined, and the player can be surprised and entertained by the powerful effect image.

  When the sub effect display device 3640 is in the retracted position, the range of the turning angle of the sub effect display device 3640 (turn table 3380) is restricted by the guide pin 3363 in contact with the sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630), Since the sub effect display device 3640 can not be turned in a circle, by moving the sub effect display device 3640 in the direction of the turning center (projecting position), the part protruding outward from the turning table 3380 is moved inward. After the restriction by the guide pin 3363 is released, the turning table 3380 is rotated to turn the sub effect display device 3640. Therefore, when the sub effect display device 3640 at the reverse position turns, the sub effect display device 3640 once moves in the direction of the turning center (projecting position) and then turns, so by the movement The player's interest can be drawn to the sub effect display device 3640 for attention, and the turning of the sub effect display device 3640 can be made difficult to miss. Then, in a state where the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the retracted position and the restriction by the guide pin 3363 is released (state of the position within the turnable range), the turning table 3380 is rotated to turn the sub effect display device 3640 The effect image (for example, another character) displayed on the sub effect display device 3640 is rotated around the effect image (for example, a certain character) displayed on the main effect display device 1600 Can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player by the effect which has not been seen with conventional pachinko machines. Further, in this state, when the sub effect display device 3640 is turned, the sub effect image is displayed when the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 display one effect image. When the display device 3640 turns, the external shape of the display screen by the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 changes, so that the player can be made to notice and pay attention to the effect image The effect using the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 can be further enjoyed.

  The sub effect display device 3640 is in the backward position (the backward position at the specific pivot position or the pivotable range in which the restriction by the guide pin 3363 which is shifted from the retracted position to the projecting position) is released. When the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the inner position to the protruding position, it is possible to show the player the effect of moving the sub effect display device 3640 linearly toward the center side. In addition, when the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the backward position side to the projecting position while turning, the effect that the sub effect display device 3640 moves in an arc toward the center side can be shown to the player. Furthermore, when the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the retracted position side to the projecting position while reciprocating in the range of the predetermined turning angle, the effect that the sub effect display device 3640 moves in a zigzag toward the center side It can be shown to the player. Further, when moving the sub effect display device 3640 to the projecting position, it can be moved to the projecting position after being pivoted to an arbitrary position in the turning direction. Therefore, the pattern of movement (rendering) in the direction toward the center of turning of the sub effect display device 3640 can be made colorful, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored. Then, when the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the backward position side to the projecting position, the sub effect display device 3640 approaches the center of turning, and thus the main effect display device 1600 moves to the front side. The display device 3640 can block half of the effect image displayed on the main effect display device 1600, and the player's interest is attracted to the effect image displayed on the sub effect display device 3640 and the effect image is displayed. It can be entertaining. In addition, since the sub effect display device 3640 can be moved from the projecting position to the reverse position side in a reverse motion to that described above, more colorful effects can be shown to the player.

  As described above, since various effects can be presented to the player by the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and the player is entertained to be entertained. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the retracted position to the projecting position, the main effect display device 1600 moves to the center side of the game area 5a in front view while blocking the effect image of the main effect display device 1600. It is possible to make a strong impact on the player, make it possible to attract the player's attention strongly, and make the player think that something good may have happened, and the expectation for the game is felt It can be enhanced to suppress the decline in interest. Therefore, for example, at the time of a predetermined effect for causing the player to suggest the special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the sub effect display device 3640 is By turning or moving to the projecting position, it is possible for the player to think that the special lottery result (for example, "big hit") generated by the advantageous gaming state is drawn, and the generation of the advantageous gaming state It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by raising the sense of expectation for Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention has the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 that can be suitably used for the pachinko machine 1 in which effects suggesting special lottery results are executed because the effects described above are exhibited. A presentation unit can be provided.

  Furthermore, when the sub effect display 3640 is moved to the retracted position at the specific turning position (first turning position, second turning position, and third turning position), the guide pin 3363 restricts the turning of the sub effect display 3640. In the second turning position provided to the right of the turning center, a force acts to turn the sub effect display 3640 (the turning table 3380) by the weight of the sub effect display 3640. However, since the force can be received by the guide pin 3363, the sub effect display device 3640 (turn table 3380) freely turns downward while the sub effect display device 3640 is stopped at the second turn position. In a good state in the effect image by the sub effect display 3640 at the second turning position. Want to can. In addition, since the force to turn the sub effect display device 3640 can be received by the guide pin 3363, the sub effect display device 3640 (the turn table is stopped while the sub effect display device 3640 is stopped at the second turning position. It is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the back and rear turning drive motor 3370 for turning 3380), and it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to overload.

  Further, by causing the guide pin 3363 to project forward from the unit base 3361, it is made to abut on the sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) in the retracted position to restrict turning, and a plurality of guide pins 3363 The sub presentation effect display device 3640 is regulated within the range of different turning angles by appropriately changing the protruding intervals of the plurality of specific turning positions (the first turning position, the second turning position, and the third turning position). Therefore, depending on the specific turning position at which the sub effect display device 3640 is turning, the sub effect display device 3640 can not be turned by the guide pin 3363, or within the range of a predetermined turning angle. It is possible to reciprocate in the direction of rotation. More specifically, for example, in the second turning position, two guide pins 3363 are separated by substantially the same width as the slide frame 3630 to which the sub effect display 3640 is attached in the turning direction. When the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the retracted position so as to be inserted between the two, a portion of the slide frame 3630 that protrudes outward beyond the pivot table 3380 is sandwiched between the two guide pins 3363, The sub effect display device 3640 can be restricted (locked) so as not to turn. In addition, in the first pivot position and the third pivot position, the distance between the two guide pins 3363 in the pivoting direction is wider than the width of the slide frame 3630, and is inserted between the two guide pins 3363. When the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the retracted position, a gap of a predetermined size is provided between the sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) and the two guide pins 3363. As a result, the sub effect display 3640 can be turned in the turning direction, and the sub effect display 3640 can be restricted so as to turn only within a predetermined turning angle range. As described above, according to the specific turning position, the sub effect display device 3640 can not be turned by the guide pin 3363 or can be reciprocated in the turning direction within a predetermined turning angle range. Depending on the specific turning position at which the effect display device 3640 is located, different movements in the turning direction can be shown to the player, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored by colorful effects and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the slide frame 3630 to which the sub effect display 3640 is attached is the space between the two guide pins 3363 in the turning direction except for the specific turning position (the first turning position, the second turning position, and the third turning position). When the sub effect display 3640 is moved toward the retracted position at the pivot position between the two guide pins 3363, the outer side of the slide frame 3630 is the guide pin 3363. , And movement to the retracted position is restricted, and the sub effect display 3640 does not intrude between the two guide pins 3363. Therefore, even if another member is attached to a portion between the two narrow guide pins 3363 (a portion other than the specific turning position), it does not abut on the sub effect display 3640 (slide frame 3630), Since other members can be attached to that part, back-to-back turning drive motor 3370 and turning detection sensor 336 etc. for rotating turning table 3380 can be attached to the part concerned, as mentioned above. The pachinko machine 1 which exhibits an effect can be embodied reliably.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine It may be applied, and even in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  In the above embodiment, in the back and back center movable effect unit 3350 of the back and back movable effect unit 3300, the turning gear 3384 of the turning table 3380 is extended in an arc shape that does not go around, but is limited to this Instead of this, the swing gear 3384 may be extended in an annular shape. Thus, the turning table 3380 can be freely rotated, and an effect that can further entertain the player can be provided.

1 Pachinko Machine 2 Outer Frame 3 Door Frame 4 Body Frame 5 Game Board 5a Game Area 1600 Main Effect Display Device (Main Effect Display Means)
3000 back unit 3010 back box 3300 back-to-back movable effect unit 3350 back-to-back center movable effect unit 3360 fixed side unit 3361 unit base 3361a table accommodating portion 3363 guide pin (swing restricting means)
Reference numeral 3364 Guide bush 3365 Guide roller 3370 Back-turn drive motor 3380 Turn table 3381 Main body portion 3382 Through hole 3383 Flange portion 3384 Turn gear 3385 Detecting piece 3386 Fixed side rack gear 3387 Guide boss 3600 Back-back upper movable presentation unit 3610 Slide plate 3611 Plate side Guide slit 3612 Guide pin 3613 Drive rack gear 3620 Slide gear 3630 Slide frame 3631 Movable side rack gear 3632 Frame side guide slit 3640 Sub effect display device (sub effect display means)
3650 back rear upper slide drive unit 3652 back rear upper drive motor 3653 drive gear

Claims (2)

  A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed;
  A main unit frame on which the game board is mounted;
  A door frame which can be opened and closed on the body frame;
  An upper plate on which game media for playing a game in the game area are stored;
  A lower tray main body capable of storing game media in a storage area formed by a bottom wall portion of a predetermined shape and an upright wall portion of a predetermined height, and a lower tray to which game media can flow from a predetermined supply port
  A bulging portion provided in the door frame and bulging forward in the lower side of the game area in a front view and having a predetermined internal space in which gaming media do not flow from the lower plate;
  Equipped with
  The lower tray main body includes a first lower tray portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed, and a second lower tray portion integrally provided with the first lower tray portion and in communication with the supply port. Have
  The internal space includes a space present at a position higher than the standing wall portion of the lower tray main body at least
  A cover upright wall located in front of the supply port;
  The upright wall portion and the cover upright wall portion of the lower tray main body located in front of the supply port have a diagonal wall portion for rolling game media supplied from the supply port toward the first lower tray portion. And
  The cover upright wall has a boundary wall which is a boundary between a space above the storage area and the internal space.
  A game machine characterized by   A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed;
  A main unit frame on which the game board is mounted;
  A door frame which can be opened and closed on the body frame;
  An upper plate on which game media for playing a game in the game area are stored;
  A lower tray main body capable of storing game media in a storage area formed by a bottom wall portion of a predetermined shape and an upright wall portion of a predetermined height, and a lower tray to which game media can flow from a predetermined supply port
  A bulging portion provided in the door frame and bulging forward in the lower side of the game area in a front view and having a predetermined internal space in which gaming media do not flow from the lower plate;
  Equipped with
  The lower tray main body includes a first lower tray portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed, and a second lower tray portion integrally provided with the first lower tray portion and in communication with the supply port. Have
  The internal space includes a space present at a position higher than the standing wall portion of the lower tray main body at least
  A cover ceiling that covers the upper side of the second lower plate;
  The standing wall portion of the lower tray main body located in front of the supply port has a diagonal wall portion for rolling game media supplied from the supply port toward the first lower tray portion.
  The cover ceiling has a boundary wall that is a boundary between the storage area and the internal space.
  A game machine characterized by

Images